Home

Agilent Technologies 8752C User's Manual

1. REGULATOR A8J2 A15W1 TO MS MOTHERBOARD PREREGULATOR A1732 W20 E a B 5 5 3 p Pl t r H W14 DISPLAY E POWER CABLE A19 GRAPHICS L PROCESSOR y de AS POST IM REGULATOR AQ CPU o a Ot WIA mt lt p lt lt A18W1 08 8 hr 0 E ec o E o A18 DISPLAY FRONT INSIDE sh6200d Figure 5 5 Power Supply Cable Locations Verify the A15 Preregulator Verify that the A15 preregulator is supplying the correct voltages to the A8 post regulator Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of A15W1 s plug Refer to Table 5 2 and Figure 5 6 a If the voltages are not within tolerance replace A15 a If the voltages are within tolerance A15 is verified Continue with Check for a Faulty Assembly Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 9 Table 5 2 Output Voltages Pin A15W1P1 Disconnected A8J2 Connected Voltages A15 Preregulator Mnemonic Voltages 1 2 125 to 100 68 to 72 70V 3 4 22 4 to 33 6 17 0 to 18 4 18V 5 6 22 4 to 33 6 17 0 to 18 4 18V 7 N C N C N C 8 9 4 to 14 7 4 to 8 0 8 V 9 10 9 4 to 14 6 7 to 7 3 8V 11 32 to 48 24 6 to 26 6 25V 12 N C N C N C NOTE The 5VD supply must be loaded by one or
2. Q000 0000 sh687c Figure 14 10 Location of Display Fasteners and Parts 14 16 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures wo DD co 00 Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 29 Figure 14 10 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel Take care to not scratch the glass Remove the two screws item 30 exposed by the previous step Remove the bezel item 31 carefully it is heavy for its size Remove the gasket from the front of the CRT At the A19 GSP assembly disconnect the grey ribbon cable item 32 from the CRT Remove the four screws on the top of the display shield item 33 Start to slide the display out of the instrument by pushing on the back of the display assembly There is a hole at the rear of the display shielding where you can reach in to push the display How to Reinstall the Display 1 2 3 Remove and set aside the bottom shield attached to the replacement display Install the bottom shield on the old display assembly before it is returned for repair Leave the ribbon cable A18W1 in the fastened position for easy retrieval through the rear display shielding Reverse the first six steps After rein
3. START 25 dBm CH 1 300 000 698 MHz STOP 8 4 dBm sh6121c Figure 10 9 Analog Bus Node 7 Node 8 A3 Gnd ground Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 35 A10 Digital IF To observe the A10 analog bus nodes perform step A10 below Then follow the node specific instructions Step A10 Press ANALOG IN MKR SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Node 9 0 37 V 0 37 V reference Perform step A10 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN RESOLUTION HIGH 9 xi Check for a flat line at approximately 0 87V This is used as the voltage reference in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment procedure The voltage level should be the same in high and low resolution the absolute level is not critical Note The marker reading shows units of mV millivolts Node 10 2 50 V 2 50 V reference Perform step A10 above and then press ANALOG IN RESOLUTION LOW Go x1 SCALE REF Q 1 Check for a flat line at approximately 2 5V This voltage is used in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low resolution circuitry 10 36 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 11 Aux Input rear panel input Perform step A10 above and then press ANALOG IN i This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT to drive the analog bus for voltage and frequency measurements It can be used to look at test points within the instrumen
4. System Verification and Performance Tests 2 59 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 11 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Report Number Serial Number Date gt gt 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 075 without Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 300 kHz 20 0 15 0 5 0 13 18 0 13 0 5 0 20 16 0 11 0 5 0 16 14 0 9 0 2 0 14 12 0 7 0 2 0 13 10 0 5 0 2 0 13 8 0 3 0 2 0 20 6 0 1 0 2 0 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 14 2 0 3 0 2 0 13 0 0 5 0 5 0 13 2 0 7 0 5 0 20 4 0 9 0 5 0 16 5 0 10 0 5 0 15 2 60 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 12 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 075 without Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 1 3 GHz 20 0 15 0 5 0 13 18 0 13 0 5 0 20 16 0 11 0 5 0 16 14 0 9 0 2 0 14 12 0 7 0 2 0 13 1
5. Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 23 dB 2 51 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 20 dB 2 88 dB 3 0 GHz to 6 0 GHz 16 dB 2 88 dB Option 004 may degrade transmission source match as much as 2 dB resulting in up to 0 05 dB additional uncertainty in transmission tracking Reflection Tracking Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 0 2 dB 0 009 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 0 3 dB 0 019 dB 3 0 GHz to 6 0 GHz 0 4 dB 0 070 dB 2 6 System Verification and Performance Tests Load Match Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 23 dB 0 40 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 20 dB 0 40 dB 3 0 GHz to 6 0 GHz 18 dB 0 92 dB 1 14 GB 300 kHz to 10 MHz for analyzers with option 006 Transmission Tracking Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 0 2 dB 0 043 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 0 3 dB 0 086 dB 3 0 GHz to 6 0 GHz 0 5 dB 0 172 dB HP 8752C Type N Test Port Characteristics 750 System Directivity Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 10 MHz 30 dB 4 41 dB 10 MHz to 1 3 GHz 40 dB 4 41 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 35 dB 4 41 dB Source Match Reflection Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 30 dB 2 88 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 25 dB 3 30 dB
6. System Verification and Performance Tests Source Match Transmission Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 23 dB 2 88 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 20 dB 3 30 dB Option 004 may degrade transmission source match as much as 2 dB resulting in up to 0 05 dB additional uncertainty in transmission tracking Reflection Tracking Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 0 2 dB 0 2 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 0 3 dB 0 3 dB Load Match Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 23 dB 0 50 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 20 dB 0 64 dB Transmission Tracking Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 0 2 dB 0 20 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 0 3 dB 0 30 dB 2 8 System Verification and Performance Tests System Verification Procedure 1 Switch the analyzer s line power ON Press PRESET 2 If you want a printout of the verification data press SYSTEM CONTROLLER SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS RECORD ON Otherwise go to the next step Note Once you have activated the record function you cannot switch it OFF during the verification procedure Be sure the paper in the printer is setup so that printing starts at the top of the page In case of printer difficulty If you have an HP IB compatible printer verif
7. NO Install the replacement module Keep the defec tive module for return to HP Order restored exchange module from HP Refer to the replaceable parts section for part numbers Order restored exchange module from HP Refer to the replaceable parts section for part numbers Swap replacement mod ule and defective module Put restored exchange module in spares stock Return defective module to HP HP pays postage on boxes mailed i Return defective module to HP USA efficient economical service Restored exchange modules are shipped individually in boxes like this In addition to the circuit module the box contains Exchange assembly failure report Return address label Open box carefully it will be used to return defective module to HP Complete failure report Place it and defective module in box Be sure to remove enclosed return address label Seal box with tape Inside U S A x stick preprinted return address label over label already on box and return box to HP Outside U S A do not use ad dress label instead address box to the nearest HP office sg613d Figure 13 1 Module Exchange Procedure Replaceable Parts 13 3 Gather This Information Before Ordering To order a part listed in the replaceable parts lists 1 Determine the part number
8. 12 21 Receiver Functional Group standard and Option 008 12 24 Receiver Functional Group Option 003 and 004 2 2 12 25 Receiver Functional Group Option 006 12 26 Receiver Functional Group Option 004 and 006 12 27 Module Exchange Procedure 13 3 Cover Removal Procedure a a a a a 14 3 Initial Front Panel Procedure 14 4 Location of Screws on Bottom Edge of Frame 14 5 Location of EXT REF cable and GSP Assembly 14 6 Location of Rear Panel Fasteners 2 14 7 Location of Al and A2 components 02 2 14 8 Location of Source Parts 2 ee 14 10 Location of Preregulator Fasteners and Wires 14 12 Location of Rear Panel Fasteners 2 14 14 Location of Display Fasteners and Parts 2 14 16 Location of Coupler Screws on Bottom Front Frame 14 18 Contents 20 14 12 Location of Directional Coupler Hardware 14 13 Location of Fan Wire Bundle and Screws Contents 21 Tables Service Test Equipment o o Required Tools e o Connector Care Quick Reference A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages Output Voltages 2 en Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection LED Code and Pattern Versus Test Failed
9. o ROM 2L FAIL U25 ROM 1M FAIL U4 o ROM 2M FAIL U5 6 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Check A19 GSP and A18 Display Operation Cycle Power and Look at the Display Switch the analyzer off and then on The display should be bright and focused with the annotation legible and intelligible a If the display is acceptable go to A1 A2 Front Panel Troubleshooting o If the display is unacceptable continue with the next step Perform Display Intensity and Focus Adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter and perform the Display Intensity Adjustments If this does not resolve the problem refer to A19 GSP and A18 Display Troubleshooting located later in this chapter A1 A2 Front Panel Troubleshooting Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset 1 Press on the analyzer 2 Observe that all front panel LEDs turn on and within five seconds after releasing PRESET all but the CH1 LED turns off Refer to Figure 6 4 O If all the front panel LEDs either stay on or off there is a control problem between A9 and A1 A2 See Inspect Cables located later in this chapter a If at the end of the turn on sequence the channel 1 LED is not on and all HP IB status LEDs are not off continue with Identify the Stuck Key Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 7 MESSAGES APPEAR IN SEQUENCE INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT PLEASE WAIT SELF TEST PASSED
10. 1 ENTRY ODO OOOO day 1000 LICJ OOOO gt STIMULUS INSTRUMENT STATE gt O eese 0 UU UU Figure 14 2 Initial Front Panel Procedure 1 Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 1 Figure 14 2 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Remove the bezel item 3 from the frame OPP WD a flat screwdriver D 14 4 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Pry the cover away from the bezel Do not scratch the glass Remove the two screws item 2 exposed by the previous step sh617c Remove the trim strip from the top edge of the front frame by prying it with Remove the two right most screws from the top edge of the frame item 4 sh618c Figure 14 3 Location of Screws on Bottom Edge of Frame 7 Turn the instrument over and remove the right front foot 8 Remove the two screws from the bottom edge of the frame item 5 9 Continue with the procedure which referred you to this one A
11. 23 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment Equipment Required Item HP Part Number BNC alligator clip adapter 8120 1292 BNC cable 8120 1840 Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure This adjustment optimizes tracking between the YO YIG oscillator and the cavity oscillator when they are frequency offset to avoid spurs Optimizing YO cavity oscillator tracking minimizes fluctuations in the phase locked loop 1 Mate a BNC alligator clip to the BNC cable and connect the BNC end to AUX INPUT on the rear panel Connect the alligator clip to A11TP10 labeled ERR Connect the shield clip to A11TP1 GND shown in Figure 3 23 A11TP1 A11TP10 BROWN GND Y ERR UNLK CAV ADJ A3 Source A11 Phase Lock Assembly Bias ASSY sh652c Figure 3 23 A11 Test Point and A3 CAV ADJ Locations 3 58 Adjustments and Correction Constants 2 Press PRESET 3 Press CENTER 400 M u SPAN 50 M u to generate a sweep from 375 MHz to 425 MHz 4 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input 11 1 SCALE REF 10 k m MKR FCTN MARKER gt REFERENCE to observe the phase locked loop error voltage m If spikes are not visible on the display see Figure 3 24 no adjustment is necessary m If spikes are excessive see Figure 3 24 adjust the CAV ADJ potentiometer see Figure 3 23 on the A3 source bias assembly to eliminate the spikes 5 Refer to Start Troubleshooting Here
12. Front Panel Key Codes Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies A12 Reference Frequencies 7 4 A12 Related Digital Control Signals a a a a a aaa a 7 5 VCO Range Check Frequencies 7 6 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signal Locations 7 7 lst IF Waveform Settings o aoa a a a a 7 8 All Input Signals a a 8 1 Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation 8 2 2nd IF 4 kHz Signal Locations a a a a a 8 3 9 1 SS OV OV m e WNHrRwWNMRFBRwWNrRWNe 2nd LO Locations pan pie a e ae a a da a e a a a Components Related to Specific Error Terms 10 1 Test Status Terms e 10 2 Descriptions of Jumper Positions 11 1 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests 2 11 2 Uncorrected System Performance 12 1 Low Band Subsweep Frequencies 2 2 12 2 High Band Subsweep Frequencies 024282 12 3 Mixer Frequencies 2 1 a a a a 14 1 Post Repair Procedures a a a a Contents 22 1 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Table of Service Test Equipment The following tables list the tools and test equipment required to perform the analyzer s system verification troubleshooting adjustment and performance tests Service
13. ILLUMINATES DURING AND AFTER PRESET ILLUMINATES 4 SECONDS DURING PRESET PARAMETERS APPEAR AFTER PRESET CH1 RFL log MAG 10dB REF OdB START 300kHz STOP 1 3GHz 3GHz FOR OPTION 003 or 6GHz FOR OPTION 006 qh66c Figure 6 4 Preset Sequence Identify the Stuck Key Match the LED pattern with the patterns in Table 6 2 The LED pattern identifies the stuck key Free the stuck key or replace the front panel part causing the problem 6 8 Digital Control Troubleshooting Table 6 2 Front Panel Key Codes Decimal H LED Pattern Key Front Panel Block Number CH1 CH2 R L T s 0 Response 1 Entry 2 Entry 3 Response 4 Response 5 Entry 6 Entry 7 e e softkey 3 Softkey 8 softkey 5 Softkey 9 9 Entry 10 Gm Entry 11 e cH 1 Active Channel 12 cH 2 Active Channel 13 Entry 14 Entry 15 softkey 1 Softkey 16 Stimulus 17 e SAVE RECALL Instrument State 18 SEQ Instrument State 19 Stimulus 20 Stimulus 21 e copy Instrument State 22 Instrument State 23 softkey 6 Softkey 24 SCALE REF Response 25 6 Entry Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 9 Table 6 2 Front Panel Key Codes continued Decimal LED Pattern Key Front Panel Block Number CH1 CH2 R L T s 26 Gra Entry 27 MEAS Response 28 FORMAT Response 29
14. Source High Band Operation The high band frequency range is 16 MHz to 1 3 GHz 3 0 GHz for Option 003 and 6 0 GHz for Option 006 These frequencies are generated in subsweeps by phase locking the A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional N VCO The high band subsweep sequence illustrated in Figure 12 5 follows these steps 1 A signal HI OUT is generated by the fractional N VCO The VCO in the A14 fractional N assembly generates a CW or swept signal in the range of 30 to 60 MHz This signal is synthesized and phase locked to a 100 kHz reference signal from the A12 reference assembly The signal from the fractional N VCO is divided by 1 or 2 and goes to the pulse generator 2 A comb of harmonics 1st LO is produced in the A7 pulse generator The divided down signal from the fractional N VCO drives a step recovery diode SRD in the A7 pulse generator assembly The SRD multiplies the fundamental signal from the fractional N into a comb of harmonic frequencies The harmonics are used as the 1st LO local oscillator signal to the samplers One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start signal set from the front panel 3 The A3 source is pretuned The source output is fed to the A4 R sample mixer The pretune DAC in the A11 phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a first approximation frequency 1 to 6 MHz higher than the start frequency This signal RF OUT goes to the A4 R sampler mixer assembly via the couple
15. The Receiver Block The receiver block contains three sampler mixers for the R A and B inputs The signals are sampled and down converted to produce a 4 kHz IF intermediate frequency A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the three IF signals to the ADC analog to digital converter where it is converted from an analog to a digital signal to be measured and processed for viewing on the display Both amplitude and phase information are measured simultaneously regardless of what is displayed on the analyzer The Microprocessor A microprocessor takes the raw data and performs all the required error correction trace math formatting scaling averaging and marker operations according to the instructions from the front panel or over HP IB The formatted data is then displayed 12 4 Theory of Operation A Close Look at the Analyzer s Functional Groups The operation of the analyzer can be divided into five functional groups Fach group consists of several major assemblies and performs a distinct function Some assemblies are related to more than one group and in fact all the groups are to some extent interrelated and affect each other s performance Power Supply The power supply functional group consists of the A8 post regulator and the A15 preregulator It supplies power to the other assemblies in the instrument Digital Control The digital control group consists of the Al front panel and A2 front panel processor th
16. 46 dBm MKA 2 999 J20 GHz Ap REF 08 8 aBm ATTEN 19 38 16 60 dam 19 J87 ll il CENTER 2 999 Ya GHz SPAN 1 00 MHz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 38 kHz SWP 22 2 msec sg625s Figure 7 24 High Quality Comb Tooth at 3 GHz 3 If the signal at the A7 output is correct check the A7 to A4 cable 4 If the signal is not as clean as Figure 7 24 observe the HI OUT input signal to the A7 assembly a On the network analyzer press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES PLL AUTO OFF Otherwise do not readjust the instrument Remove the A14 to A7 SMB cable W9 from the A7 pulse generator assembly CW x 16 MHz b Set the spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 45 MHz and a span of 30 MHz Connect it to the A14 to A7 cable still attached to the A14 assembly Narrow the span and bandwidth to observe the signal closely 5 If the HI OUT signal is as clean as Figure 7 25 the A7 assembly is faulty Otherwise check the A14 to A7 cable or recheck the A13 A14 fractional N as described ahead 7 34 Source Troubleshooting Rechecking the A13 A14 Fractional N Some phase lock problems may result from phase noise problems in the fractional N loop To troubleshoot this unusual failure mode do the following des 2 Set the network analyzer at 60 MHz in the FRACN TUNE mode Use a spectrum analyzer to examine the HI OUT signal from the A14 assembly The signal should appear as clean as Figure 7 25 The comb shape m
17. Consider the following while troubleshooting o All parts of the system including cables and calibration devices can contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms o Connectors must be clean gaged and within specification for error term analysis to be meaningful o Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement calibration minimizing cable instability errors o Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration The connector interface must be repeatable Refer to the Principles of Microwave Connector Care section in the Service Equipment and Analyzer Options chapter for information on connection techniques and on cleaning and gaging connectors 11 2 Error Terms ou Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor subtle performance problems Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter if a blatant failure or gross measurement error is evident a It is often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice using two distinct measurement calibrations to establish the degree of repeatability If the results do not seem repeatable check all connectors and cables Error Terms 11 3 Reflection 1 Port Error Correction Procedure 1 Set any measurement parameters that you want for the device measurement power format number of points IF bandwidth To access the measurement correction menus press CAL Assuming that your calibration kit
18. PLL AUTO ON off PLL DIAG on OFF PLL PAUSE CONT MORE RETURN SERVE MODE MORE MENU Figure 10 3 Service Feature Menus FREQ RESP _ ON off PEEK POKE IF GAN MENU AUTO PEEK POKE F AN ADDRESS ON IF GAIN OFF REEL SPUR TEST on OFF Dase STORE EEPR on OFF SPUR_ AVOID ON off RETURN RESET MEMORY RETURN gt MAIN PWR DAC SOURCE ADJUST MENU ADJUST DACS MENU SRC TUNE on OFF SRC TUNE FREQ ALC ON off SLOPE OFFSET DAC SQUARE LAW LINEAR DAC DETECTOR OFFSET DAC LOG OFFSET DAC WRITE Stee EEPROM SRC ADJUST DACS gt HB FLTR SW on OFF RETURN RETURN sh61370 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 19 Service Modes Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE on OFF SM1 SRC ADJUST MENU SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES allows you to control and monitor various circuits for troubleshooting tests the A13 and A14 fractional N circuits It allows you to directly control and monitor the output frequency of the fractional N synthesizer 10 MHz to 60 MHz Set the instrument to CW sweep mode and then set FRACN TUNE ON Change frequencies with the front panel keys or knob The output of the A14 assembly can be checked at A14J1 HI OUT in high band or A14J2 LO OUT in low band with an oscilloscope a frequency counter or a spectrum analyzer Signal jumps and changes in
19. ee 14 6 Al A2 Front Panel Keyboard Interface 2 2 14 8 How to Remove the Front Panel Keyboard or Interface 14 8 Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall 14 9 ASOC a Ao Ae Me gs et Ne Na A ld e 14 10 How to Remove the Source 14 10 Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall 14 11 ATO Preresulator er der e A A a 14 12 How to Remove the Preregulator 0 14 12 Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall 14 13 A16 Rear Panel Board Assembly 14 14 How to Remove the Rear Panel 2 2 a 14 14 Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall 2 0 2 2 2 14 15 ATS DISPLAY ees See as Be ee ee Ma OE Me ae 14 16 How to Remove the Display 0 0 14 16 How to Reinstall the Display 14 17 A30 Directional Coupler 14 18 How to Remove the Directional Coupler 14 18 Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall 14 19 BEFRI siroaa een Se ee OE Oe ee ce s ok eS 14 20 How to Remove the Fan 2 ee 14 20 Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall 14 20 AOBTL BAtteryo e a a ee ee eS A See aa 14 21 How to Remove the Battery 14 21 Replacing the Battery 0 0 14 21 Post Repair Procedures o e 14 22 Safety and Licensing NOTICE o on s auae a A ee ee a BE Oe BR tb A 15 1 Certification 2 2 2 2 ee a 15 1 ASSISbANCE
20. 14 20 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures A9BT1 Battery How to Remove the Battery 1 Remove the A9 CPU board from its card cage slot 2 Unsolder and remove the battery from the A9 CPU board Warning Battery A9BT1 contains lithium Do not incinerate or puncture this battery Dispose of the discharged battery in a safe manner Replacing the Battery 1 Make sure the new battery is inserted into the A9 board with the correct polarity 2 Solder the battery into place 3 Replace the A9 CPU board Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 21 Post Repair Procedures After you repair or replace an assembly check the following table It lists any additional service procedures that must be performed to ensure the instrument is working properly Table 14 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced or Repaired Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants CC Al Front Panel None Internal Test 0 Keyboard Internal Test 23 A2 Front Panel None Internal Test 0 Interface Internal Test 23 Internal Test 12 A3 Source A9 CC Jumper Position Reflection Test Port Source Default CC test 44 Source Pretune Default CC Test 45 Analog Bus CC Test 46 RF Output Power Test 47 Source Pretune Test 48 Frequency Response CC Tests 53 and 57 Cavity Oscillator CC Test 54 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking EEPROM Backup Disk Output Power Range and Level Linearity A4 A5 A6
21. 2 Determine the quantity required 3 Mail this information to the nearest Hewlett Packard office or in the U S call the hotline number listed in the following section To order a part not listed in the replaceable parts lists Note the instrument model number HP 87526 Note the serial number and options if any see rear panel Describe the part Describe the function of the part Determine the quantity required Mail this information to the nearest Hewlett Packard office or in the U S call the hotline number listed in the following section DD Nun Call 800 227 8164 to Order Parts Fast U S only When you have gathered the information required to place an order contact Hewlett Packard s direct ordering team by calling the following toll free hotline number 800 227 8164 Monday through Friday 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time The parts specialists have direct online access to replacement parts inventory corresponding to the replaceable parts lists in this manual Four day delivery time is standard there is a charge for hotline one day delivery This information applies to the United States only Outside the United States contact your nearest HP office 13 4 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part Listings The following pages list the replacement part numbers and descriptions for the HP 8753C network analyzer Illustrations with reference designators are provided to help identify and loca
22. Measure the Post Regulator Voltages next a If any LED on the A8 post regulator is off or flashing refer to If the Green LEDs On A8 are not All On in this chapter Measure the Post Regulator Voltages Measure the DC voltages on the test points of A8 with a voltmeter Refer to Figure 5 3 for test point locations and Table 5 1 for supply voltages and limits 65V AGND 5VD SDIS 15V 12 6VPP 15V 5VU 5 2V 22V 6V o pb o odo o O O b o 2 3 4 post 5 6 7 8 9 REG IN 100 E A15W1 1 DISPL PWR PLUG wid PLUG sh664c Figure 5 3 AS Post Regulator Test Point Locations Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 5 Table 5 1 AS Post Regulator Test Point Voltages TP Supply Range 1 65V 64 6 to 65 4 2 AGND n a 3 5 VD 4 9 to 5 3 4 SDIS n a 5 15V 14 4 to 15 6 6 12 6 VPP probe power 12 1 to 12 8 7 15V 14 5 to 15 5 8 5 VU 5 05 to 5 35 9 5 2 V 5 0 to 5 4 10 22V 21 3 to 22 7 11 6V 5 8 to 6 2 5 6 Power Supply Troubleshooting If the Green LED on A15 is not On Steadily If the green LED is not on steadily the line voltage is missing or is not enough to power the analyzer Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse 1 Check the main power line cord line fuse line selector switch setting and actual line voltage to see
23. Press PRESET Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON START 11 M u STOP 221 to observe part of both the low and high bands on the analog bus Press MEAS ANALOG IN Aux Input 22 G1 DISPLAY DATA gt MEM DATA MEM to subtract the ground voltage from the next measurement Press ANALOG IN A12 Gnd 1 23 0 MRR CD MA Press MARKER gt REFERENCE SCALE REF 1 x1 and observe the VCO tune voltage trace a Left half of trace 0 1000 mV and right half of trace 100 to 200 mV higher one to two divisions see Figure 3 19 no adjustment necessary Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 51 13 Mar 1995 15 21 25 CH1 AUX M Re 100 maU REF OU e IS RU wa f 11 06 odo MHZ i MARKER 4 Ss 111 MHZ Y 4 n START 11 000 000 MHz STOF 21 000 000 MHz sh6158c Figure 3 19 High Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace a To adjust turn VCO TUNE see Figure 3 20 to position the left half of the trace to 0 125 mV Then adjust HBLB to position the right half of the trace 125 to 175 mV about 1 1 2 divisions higher than the left half A12 Reference Assembly sg66d Figure 3 20 High Low Band Adjustments Locations 3 52 Adjustments and Correction Constants 7 In some cases the VCO TUNE adjustment may need to be performed first If you are having trouble with the high lo
24. Rear Panel Assemblies y O 4 PLACES 4 PLACES wW1is A16 INSIDE sh612c Replaceable Parts 13 11 Cables Top View Item Opt HP Part Qty Description Number A18W1 p o A18 1 CA ASSY A18 to A19 wil 08752 20021 1 SEMI RIGID CA ASSY A3 to A30 see Front Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware w2 5021 8770 1 SEMERIGID CA ASSY A30 to A4 w3 5021 8771 1 SEMERIGID CA ASSY A30 to A5 W4 08753 20030 1 SEMERIGID CA ASSY RF IN to A6 W5 08753 60027 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A7 to A4 W6 08753 60027 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A7 to A5 W7 08753 60027 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A7 to A6 Ws 08753 60061 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A4to A11 Wo 08753 60061 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A14 to A7 W10 08753 60029 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A14 to A12 Wil 08753 60029 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A14 to A13 W12 08753 60029 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A12 to A13 W13 08753 60026 1 FLX RF CA ASSY A16 to A12 W14 08753 60113 1 DISPLAY POWER CA ASSY A8 to A19 W20 08513 60036 1 CA ASSY A9 to A19 13 12 Replaceable Parts Cables Top View wit A18W1 w20 w1 WS W2 W32 Optool W6 WS W7 wu W34 Opt006 w8 wg w10 wit w12 shb8c Replaceable Parts 13 13 Front Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware Item Opt HP Part Qty Description Number 1 0515 0458 3 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x8 CW PN TX Wi 5021 8769
25. Start Troubleshooting Here chapter To use the analog bus to check any one of the nodes press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Then press ANALOG IN Aux Input and enter the analog bus node number followed by x1 Refer to Analog Bus in the Service Key Menus and Error Messages chapter for additional information Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools m error messages m diagnostic routines Phase Lock Error Messages All phase lock error messages can result from improper front panel connections NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means no IF was detected during pretune a source problem Perform the A4 Sampler Mixer Check NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means the IF was not acquired after pretune a source problem Perform the A4 Sampler Mixer Check earlier in this chapter PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED means that a calculation of pretune values was not successful a source or receiver failure Perform the Source Pretune Correction Constants routine as outlined in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter If the analyzer fails that routine perform the A4 Sampler Mixer Check PHASE LOCK LOST means that phase lock was lost or interrupted before the band sweep ended a source problem Refer to Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines next to access the phase lock loop diagnostic service routine Then troubleshoot the problem by following the procedures in this chapter Source Trouble
26. i 8 When the trace is settled record its mean value as shown on the analyzer s display 9 Use the equation Power dBm 20 log o linear magnitude mean value to convert the linear magnitude mean value measured in step 8 to log magnitude Record this calculated value on the Performance Test Record 23 of 28 Note If your analyzer has Option 003 then record the value found in step 9 on the Performance Test Record 23 of 28 under section HP 8752C Options 075 and 003 ONLY Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Option 075 or 300 kHz to 3 GHz Options 075 and 003 with an IF BW of 10 Hz 10 Press AVG IF BW GD to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz 11 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE 12 When the sweep is done record its mean value Use the equation Power dBm 20 log10 linear magnitude mean value to convert the linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude Record this calculated value on the Performance Test Record 23 of 28 In case of difficulty 1 Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter Perform the ADC Linearity Correction Constants Adjustment procedure Rerun the Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level test 2 If this test still fails suspect the A10 Digital IF board assembly 3 Refer to the Receiver Troubleshooting section in this manual for more troubleshooting information System Verification and Performance
27. 12 7 theory of operation 12 7 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 61 power supply troubleshooting chapter 5 1 POWER UNLEVELED 10 60 power up sequence check 4 12 POW MET not on not connected wrong addrs 10 61 POW MET INVALID 10 60 POW MET NOT SETTLED 10 60 preregulated voltages theory of operation 12 7 preregulator Index 15 removal 14 12 theory of operation 12 6 preregulator LEDs check 4 11 preregulator voltages 5 9 PRESET 10 7 preset sequence 4 3 6 8 Pretune Cor 10 14 Pretune Def 10 14 preventive maintenance 11 2 principles of microwave connector care 1 5 printer 1 3 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs 10 61 printer HP IB address 4 7 probe power 12 9 probe photometer 1 3 PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN 10 62 probe power voltages 5 19 procedures A9 CC Jumper Position Adjustment 3 5 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 3 21 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 3 10 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants Test 54 3 24 Display Degaussing Demagnetizing 3 45 Display Intensity Adjustments Test 49 3 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure 3 38 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment 3 46 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 3 54 Index 16 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 3 49 Frequency Response Correction Constants Tests 53 and 57 3 22 High Low Band Transition Adjustment 3 51 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 3 19 Initia
28. 3 Then press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 45 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES to generate new pretune correction constants 4 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 48 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES to generate new pretune correction constants Note Always press PRESET before and after performing an adjustment test 5 Press PRESET and observe the analyzer display o If no error message is displayed restore the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position Then refer to Post Repair Procedures in the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter to verify operation a If an error message is displayed continue with A4 Sampler Mixer Check A4 Sampler Mixer Check The A4 A5 and A6 R A and B sampler mixers are similar in operation Any sampler can be used to phase lock the source To eliminate the possibility of a faulty R sampler follow this procedure 1 Remove the W8 cable A11J1 to A4 from the R channel sampler A4 and connect it to either the A channel sampler A5 or the B channel sampler A6 Refer to Figure 7 8 7 6 Source Troubleshooting TOP RIGHT FRONT AH A5 sh672c Figure 7 3 Sampler Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram 2 If you connected W8 to O A5 press REFLECTION o A6 connect a cable between the reflection and transmission test ports and press TRANSMISSN 3 Ignore the displayed trace but check for phase lock error messages If the phase loc
29. 7 8 frequency response correction constants tests 53 and 57 adjustment 3 22 front panel part numbers 13 8 front panel cables 13 14 front panel hardware 13 14 front panel interface removal 14 8 front panel keyboard digital control 12 10 Index 10 removal 14 8 front panel key codes 6 8 front panel probe power voltages 5 19 front panel processor digital control 12 11 front panel removal 14 4 front panel troubleshooting 6 7 Fr Pan Diag 10 12 Fr Pan Wr Rd 10 10 functional group fault location 4 10 functional groups theory of operation 12 5 fuse check 5 7 G graphics system processor digital control 12 12 green LED on A15 power supply shutdown 12 7 green LEDs on A8 12 8 GSP digital control 12 12 GSP operation check 6 7 H hardkeys 10 2 hardware part numbers 13 14 13 16 13 30 13 82 13 34 13 35 13 36 HB FLIR SW ON OFF 10 21 Hewlett Packard servicing 4 2 high band REF signal 7 17 high low band transition adjustment 3 51 high quality comb tooth at 3 GHz 7 34 HI OUT signal in FRACN TUNE mode 7 35 H MB line 7 32 how to adjust A9 CC jumper position 3 5 adjust ADC offset correction constants 3 21 adjust analog bus correction constants 3 10 adjust cavity oscillator frequency correction constants 3 24 adjust display intensity 3 15 adjust fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband 3 54 adjust frequency accuracy 3 49 adjust frequency response co
30. A4 w3 5021 8771 1 RF CA COUPLER A30 to A SAMPLER A5 W4 08753 20030 1 RF CA TRANSMISSION PORT to B SAMPLER A6 13 18 Replaceable Parts Source and Sampler Parts Standard and Option 003 w1 AL A5 A6 wH pies o LA nay i hA l 0 IQ 1 0 00 lJ in CO 00 l KaD Ot D JU E WS w2 SAMPLERS AND FRONT PANEL CABLES sh61300 A3W7 6 i A3MP1 a ASAWA A3W1 A3W2 A3 SOURCE CABLES sh6205c Replaceable Parts 13 19 Source and Sampler Parts Option 004 006 Ttem HP Part Qty Description Number 1 1250 0590 1 SMB CAP used on coupler A3 08753 60146 1 SOURCE ASSY A3 08753 69146 SOURCE ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A3W1 08753 20107 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID EYO A3A3 to SOURCE A3 A3W2 08753 20032 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID CAV OSC A3A4 to SOURCE A3 A3A2W1 08753 60034 1 RIBBON CA ASSY EYO A3A3 to ALC A3A2 A3W3 08753 20106 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to 70 dB STEP ATTENUATOR A3A5 A3W4 08753 20111 1 RF CA 70 dB STEP ATTENUATOR A3A5 to BULKHEAD A3 OUTPUT ATI 0955 0206 1 8 dB ATTENUATOR connects to B sampler A4 08753 60004 1 R SAMPLER ASSY A5 08753 60004 1 A SAMPLER
31. Disk Procedure any time you perform one or more of the correction constant adjustment procedures Then if you need to replace the A9 assembly you can quickly retrieve the data from the back up disk rather than regenerating it by performing all of the correction constant adjustment procedures Adjustment Procedure Error Messages Oo POW MET INVALID O POW MET NOT SETTLED O POW MET NOT FOUND The messages listed above indicate power meter problems Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 1 If the analyzer displays one of these messages check the test setup the line power the HP IB connections and addresses the model number After the problem has been identified and corrected repeat the test m TROUBLE CHECK SET UP AND START OVER Check your setup against the illustrated test setup and repeat the test Perform Adjustments in This Order When performing more than one adjustment perform them in this order O 0D aon aconNA A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Initialize EEPROMs Test 58 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 Display Intensity Adjustments Test 49 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 Freque
32. Measured Value Measurement dBm Uncertainty dB Standard HP 8752C 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz lt 100 dB N A HP 8752C Option 003 ONLY 300 kHz to 3 0 GHz lt 100 dB N A HP 8752C Option 006 ONLY 300 kHz to 3 0 GHz lt 100 dB N A 3 0 GHz to 6 0 GHz lt 100 dB N A HP 8752C Option 075 ONLY 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz lt 100 dB N A HP 8752C Options 003 and 075 ONLY 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz lt 100 dB N A 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz lt 97 dB N A System Verification and Performance Tests 2 73 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 25 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 7 System Trace Noise HP 8752C All Options Mode IF BW Specification Measured Measurement dBm Value Uncertainty dB dB Standard HP 8752C Reflection Magnitude 3kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Reflection Phase 3kHz lt 0 038 rms N A Transmission Magnitude 3kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Transmission Phase 3kHz lt 0 038 rms N A HP 8752C Option 003 ONLY Reflection Magnitude 3kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Reflection Phase 3kHz lt 0 038 rms N A Transmission Magnitude 3kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Transmission Phase 3kHz lt 0 038 rms N A HP 8752C Option 006 ONLY Reflection Magnitude 3kHz lt 0 010 dB rms N A Reflection Phase 3kHz lt 0 070 rms N A Transmission Magnitude 3 kHz lt 0 010 dB rms N A Transmission Phase 3 kHz lt 0 070 rms N A HP 8752C Option 075 ONLY Reflection
33. POWER SENSOR sh653c Figure 3 3 Source Adjustment Setup Equipment Required Item For 500 Analyzers For 750 Analyzers HP IB cable 2 HP 10833A B C D HP 10833A B C D Power meter HP 436A Option 022 or HP 438A HP 436A Option 022 or HP 438A Power sensor HP 8482A HP 8483A Option HO3 Use HP 8481A Option 006 above 4 2 GHz Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure Several correction constants improve the output power level accuracy of the internal source They relate to power level power slope power slope offset and ALC roll off factors 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 2 Press PRESET Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 11 3 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES to write default correction constants for rudimentary source power accuracy 4 Press PRESET INPUT PORTS R to measure input R 5 Press LocaL SYSTEM CONTROLLER SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS P MTR HPIB to see the address at which the analyzer expects to find the power meter the default address is 13 Refer to the power meter manual as required to observe or change its address to 13 6 Press POWER MTR 438A 437 to toggle between 438A 437 and 436A to match your power meter model number When using the HP 438A use chamnel A Note If you are using an HP 438A power meter connect the HP 8482A power sensor to channel A and the HP 848
34. Performance Test Record The analyzer power level linearity is confirmed by first setting a reference at 5 dBm for relative power measurements Next the analyzer s reflection test port output power is stepped System Verification and Performance Tests 2 19 and measured over its specified power range The power level linearity is found by calculating the difference between the power meter reading and the power offset listed in the Performance Test Record Procedure Power Range for an HP 8752C with Option 004 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 4 HP 8752C REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT Figure 2 4 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range Test Setup HP 8752C Option 004 2 Press PRESET to set the analyzer up for transmission measurements 3 Press MENU POWER PWR RANGE MAN POWER RANGES RANGE O 15 to 10 Enter the power level value listed in the the Performance Test Record 14 of 28 For this power range press G 4 Press DISPLAY DATA MEMORY DATA MEM SCALE REF SCALE DIV 5 GD to normalize and scale down the data trace 5 To activate the analyzer s statistic feature press MKR FCTN MARKER MODE MENU STATS ON 6 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 a 2 20 System Verification and Performance Tests 7 When the analyzer finishes the sweeps record the data trace mean value as shown on the upp
35. SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input ANALOG BUS to switch on the analog bus and its counter 2 Press 21 to count the frequency of the 100 kHz signal 3 Press MENU CW FREQ k m Verify that the counter reading displayed on the analyzer next to cnt matches the corresponding 100 kHz value for the CW frequency Refer to Table 7 2 4 Verify the remaining CW frequencies comparing the counter reading with the value in Table 7 2 a Press 2 M p b Press M p Table 7 2 Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies CW Frequency Analog Bus Node 21 Analog Bus Node 24 Analog Bus Node 25 100 kHz 2nd LO PLREF 500 kHz 0 100 MHz 0 504 MHz 0 500 MHz 2 MHz 0 100 MHz 2 007 MHz 2 000 MHz 50 MHz 0 100 MHz 0 996 MHz 1 000 MHz NOTE The counter should indicate the frequencies listed in this table to within 4 with gate time and signal strength t0 1 Accuracy may vary Source Troubleshooting 7 13 5 Press 24 to count the frequency of the 2nd LO signal 6 Press MENU CW FREQ k m Verify that the counter reading matches the corresponding 2nd LO value for the CW frequency Refer to Table 7 2 7 Verify the remaining CW frequencies comparing the counter reading with the value in Table 7 2 a Press 2 M74 b Press Mg 8 Press to count the frequency of the PLREF signal 9 Press CW FREQ k m Verify that the counter reading matches the corresponding PLREF valu
36. The high band frequencies start at 16 MHz and go up to 1 3 GHz 8 GHz for Option 003 and 6 GHz for Option 006 The high band frequencies are achieved by harmonic mixing with a different harmonic number for each subsweep The low band frequencies 800 kHz to 16 MHz are down converted by fundamental mixing The source functional group consists of the individual assemblies described below A14 A13 Fractional N These two assemblies comprise the synthesizer The 30 to 60 MHz VCO in the Al4 assembly generates the stable LO frequencies for fundamental and harmonic mixing A12 Reference This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument by dividing down the output of a 40 MHz crystal oscillator In low band operation the output of the fractional N synthesizer is mixed down in the A12 reference assembly The 2nd LO signal from the A12 assembly is explained in Receiver Theory A7 Pulse Generator A step recovery diode in the pulse generator produces a comb of harmonic multiples of the VCO output These harmonics provide the high band LO local oscillator input to the samplers In low band operation the pulse generator is turned off 12 14 Theory of Operation A11 Phase Lock This assembly compares the first IF derived from the source output in the A4 R sampler to a stable reference and generates an error voltage that is integrated into the drive for the A3 source assembly A3 Source This as
37. coos oo f o 0 O o00p0p o 0000 000000 p REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT ADAPTER 500 752 CABLE 800 ADAPTER MINIMUM LOSS PAD Sere 24 INCH MINIMUM LOSS PAD 24 INCH RPEN HP 8496A x 110 dB STEP PRN ATTENUATOR HP 11667A POWER SPLITTER ADAPTER TYPE N m TO TYPE N m DIRECT CONNECTION sh699c Figure 2 15 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 2 42 System Verification and Performance Tests 5 On the analyzer press TRANSMISSN POWER 0 x1 Using the analyzer s front panel knob adjust the test port power for a reading of 30 000 dBm on the HP 8902A Wait for the reading to stabilize Note Ignore the UNCAL annunciation on the HP 8902A 6 On the HP 8902A press the blue shift key and SET REF ve 12 13 14 On the analyzer press CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE THRU After the beep press DONE RESPONSE On the analyzer press SAVE STATE Press MKR FCTN MARKER MODE MENU STATS ON Set the HP 8496A to 10 dB 10 11 On the analyzer press TRIGGER MENU SINGLE Record the mean value as shown on the analyzer s display in the Trans Port column of the Performance Test Record Record the HP 8902A readout in the HP 8902A column of the Performance Test Record Calculate the difference between the Trans Port and the HP 8902A Take the absolute value of this d
38. if visible spikes persist CHi AUX Re 10mU REF 7 269 mU j gt 7 2004 mU CHI AUX Re 10mU REF 7 269 mU 1 7 268 mU a Acceptable b Excessive sg637s Figure 3 24 Display of Acceptable Versus Excessive Spikes Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 59 Start Troubleshooting Here The information in this chapter helps you m Identify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault m Locate the specific troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or peripheral at fault To identify the portion of the analyzer at fault follow these procedures Step 1 Initial Observations Step 2 Confidence Test Step 3 HP IB System Check Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Start Troubleshooting Here 4 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Perfo
39. n FAILED 10 62 sensor power 1 3 sequence check for power up 4 12 Serial Cor 10 15 serial number correction constant test 55 adjustment 3 32 service and support options 1 9 service center procedure 4 2 service features 10 19 service key menus 10 1 service features 10 19 service key mnemonics 10 1 service mnemonic definitions 10 52 SERVICE MODES 10 20 service modes more menu 10 23 service offices 15 2 service test equipment 1 1 service tools list 1 1 servicing the analyzer 4 2 setup fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 55 phase lock error troubleshooting 7 4 setup check for disk drive 4 8 setup check for plotter or printer 4 8 Index 18 short and open device verification 9 6 shutdown circuit post regulator 12 8 shutdown circuit on A8 12 8 shutdown circuitry disable 5 16 signal examination for phase lock 7 37 signal separation A30 dual directional coupler 12 23 built in test set 12 23 theory of operation 12 23 signals required for A10 assembly operation 8 9 SLOPE DAC 10 21 softkeys 10 2 source All phase lock 12 15 A12 reference 12 14 A13 frac N analog 12 14 A14 frac N digital 12 14 A3 source 12 15 AT pulse generator 12 14 high band theory 12 19 low band theory 12 16 part numbers 13 18 25 source 12 15 theory of operation 12 3 12 14 source and All phase lock check 7 8 source attenuator theory of operation 12 8 Source Cor 10 14 Source Def 10
40. rudimentary source power accuracy This adjustment must be performed before the Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 45 procedure 1 2 3 D Nn Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Press PRESET Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 44 amp 1 When the display shows Source Def ND press EXECUTE TEST Press YES at the query to alter the correction constants When complete DONE should appear on the display Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 3 8 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 Equipment No equipment is required to perform this adjustment Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure This adjustment generates two default correction constants which pretune the YIG oscillators to insure proper phase lock des 2 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Press PRESET 3 Press SERVICE MENU TESTS 45 xi When the analyzer displays Pretune Def press EXECUTE TEST Press YES at the query to alter the correction constants and observe the display m If Pretune Def DONE is displayed the adjustment is complete m Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup
41. s highest CW frequency since this is the worse case for the system trace noise For an analyzer with Options 003 and 075 a CW frequency of 2 GHz is selected instead of 3 GHz 2 36 System Verification and Performance Tests Procedure Reflection Trace Noise Magnitude 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 138 HP 8752C REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT SHORT TERMINATION xh63c Figure 2 13 Reflection Trace Noise Test Setup 2 Press PRESET POWER 0 NUMBER of POINTS OOOO x1 3 Tf you are testing a standard analyzer press CW FREQ QQ G n Otherwise refer to the following table and choose a CW frequency according to the specified option s Description CW Frequency HP 8752C with Option 003 3 GHz HP 8752C with Option 006 6 GHz HP 8752C with Option 075 1 3 GHz HP 8752C with Options 075 and 003 2 GHz 4 To get a better view of the system trace noise press AUTOSCALE 5 Press MKR FCTN MARKER MODE MENU STATS ON to activate the instrument statistics feature System Verification and Performance Tests 2 37 6 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 x1 7 When the measurement is done record the s dev standard deviation value shown in the upper right hand corner of the analyzer display on the Performance Test Record Reflection Trace Noise Phase 8 Press FORMAT PHASE AUTOSCALE 9 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU
42. service office if the procedure was not successful 5 Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure N 3 42 Adjustments and Correction Constants 17 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments Equipment Narrow non conductive flathead screwdriver 2 inches long Warmup time 30 minutes Description and Procedure Only vertical position and focus can be adjusted in the field this includes both customers and service centers These adjustments are optional and should rarely be required Caution Any other adjustments to the display will void the warranty Vertical Position Adjustment 1 To access vertical and focus adjustments controls remove the side panel nearest to the display Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 43 FOCUS ADJUST CONTROL VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT CONTROL sh641c Figure 3 14 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Controls 2 Insert a narrow non conductive flat head screw driver at least 2 inches long into the vertical position hole See Figure 3 14 3 Adjust the control until the softkey labels are aligned with the softkeys Focus Adjustment 4 Use the same screwdriver to adjust the focus until the display is the most readable 3 44 Adjustments and Correction Constants 18 Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Equipment Any CRT demagnetizer or bulk tape eraser Warm up time 5 minutes Description and Proce
43. sh684c Remove seven screws from the rear panel assembly two from the top and bottom frames item 9 and three from the back item 10 Figure 14 5 Pull the rear panel away from the frame Disconnect the ribbon cable from its motherboard connector by pressing down and out on the connector locks Continue with the procedure which referred you to this one Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 7 A1 A2 Front Panel Keyboard Interface How to Remove the Front Panel Keyboard or Interface 1 Perform the Initial Front Panel Procedure 2 Slide the front panel over the type N connectors ED E y 7 PLACES 4 PLACES sh620c Figure 14 6 Location of Al and A2 components 14 8 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 3 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the front panel by pressing down and out on the connector locks Remove the probe power cable item 11 and the RPG cable item 12 Remove the four screws in the corners of the A2 assembly item 13 Insert the blade of a small flat screwdriver into the slots on the sides of the ribbon cable connector item 14 Gently pry upwards on either side of the connector until it is loose 7 Remove the remaining seven screws from the Al assembly item 15 AS Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall After reinstallation refer to Post Repair Procedures at the end of this
44. terms 9 3 connection techniques 1 5 connector care of 1 5 CONTINUE TEST 10 5 controller HP IB address 4 7 controller troubleshooting 4 9 conventions for symbols 10 52 correction constants 3 1 initialize EEPROMs test 58 3 37 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 55 Index 6 CORRECTION TURNED OFF 10 55 counter 10 25 COUNTER OFF 10 27 counter frequency 1 3 counter readout location 10 41 cover removal 14 3 CPU digital control 12 11 CPU operation check 6 4 CPU walking one pattern 6 16 CRT demagnetizer or bulk tape eraser 1 3 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 55 customer assistance 15 1 D damage to center conductors 9 3 DEADLOCK 10 55 DELETE 10 6 demagnetizer or bulk tape eraser 1 3 description of tests 10 7 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 56 diagnose softkey 10 7 diagnostic error terms 11 2 diagnostic LEDs for A15 5 4 diagnostic routines for phase lock 7 40 diagnostics internal 10 2 diagnostics of analyzer 4 3 diagnostic tests 6 11 diagram A4 sampler mixer to phase lock cable 7 7 digital control group 6 3 diagram of HP 8752C 4 16 diagram of power supply 5 24 DIF Control 10 9 DIF Counter 10 9 digital control A10 digital IF 12 11 A16 rear panel 12 13 A18 display 12 12 A19 graphics system processor 12 12 A19 GSP 12 12 Al front panel keyboard 12 10 A2 front panel processor 12 11 A9 CPU 12 11 digital signal processor 12 12 EEPROM 12 12 main CP
45. tracking 2 8 chassis part numbers 13 28 check Ist LO signal at sampler mixer 8 12 4 MHz REF signal 8 8 A10 by substitution or signal examination 8 8 A11 phase lock 7 37 A12 digital control signals 7 23 A12 reference 7 13 A13 A14 Fractional N 7 24 A14 Divide by N Circuit Check 7 29 A14 to A13 digital control signals 7 30 A15 Preregulator 5 9 A19 GSP and A18 display operation 6 7 A1 A2 front panel 6 7 A3 source and A11 phase lock 7 8 A4 sampler mixer 7 6 AT pulse generator 7 33 A8 fuses and voltages 5 14 A9 CPU control 6 4 CPU control 6 4 digital control 4 12 disk drive 4 8 fan voltages 5 22 FN LO at Al2 7 19 for a faulty assembly 5 11 GSP and A18 display operation 6 7 Index 5 HP IB systems 4 7 line voltage selector switch fuse 5 7 motherboard 5 13 operating temperature 5 13 operation of A19 GSP and A18 display 6 7 operation of A9 CPU 6 4 phase lock error message 7 4 plotter or printer 4 8 post regulator voltages 5 5 power supply 4 11 power supply voltages for display 6 13 power up sequence 4 12 preregulator LEDs 4 11 R A and B inputs 8 4 rear panel LEDs 4 11 the 4 kHz signal 8 11 YO coil drive with analog bus 7 11 check front panel cables 6 10 cleaning of connectors 1 5 CLEAR LIST 10 6 CMOS RAM 10 7 coax cable 1 3 codes for analog bus 10 53 coefficients 11 1 comb tooth at 3 GHz 7 34 components related to specific error
46. w3 gt A L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz L I H 1 000MHz 1 1 ee So A 2 A 2 A E o es A e e L weds or 3 2nd LO tst LO w50 REFLECTION ORE a e e ee ee a e a Pas B SAMPLER sous MIXER H 15MHz TO 5 999GHz OPTION 006 Cee 300kHz TO 6GHz OPTION 006 Transmission W34 8 INPUT S PORT t L i E L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz H 1 000MHz sh692c Figure 4 7 HP 8752C Overall Block Diagram 4 of 4 Option 004 and 006 Start Troubleshooting Here 4 21 Power Supply Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow the procedures in the order given unless o an error message appears on the display refer to Error Messages near the end of this chapter o the fan is not working refer to Fan Troubleshooting in this chapter The power supply group assemblies consist of the following m A8 post regulator m Ald preregulator All assemblies however are related to the power supply group because power is supplied to each assembly Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty
47. 0 0 0 0 cence eee eens HP 85036B Cable 750 type N 24 IMC ooo HP P N 8120 2408 Warm up time one hour Description This test determines the HP 8752C Option 075 or HP 8752C Options 075 and 003 transmission test port input noise floor level It is tested at 0 dBm at two different IF bandwidths Procedure Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Option 075 or 300 kHz to 3 GHz Options 075 and 003 with an IF BW of 3 kHz 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 10 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 29 HP 8752C REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT xh62e Figure 2 10 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 1 2 Press POWER 0 INPUT PORTS B 3 To normalize the data trace press DISPLAY DATA MEMORY DATA MEM A Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 11 HP 8752C Cable Type N 24 inch TERMINATION Type N f xh618 Figure 2 11 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 2 5 Tf your analyzer has Option 004 press POWER LIN MAG AUTOSCALE If your analyzer does not have Option 004 installed press POWER E 2 G1 FORMAT LIN MAG AUTOSCALE 6 Set the power to 85 dBm by pressing POWER 8 G Gu 2 30 System Verification and Performance Tests T Press MKRFCTN MARKER MODE MENU STATS ON MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5
48. 00000 us 0 00000 s 1 00000 us LD mvalts div se 0 000 volts Timebase 200 ns div Delay 9 00000 s sg612s Figure 7 10 REF Signal at A11TP9 5 MHz CW If REF looks correct continue with 4 MHz Reference Signal If REF is incorrect in low band continue with FN LO at A12 Check 7 18 Source Troubleshooting FN LO at A12 Check 1 Use an oscilloscope to observe the FN LO from A14 at the cable end of A14J2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to switch on the fractional N service mode Use the front panel knob to vary the frequency from 30 to 60 MHz The signal should appear similar to Figure 7 11 The display will indicate 10 to 60 8 MHz a If the FN LO signal is correct the A12 assembly is faulty N o If the FN LO signal is incorrect continue with A13 A14 Fractional N Check 50 000 nsec 0 00000 se Ch 2 100 0 mvolts div Offset 0 000 volts Timebose 10 0 nsec div Delay 0 00000 sec sg613s Figure 7 11 Typical FN LO Waveform at A12J1 Source Troubleshooting 7 19 4 MHz Reference Signal This reference signal is used to control the receiver If faulty this signal can cause apparent source problems because the CPU uses receiver data to control the source At A12TP9 it should appear similar to Figure 7 12 S09 000 nsec 0 00000 sec 500 000 nsec 0 000 volts Delay 0 00000 sec 1 1 000
49. 08752 60030 1 750 FRONT DRESS PANEL 2 2190 0016 3 WASHER LOCK INTERNAL T 3 8 INCH 0 377 INCH ID 3 2950 0043 3 NUT HEX DOUBLE CHAMFER 3 8 32 THREAD 4 01650 47401 1 RPG KNOB 5 0515 0374 6 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 10 CW PN TX 6 08752 40003 1 KEYPAD RUBBER qe 0515 1410 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 0 x 20 CW PN TX 8 0515 0375 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 0 x 16 CW PN TX Al 08753 60140 1 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD ASSY AIW1 RIBBON CA ASSY Al to A2 p o Al see Cables Top View A2 08753 60091 1 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE BD ASSY RPG1 08757 60053 1 ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR RPG Wis 08711 60037 1 PROBE POWER CA ASSY A2 to FRONT PANEL Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes 13 8 Replaceable Parts Front Panel Assemblies not visible connects RPG not visible A1W1 Al sh610c Replaceable Parts 13 9 Rear Panel Assemblies Item Opt HP Part Qty Description Number 1 REAR FRAME see Chassis Parts 2 2190 0584 4 WASHER LOCK HELICAL 3 0 MM 3 1 MM ID 3 0515 0965 4 SCREW SOCKET HEAD CAP M3 x 0 5 14MM LONG 4 08753 20040 1 FAN GASKET 5 08753 00047 1 REAR PANEL A16 08752 60013 1 REAR PANEL BD ASSY includes A16W1 B1 08753 60047 1 FAN includes cable assembly W13 CA ASSY REAR PANEL to A12 see Cables Top View Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes 13 10 Replaceable Parts
50. 13 28 Replaceable Parts Chassis Parts sh627c Replaceable Parts 13 29 Top View of Attaching Hardware and Post Regulator Fuses Ref Desig HP Part Qty Description Number IF 0515 2086 1 SCREW MACHINE M4 0x 7 PC FL TX 2 0515 1400 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 8 PC FL TX 3 0515 0374 15 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 10 CW PN TX 4 0515 2035 1 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 16 PC FL TX 5 0515 0458 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 8 CW PN TX 6 0515 0377 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 10 CW PN TX 7 0515 0390 3 SCREW MACHINE M4 0x 6 CW FL TX ss 0515 0433 1 SCREW MACHINE M4 0x 8 CW FL TX oF 0515 0664 1 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 12 CW PN TX 10 3050 0891 1 WASHER FLAT M3 0 NOM A8F1 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 0 25x0 27 A8F2 2110 0424 1 FUSE 0 75A 125V NTD 0 25x 0 27 A8F3 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 0 25x0 27 ASF4 2110 0424 1 FUSE 0 75A 125V NTD 0 25x 0 27 ASF5 2110 0476 1 FUSE 4A 125V NTD 0 25x0 27 ASF6 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 0 25x0 27 ASF7 2110 0476 1 FUSE 4A 125V NTD 0 25x0 27 ASF8 2110 0047 1 FUSE 1A 125V NTD 0 25x0 27 ASF9 2110 0046 1 FUSE 0 5A 125V NTD 0 25x 0 27 MP1 08753 00039 1 A5 ISOLATION GROUNDING CLIP MP2 08753 00040 1 A7 ISOLATION GROUNDING SHIELD MP3 08753 40006 1 PC BOARD STABILIZER BAR 08753 20062 1 PC BOARD STABILIZER CAP E 0515 0374 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 10 CW PN TX attaches cap to bar MP4 08753 00044 1 SOURCE RETAINER BRACKET Metric hardware other thread types will damage thr
51. 14 source default correction constants test 44 adjustment 3 8 Source Ex 10 12 source group assemblies 7 1 source group troubleshooting appendix 7 39 source match Es 11 13 source match reflection characteristics type N test port 500 2 6 type N test port 750 2 7 source match transmission characteristics type N test port 500 2 6 type N test port 750 2 8 SOURCE PLL ON OFF 10 21 source power 7 3 SOURCE POWER TRIPPED RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 62 source pretune correction constants test 48 adjustment 3 14 source pretune default correction constants test 45 adjustment 3 9 source spur avoidance tracking adjustment 3 58 source troubleshooting chapter 7 1 spectrum analyzer 1 3 speed fan 5 22 splitter power 1 3 spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 54 SPUR AVOID ON OFF 10 24 SPUR TEST ON OFF 10 23 SRC ADJUST DACS 10 21 SRC ADJUST MENU 10 20 SRC TUNE FREQ 10 20 SRC tune mode frequency output 7 8 SRC tune mode phase locked output compared to open loop 7 9 SRC tune mode waveform integrity 7 9 SRC TUNE ON OFF 10 20 stable HI OUT signal in FRACN TUNE mode 7 35 static control table mat and earth ground wire 1 3 status terms for test 10 4 step attenuator 1 3 STORE EEPR ON OFF 10 23 stuck key identification 6 8 support and service options 1 9 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 63 Sweep Trig 10 10 symbol conventions 10 52 symbols instrument markings 15 5
52. 15 to 10 10 0 1 0 0 100 25 to 0 20 0 1 5 0 060 35 to 10 30 0 1 7 0 050 45 to 20 40 1 9 0 050 55 to 30 50 2 2 0 055 65 to 40 60 2 5 0 080 75 to 50 70 2 8 0 200 85 to 60 80 3 1 0 565 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 63 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 15 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 300 kHz 15 0 10 0 2 0 06 12 0 7 0 2 0 07 10 0 5 0 2 0 09 8 0 3 0 2 0 06 6 0 1 0 2 0 03 4 0 1 0 2 0 02 2 0 3 0 2 0 01 0 0 5 0 5 0 09 2 0 T7 0 5 0 06 4 0 9 0 5 0 03 5 0 10 0 5 0 03 10 0 15 0 5 0 03 2 64 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 16 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncerta
53. 16 to 31 31 to 61 61 to 121 121 to 178 178 to 296 296 to 536 536 to 893 893 to 1607 1607 to 3000 3000 to 4950 4950 to 6000 12 22 Theory of Operation Signal Separation The A30 Dual Directional Coupler Signal separation in the analyzer is accomplished with a dual directional coupler which by itself comprises the analyzer s built in test set The dual directional coupler is connected to the reflection test port It is used to separate the incident signal going to the device under test from reflected signal coming from the device under test The incident signal is applied to the R sampler mixer via one of coupled arms of the dual directional coupler Meanwhile the reflected signal is routed from the reflection test port via the other coupled arm of the dual directional coupler to the input of the A sampler mixer in the receiver The transmitted signal is fed directly from the transmission test port to the B sampler mixer Analyzers having Option 006 have an 8 dB pad between the transmission test port and the B sampler mixer Receiver Theory The receiver functional group consists of the following assemblies A4 R sampler mixer A5 A sampler mixer A6 B sampler mixer A10 digital IF These assemblies combine with the A9 CPU described in Digital Control Theory to measure and process input signals into digital information for display on the analyzer Figure 12 6 through Figure 12 9 are simplified block diagrams
54. 18V and 18V supplies are post regulated to 15V and 12 6V to provide a power source at the front panel for an external RF probe or milli meter modules Digital Control Theory The digital control functional group consists of the following assemblies a Al front panel m A2 front panel processor m A9 CPU a Al0 digital IF m Al6 rear panel a A18 display m A19 GSP These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer They provide math processing functions as well as communications between the analyzer and an external controller and or peripherals Figure 12 3 is a block diagram of the digital control functional group Theory of Operation 12 9 rep q 21 l GREEN q H p FROM A19 GSP Brue q A2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR as TEST SET aa o e TEST SETI imterrace K 222222222222 A1 FRONT PANEL i l U o gt HP 1B K ERRATE A F INTERFACE KZ 42222227771 l ER FRONT l l PANEL a L PROCESSOR KEYBOARD INSTRUMENT BUS i AA Focus I INTENSI TY l Liz ees eek gs oh e ees te EXT e TRIGGER LAS CPU a aux amz YO J INPUT AR DIG E cs E 7 MAIN CPU 1 A10 DIGITAL IF 92 3 LLLZZZ AUX t
55. 3 11 Equipment Required 2 ee en 3 11 Warm up LIME a ta es HE aE a Ye 3 11 Description and Procedure 0 0 04 2084 3 11 Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry 2 3 12 Source Correction Routine 2 00087 3 13 6 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 3 14 Equipment Required o o o 3 14 Warm Up LIME tec e hes Se Be Ti A ee a BR ne PS 3 14 Description and Procedure 0 ee ee 3 14 7 Display Intensity Adjustments Test 49 2 0 0022 3 15 Equipment Required 2 2 ee ee 3 15 Warm up time ee e e aa O A N Sg 3 15 Description and Procedure ee e 3 15 Background Adjustment o a a a a 3 15 Maximum Intensity Adjustment a 3 16 Operating Default Intensity Adjustment 3 18 8 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 3 19 Equipment Required a a e 3 19 Warm up time soe aus aea ee 3 19 Description and Procedure a a 3 19 9 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 3 21 EQuipments 5 2 A a ae a hee ORS Began A 3 21 Warm up time E ee 3 21 Description and Procedure 0 0 0008 2004 3 21 10 Frequency Response Correction Constants Tests 53 and 57 3 22 Equipment Required 2 ee en 3 22 Contents 5 Warm up time Description and Procedure ee ee ee 11 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants Test 54 Equipment Required Wa
56. 5 Entry 30 4 Entry 31 softkey 2 Softkey 32 span Stimulus 33 y Entry 34 ENTRY OFF Entry 35 CENTER Stimulus 36 softkey 8 Softkey 37 1 Entry 38 LocaL Instrument State 39 softkey 7 Softkey 40 47 Not used 48 Entry 49 O Entry 50 Ga Entry 51 GR Response 52 MKR FCTN Response 53 Q Entry 54 0 Entry 55 softkey 4 Softkey Inspect Cables Remove the front panel assembly and visually inspect the ribbon cable that connects the front panel to the motherboard Also inspect the interconnecting ribbon cable between Al and A2 Make sure the cables are properly connected Replace any bad cables 6 10 Digital Control Troubleshooting Test Using a Controller If a controller is available write a simple command to the analyzer If the analyzer successfully executes the command the problem is either the A2 front panel interface or W17 A2 to motherboard ribbon cable is faulty Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests The analyzer incorporates 20 internal diagnostic tests Most tests can be run as part of one or both major test sequences all internal test 0 and preset test 1 l Press SERVICE MENU TESTS 0 x1 EXECUTE TEST to perform All INT tests 2 Then press to see the results of the preset test If either sequence fails press the f Q keys to find the first occurrence
57. 6 With the FRACN TUNE service feature vary the frequency from 30 MHz to 60 8 MHz The period of the observed signal should vary from 5 5 ps to 11 ps a If this procedure produces unexpected results the A14 assembly is faulty a If this procedure produces the expected results perform the A14 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check Remember to replace the A13 assembly Source Troubleshooting 7 29 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check The A14 assembly generates a TTL cycle start CST signal every 10 microseconds If the VCO is oscillating and the CST signal is not detectable at A14TP3 the A14 assembly is non functional Use the CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and monitor the signals in Table 7 6 Since these TTL signals are generated by A14 to control A138 check them at A13 first Place A13 on the large extender board The signals should look similar to Figure 7 21 If these signals are correct the A13 assembly is defective Table 7 6 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signal Locations Mnemonic A13 Location A14 Location CST none TP3 L FNHOLD P2 2 P2 2 FNBIAS P2 5 P2 5 API P2 32 P2 32 API2 P2 3 P2 3 APIS P2 34 P2 34 API4 P2 4 P2 4 API5 P2 35 P2 35 NLATCH P1 28 P1 58 7 30 Source Troubleshooting loo yy y CST il A LFNHOLD a AA FN BIAS MU APH 5 Th FN LATCH sg622s Figure 7 21 A14 Generated Digital Control Signals Source Troubleshooting 7 31 H MB Lin
58. 6 394 0408 MHz STOP 6 000 460 000 MHz sh6154c Figure 10 18 Analog Bus Node 30 Node 31 Count Gate analog bus counter gate Perform step A14 above and then press ANALOG IN 51 x1 SCALE REF ED WER You should see a flat line at 5 V across the operating frequency range The counter gate activity occurs during bandswitches and therefore is not visible on the analog bus To view the bandswitch activity look at this node on an oscilloscope using AUX OUT ON Refer to AUX OUT on OFF under the Analog Bus Menu heading Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 49 PEEK POKE Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE Allows you to edit the content of one or more memory addresses The keys are described below Caution The PEEK POKE capability is intended for service use only PEEK POKE ADDRESS accesses any memory address and shows it in the PEEL D active entry area of the display Use the front panel knob entry keys or step keys to enter the memory address of interest PEEK PEEK Displays the data at the accessed memory address POKE POKE D allows you to change the data at the memory address accessed by the PEEK POKE ADDRESS softkey Use the front panel knob entry keys or step keys to change the data The A9CC jumper must be in the ALTER position in order to poke RESET MEMORY Resets or clears the memory where instrument states are stored To do this press RESET
59. A3 OUTPUT A4 08753 60004 1 RSAMPLER ASSY A5 08753 60004 1 A SAMPLER ASSY A6 08753 60004 1 BSAMPLER ASSY Wi 08752 20021 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to COUPLER A30 w3 5021 8771 1 RF CA COUPLER A30 to A SAMPLER A5 W4 08753 20030 1 RF CA TRANSMISSION PORT to B SAMPLER A W32 08752 20022 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to R SAMPLER A4 13 22 Replaceable Parts Source and Sampler Parts Options 004 and 003 004 A6 A5 AY WH W32 Sore STE WS SAMPLERS AND FRONT PANEL CABLES wi sh61360 A3JW2 A3W4 A3A2W1 A3W5 A3 SOURCE CABLES sh6204c 13 23 Replaceable Parts Source and Sampler Parts Option 006 Item HP Part Qty Description Number A3 08753 60233 1 SOURCE ASSY A3 08753 69233 SOURCE ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A3MP1 1250 0590 1 SMB CAP A3W1 08753 20107 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID EYO A3A3 to SOURCE A3 A3W2 08753 20032 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID CAV OSC A3A4 to SOURCE A3 A3A2W1 08753 60034 1 RIBBON CA ASSY EYO A3A3 to ALC A3A2 A3W7 08752 20024 1 RF CA 4 dB ATTENUATOR A3AT1 to BULKHEAD A3 OUTPUT A4 08753 60004 1 RSAMPL
60. A6 B sampler mixer 12 28 A7 pulse generator source 12 14 A7 pulse generator check 7 33 AS fuses and voltages 5 14 A8 post regulator air flow detector 12 8 display power 12 9 green LEDs 12 8 probe power 12 9 shutdown circuit 12 8 theory of operation 12 8 variable fan circuit 12 8 A8 post regulator test points 5 5 AQBT1 battery removal 14 21 A9 CC jumper position adjustment 3 5 A9 CC jumper positions 10 8 A9 CPU digital control 12 11 A9 CPU operation check 6 4 ABUS Cor 10 14 ABUS Test 10 11 accessories part numbers 13 38 accessories inspection 9 3 accessories troubleshooting chapter 9 1 adapters 1 3 ADC Hist 10 12 ADC Lin 10 10 ADC main 10 25 ADC offset correction constants test 52 adjustment 3 21 ADC Ofs 10 10 ADC Ofs Cor 10 14 ADD 10 6 addresses for HP IB systems 4 7 adjustment source default correction constants test 44 3 8 source pretune correction constants test 48 3 14 A9 CC jumper position 3 5 ADC offset correction constants test 52 3 21 analog bus correction constants Test 46 3 10 analyzer top cover removal 3 4 cavity oscillator frequency correction constants test 54 3 24 display degaussing demagnetizing 3 45 display intensity adjustments test 49 3 15 EEPROM backup disk procedure 3 38 error messages 3 1 fractional N frequency range 3 46 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband 3 54 frequency accuracy 3 49 freq
61. A9 converts the formatted data to GSP commands and writes it to the GSP The GSP processes the data to obtain the necessary video signals and sends the signals to the A18 display It also produces RGB output signals which are sent to the rear panel The assembly receives two power supply voltages 5VCPU which is used for processing and 65V which is passed on to A18 display but not used on A19 GSP 12 12 Theory of Operation A16 Rear Panel The A16 rear panel includes the following interfaces TEST SET I O INTERCONNECT The HP 8752C cannot be used with external test sets However with an adapter you can use signal levels for sequencing Refer to the Application and Operation Concepts chapter of the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for information on applying the test set interconnect EXT REF IN This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase lock the analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency accuracy The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature when a signal is connected to this input When the signal is removed the analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference AUX INPUT This allows for a de or ac voltage input from an external signal source such as a detector or function generator which you can then measure You can also use this connector as an analog output in service routines EXT AM This allows an exter
62. ASSY A6 08753 60169 1 B SAMPLER ASSY Wi 08752 20021 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to COUPLER A30 w3 5021 8771 1 RF CA COUPLER A30 to A SAMPLER A5 W32 08752 20022 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to R SAMPLER A4 W34 08752 20023 1 RF CA TRANSMISSION PORT to 8 dB ATTENUATOR ATI 13 20 Replaceable Parts Source and Sampler Parts Option 004 006 not visible 1 W34 W32 AT A6 AS AY UN WS wi SAMPLERS AND FRONT PANEL CABLES shb131c A3W4 A3W4 A3A2W1 A3W5 A3 SOURCE CABLES sh6204c 13 21 Replaceable Parts Source and Sampler Parts Options 004 and 003 004 Item HP Part Qty Description Number 1 1250 0590 1 SMB CAP A3 08753 60231 1 SOURCE ASSY A3 08753 69231 SOURCE ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A3W1 08753 20107 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID EYO A3A3 to SOURCE A3 A3W2 08753 20032 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID CAV OSC A3A4 to SOURCE A3 A3A2W1 08753 60034 1 RIBBON CA ASSY EYO A3A3 to ALC A3A2 A3W3 08753 20106 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to 70 dB STEP ATTENUATOR A3A5 A3W4 08753 20111 1 RF CA 70 dB STEP ATTENUATOR A3A5 to BULKHEAD
63. Accuracy Adjustment 21 High Low Band Transition Adjustment 22 Fractional N Spur and FM Sideband Adjustment 23 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment 5 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 8 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 11 Cavity Oscillator Correction Constants Test 54 10 Frequency Response Correction Constants Tests 57 then 53 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Test Equipment Specifications Each of the following procedures lists the equipment required to perform the adjustment procedure Typically common hand tools screwdrivers etc are not listed If you do not have the required equipment refer to the critical specifications in Table 1 1 to identify appropriate substitutes Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 3 Analyzer Cover Removal Typically when performing the analyzer s adjustment procedures only the top cover needs to be removed to adjust the A9CC jumper position To remove the top cover 1 Remove the upper rear standoffs 2 Loosen the top cover retaining screw 3 Slide back the cover 3 4 Adjustments and Correction Constants 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure A9 CC Correction Constant Jumper Position To change the correction constants you must move the A9 CC jumper to the ALT alter position The analyzer is shipped and should be operated with the A9 CC jumper in the NRM normal position Procedure Caution Switch off the analyzer
64. Correction Constants Adjustment procedure Repeat the HP 8752C System Verification procedure 2 10 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Tests This portion of the manual contains performance tests which are part of the instrument calibration process An instrument calibration includes the system verification described in the previous section and the performance tests To test the complete set of instrument specifications both portions of the instrument calibration must be performed Note Before performing these performance tests check that the test equipment is operating to specification Gage and clean all connectors The following is a list of performance tests in the order in which they should be performed 1 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity For HP 8752C Analyzers without Option 004 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity For HP 8752C Analyzers with Option 004 4 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level For HP 8752C Analyzers without Option 075 5 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level For HP 8752C Analyzers with Option 075 Test Port Crosstalk System Trace Noise Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy co 0 N amp Phase Dynamic Accuracy 10 Compression Note Unless otherwise specified the performance tests are applicable to a standard
65. Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 9 4 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 Equipment No equipment is required for this adjustment Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure This procedure calibrates the analog bus using three reference voltages ground 0 37V and 2 5V It then stores the calibration data as correction constants in EEPROM 1 2 3 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Press PRESET Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 46 xi When the display shows ABUS Cor press EXECUTE TEST and then press YES at the query to alter the correction constants and observe the display m ABUS COR DONE displayed the adjustment is complete Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure m ABUS COR FAIL displayed rerun the procedure in case of continued improper operation refer to the chapter titled Digital Control Troubleshooting 3 10 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 ANALYZER POWER METER EFLECTION PORT
66. Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 1 Table 1 1 Service Test Equipment Required Critical Recommended Use Equipment Specifications Model Spectrum Analyzer Freq Accuracy 7 Hz HP 8563E A T Frequency Counter HP 5343A P Measuring Receiver HP 8902A P Oscilloscope Bandwidth 100 MHz any T Accuracy 10 Digital Voltmeter Resolution 10 mV any T Tool Kit No substitute HP part number T 08753 60023 Power Meter HP IB No substitute HP 436A Opt 022 A PT HP 437A or 438A Power Sensor Frequency 300 kHz 3 GHz 500 HP 8482A A P T Power Sensor for Option 006 Frequency 3 GHz 6 GHz HP 8481A Opt 006 A PT Power Sensor Frequency 300 kHz 3 GHz 750 HP 8483A Opt H03 P Photometer Tektronix J16 A Photometer Probe Tektronix J6503 A Light Occluder Tektronix A 016 0305 00 CRT Demagnetizer or Bulk Tape A Eraser Printer HP ThinkJet P DeskJet LaserJet Disk Drive 3 5 inch HP 9122 Floppy Disk 3 5 inch HP 92192A A Calibration Kit Type N 509 No substitute HP 85032B P Calibration Kit Type N 750 No substitute HP 85036B P Verification Kit 7 mm No substitute HP 85029B P Low Pass Filter gt 50 dB 2 96 Hz and passband that HP P N 9135 0198 A includes 800 MHz Step Attenuator 110 dB HP 8496A P Attenuators fixed Return loss gt 32 dB APC 7 20 dB 2 HP 8491A Opt 020 P T Power Splitter 2 Way 500 HP 11667A P T Minimum Loss Pad Type N 500 to 750 HP 11852B P T 1 2 Service Equipment and Analyzer Op
67. Figure 3 11 When the center frequency increases to 2994 999 MHz and you have not targeted the selected spur Cav Osc Cor FAIL appears on the display 8 If you are confident that you found the target spur continue with step 9 filter procedure or step 11 filterless procedure Otherwise repeat steps 5 through 8 Spur Search Procedure with Filter 9 With the filter the target spur will appear to the right of a second spur similar to Figure 3 7 Rotate the RPG knob to position the marker on the spur 3 26 Adjustments and Correction Constants ia Mare 1963 14 29 07 CcH1 6B log MAS 10 d6 REF 20 52 Tor Os de ba T 2 983 534 as MHZ CENTER 2 983 000 006 MHz SPAN 5 000 000 MHz sh6159c Figure 3 7 Typical Target Spur Using Filter 10 Press SELECT and observe the display m DONE appears the procedure has been performed successfully Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants m If ND not done is displayed repeat this procedure Refer to Source Troubleshooting if ND is still displayed Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 27 Spur Search Procedure without Filter HP 8752C HP 87520 OPTION 075 24 INCH 24 INCH TYPE N TYPE N RF CABLE RF CABLE sh6114 Figure 3 8 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Altern
68. Floor Test Port Crosstalk System Trace Noise A11 Phase Lock A9 CC Jumper Position Analog Bus CC Test 46 Pretune Default CC Test 45 Source Pretune CC Test 45 EEPROM Backup Disk Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy A12 Reference High Low Band Transition Frequency Accuracy Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy A13 Frac N Analog Frac N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy A14 Frac N Digital Frac N Frequency Range Frac N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy A15 Preregulator None Self Test A16 Rear Panel Board None Internal Test 13 A17 Motherboard None Self Test A18 Display Vertical Position and Focus Display Intensity CC Test 49 only if needed Internal Tests 66 80 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 23 Table 14 1 Post Repair Procedures continued Replaced or Repaired Assembly Adjustments Correction Constants CC Verification A19 Graphic System Processor None Internal Tests 59 80 A30 Dual Directional Coupler A9 CC Jumper Position Frequency Response CC Tests 53 and 57 RF Output Power CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk Verification A3A5 Step Attenuator A9 CC Jumper Position RF Output Power CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk Reflection Tes
69. Hewlett Packard Strasse 61352 Bad Homburg v d H Germany 49 6172 16 0 15 2 Safety and Licensing Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices continued INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Hewlett Packard Company 3495 Deer Creek Road Palo Alto California USA 94304 1316 415 857 5027 China China Hewlett Packard Company 38 Bei San Huan X1 Road Shuang Yu Shu Hai Dian District Beijing China 86 1 256 6888 Taiwan Hewlett Packard Taiwan 8th Floor H P Building 337 Fu Hsing North Road Taipei Taiwan 886 2 712 0404 Australia Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 61 3 895 2895 Japan Hewlett Packard Japan Ltd 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Tokyo 192 Japan 81 426 60 2111 Canada Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 17500 South Service Road Trans Canada Highway Kirkland Quebec H9J 2X8 Canada 514 697 4232 Singapore Hewlett Packard Singapore Pte Ltd 150 Beach Road 29 00 Gateway West Singapore 0718 65 291 9088 Shipment for Service If you are sending the instrument to Hewlett Packard for service ship the analyzer to the nearest HP service center for repair including a description of any failed test and any error message Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable anti static packaging materials A listing of Hewlett Packard sales and service offices is provided in this chapter Safety and Licensing 15 3 Sa
70. If the 4 kHz signal is bad at the sampler mixer assembly check the 1st LO signal where it enters the sampler mixer assembly in question 8 12 Receiver Troubleshooting 28 00 mvolts OOOO e sec 000 volts oo sg605s a If the Ist LO is faulty check the Ist LO signal at its output connector on the AT assembly to determine if the failure is in the cable or the assembly oO If the 1st LO is good continue with Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Check the 2nd LO signal at the pins identified in Table 8 3 Refer to the A12 Reference Check in the Source Troubleshooting chapter for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform illustrations Table 8 3 identifies the signal location at the samplers and the A12 assembly Table 8 3 2nd LO Locations Mnemonic Description Sampler Signal Location Source 2nd LO 1 2nd LO 0 degrees A4 5 6 P1 11 A12P1 2 32 2nd LO 2 2nd LO 90 degrees A4 5 6 P1 4 A12P1 4 34 a If the 2nd LO is bad troubleshoot the A12 reference assembly and signal path a If the 2nd LO is good and the B sampler is suspected faulty replace the A6 B sampler mixer c If the 2nd LO is good but the R or A sampler is suspected faulty continue with Check Input Trace Receiver Troubleshooting 8 13 Check Input Trace All inputs to the sampler have been verified except for the signal coming
71. Israel tel 0825 010 700 alt 33 0 1 6453 5623 fax 0825 010 701 tel 01805 24 6333 alt 01805 24 6330 fax 01805 24 6336 tel 353 0 1 890 924 204 alt 353 0 1 890 924 206 fax 353 0 1 890 924 024 tel 972 3 9288 500 fax 972 3 9288 501 Italy tel 39 0 2 9260 8484 fax 39 0 2 9544 1175 Luxemburg tel 32 0 2 404 9340 alt 32 0 2 404 9000 fax 32 0 2 404 9395 Netherlands tel 31 0 20 547 2111 alt 31 0 20 547 2000 fax 31 0 20 547 2190 Russia tel 7 095 797 3963 alt 7 095 797 3900 fax 7 095 797 3901 Spain tel 34 91 631 3300 alt 34 91 631 3000 fax 34 91 631 3301 Sweden tel 0200 88 22 55 alt 46 0 8 5064 8686 fax 020 120 2266 Switzerland French tel 0800 80 5353 opt 2 alt 33 0 1 6453 5623 fax 41 0 22 567 5313 Switzerland German tel 0800 80 5353 opt 1 alt 49 0 7031 464 6333 fax 41 0 1 272 7373 Switzerland Italian tel 0800 80 5353 opt 3 alt 39 0 2 9260 8484 fax 41 0 22 567 5314 United Kingdom tel 44 0 7004 666666 alt 44 0 7004 123123 fax 44 0 7004 444555 tel primary telephone number alt alternate telephone number fax FAX number in country number 11 16 04 Service Guide HP 8752C Network Analyzer ls HEWLETT PACKARD HP Part No 08752 90136 Sup
72. LO A14J2 Figure 7 11 10 MHz CW 4MHz REF 4 MHz Reference A12TP9 Figure 7 12 any 2ND LO Second LO A12P1 2 4 Figure 7 13 gt 16 MHz CW 2ND LO Second LO A12P1 2 4 Figure 7 14 14 MHz CW not an A12 signal but required for A12 lowband operation Source Troubleshooting 7 15 100 kHz Pulses The 100 kHz pulses are very narrow and typically 1 5V in amplitude You may have to increase the oscilloscope intensity to see these pulses See Figure 7 8 100 000 us 0 00000 s 100 000 us 1 000 volts div Offset 9 000 voits 0 s Ch 1 Timebase 20 0 us div Delay 0 00000 sg610s Figure 7 8 Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 any frequency 7 16 Source Troubleshooting PLREF Waveforms REF Signal At A11TP1 PIN 9 REF is the buffered PLREF signal The 1st IF is phase locked to this signal Use an oscilloscope to observe the signal at the frequencies noted in Figure 7 9 and Figure 7 10 High Band REF Signal In high band the REF signal is a constant 1 MHz square wave as indicated by Figure 7 9 1 00000 us 0 00000 s 1 00000 us 500 0 mvolte div O ns div Ch Timebose 20 Offeat 0 000 volts Delay 0 00000 s sg611s Figure 7 9 High Band REF Signal gt 16 MHz CW Source Troubleshooting 7 17 Low Band REF Signal In low band this signal follows the frequency of the RF output signal Figure 7 10 illustrates a 5 MHz CW signal 1
73. MEMORY PRESET 10 50 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Firmware Revision Softkey Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION to display the current firmware revision information The number and implementation date appear in the active entry area of the display as shown in Figure 10 19 below The analyzer s serial number and installed options are also displayed Another way to display the firmware revision information is to cycle the line power CH1 RFL log MAG 10 dB REF A dB fe HPe7E2C 4 34 Apr GB 1995 SER NO 41BAG aT4 PPTIONS ag4 eae als Copyright 1956 ISIS by Heuletk Pachard All rights reserved START 309 4040 MHz STOP 6 ggg gga ggg MHz sh6123c Figure 10 19 Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 51 HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions All service routine keystrokes can be made through HP IB in one of the following approaches m sending equivalent remote HP IB commands Mnemonics have been documented previously with the corresponding keystroke m invoking the System Menu MENUSYST and using the analyzer mnemonic SOFTn where n represents the softkey number Softkeys are numbered 1 to 8 from top to bottom An HP IB overview is provided in the Compatible Peripherals chapter in the User s Guide HP IB programming information is also provided in the Prog
74. Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Before You Start Troubleshooting Make sure all of the assemblies are firmly seated Also make sure that input R has a signal of at least 35 dBm about 0 01 Vp p into 50 ohms at all times to maintain phase lock 7 2 Source Troubleshooting Power If the analyzer output power levels are incorrect but no phase lock error is present perform the following checks in the order given Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST When complete DONE should appear on the analyzer display Use a power meter to verify that source power can be controlled and that the power level is approximately correct a If the source passes these checks proceed with step 2 a If FAIL appears on the analyzer display or if the
75. Performance Tests 9 Phase Dynamic Accuracy HP 8752C All Options Specifications DYNAMIC ACCURACY HP8752C Reference Power 30 dBm 4 3 to 3000 MHz 3 to B GHz D 5 gt O o Se D O O 12 20 40 a Test Port Power dBm sh6156c Equipment There are no external equipment requirements to perform this test Description This test verifies the phase dynamic accuracy of the analyzer s transmission port The test is performed at a CW frequency of 30 MHz System Verification and Performance Tests 2 45 Procedure 1 Refer to the Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy section of the Performance Test Record For every Trans Input Power copy the result from the Calculated Value column and enter it in the Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Value column of the Phase Dynamic Accuracy section of the Performance Test Record For every Trans Input Power calculate A using the following formula A QMagnitude Dynamic Accuracy Value 20 Write the result in the A column of the Performance Test Record For every Trans Input Power calculate B using the following formula B 1 A Write the result in the B column of the Performance Test Record For every Trans Input Power calculate the phase dynamic accuracy using the following formula Phase Dynamic Accuracy SIN B Write the result in the Calculated Value column of the
76. Post Regulator 0 022020208 5 8 Verify the A15 Preregulator 0 02 5 9 Check for a Faulty Assembly 5 11 Check the Operating Temperature 5 13 Inspect the Motherboard 5 13 If the Green LEDs On A8 are not Al On 5 14 Remove A8 Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection 5 14 Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages 5 14 Remove the Assemblies oaoa oa a a a a e 5 15 Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry 2 5 16 Inspect the Motherboard 5 18 Error Messages s soiu eon a i a a a h a o a a a 5 19 Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 a 5 21 Fan Troubleshooting 5 22 Fan Speeds 8 0 ys ae leah a AS e EP a o 5 22 Check the Fan Voltages a 5 22 Short A8STP3 to Ground 1 ee 5 22 Intermittent Problems 2 2 e o 5 23 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence 24 6 2 Digital Control Group Block Diagram 2 2 2 6 3 Check A9 CPU Operation a a a 6 4 A9 CC Jumper Positions 0 0 2 20484 6 4 Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns 2 2 2 6 5 Check A19 GSP and A18 Display Operation 2 6 7 Cycle Power and Look at the Display 2 6 7 Contents 8 Perform Display Intensity and Focus Adjustments 6 7 A1 A2 Front Panel Troubleshooting 2002 6 7 Check Front Panel LEDs A
77. Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 6 GHz 15 0 10 0 2 0 06 12 0 7 0 2 0 07 10 0 5 0 2 0 09 8 0 3 0 2 0 06 6 0 1 0 2 0 03 4 0 1 0 2 0 02 2 0 3 0 2 0 01 0 0 5 0 5 0 09 2 0 7 0 5 0 06 4 0 9 0 5 0 03 5 0 10 0 5 0 03 10 0 15 0 5 0 03 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 67 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 19 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity HP 8752C with Options 004 and 075 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 300 kHz 15 0 10 0 2 0 14 12 0 7 0 2 0 13 10 0 5 0 2 0 13 8 0 3 0 2 0 20 6 0 1 0 2 0 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 14 2 0 3 0 2 0 13 0 0 5 0 5 0 13 2 0 T 0 5 0 20 4 0 9 0 5 0 16 5 0 10 0 5 0 15 8 0 13 0 5 0 15 2 68 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 20 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt
78. TO 8GHz OPTION 006 w2 R INPUT ist IF l L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz 4dB gt H 1 000MHz 500 ATTENUATOR VASO DIRECTIONAL a o o a o ee a Na ICOUPLER 2nd LO a0 wa T l 1st LO l L I 1 3 SAMPUER 500 i AS A SAMPLER IPAS H 15MHz TO 1 ee 5 999GHz OPTION 006 i A I 1 300kHz TO 6GHz OPTION 006 A INPUT w3 gt A L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz I H 1 OOOMHz 1 1 o a o mn mn M 2 2 2 m 2 2 me L e rs H aT 1st Lo WSO_ REFLECTION FORT Tag 7B SAMPLERY 8 eee oe oe oe i L BYPASS MIXER H 15MHz TO 5 999GHz OPTION 006 ATI 8dB 300kHz TO 6GHz OPTION 006 TRANSMISSION W34 E INPUT S PORT L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz H 1 000MHz sh693c Figure 4 7 HP 8752C Overall Block Diagram 3 of 4 Option 006 4 20 Start Troubleshooting Here 2nd LO W5 1ST LO FROM A7 ist LO W6 1ST LO FROM A7 afc ee S S ee A J 1 A4 R SAMPLER L BYPASS H 15MHz TO MIXER 5 999GHz OPTION 006 2ND LO FROM A12 de TO A11 we w32 300kHz TO 66Hz OPTION 006 Y R INPUT 1st IF _ _ L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz STEP 1 A A H 1 OOOMHz 500 ATTENUATOR 1A30 DIRECTIONAL PaE A O os 4 ICOUPLER 4 2nd LO ay L did ist LO E I 1 A es e 500 i i AS A SAMPLER yas H 15MHz TO 1 bed R i MIXER 5 999GHz OPTION 006 A I i MP1 I 1 cl ts aooxtiz To scHz OPTION 006 1
79. The voltage selector switch accessible at the rear panel adapts the analyzer to local line voltages of approximately 115V or 230V with 350 VA maximum The main fuse which protects the input side of the preregulator against drawing excessive line current is also accessible at the rear panel Refer to the HP 8752C Network Analyzer Installation and Quick Start Guide for line voltage tolerances and other power considerations Preregulated Voltages The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several DC voltages The regulated 5V digital supply is routed directly to the motherboard The following partially regulated voltages are routed through A15W1 to the A8 post regulator for final regulation 7OV 25V 18V 18V 8V 8V Regulated 5V Digital Supply The 5VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the A15 preregulator It is routed directly to the motherboard and from there to all assemblies requiring a low noise digital supply A 5V sense line returns from the motherboard to the A15 preregulator The 5V CPU is derived from the 5 VD in the A8 post regulator and goes directly to the A19 GSP In order for the preregulator to function the 5V digital supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies and the 5V sense line must be working If not the other preregulated voltages will not be correct Shutdown Indications the Green LED and Red LED The green LED is on in normal operation It is off when line power
80. To set the test port power to 0 dBm press MENU POWER 0 x1 Press SCALE REF 2 5 GD AVG IF BW OO Ga AVERAGING FACTOR 5 G1 AVERAGING ON Press MKR FCTN MRK SEARCH ON TRACKING ON SEARCH MAX Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 x1 When the analyzer is done sweeping record the marker value as shown in the upper right hand corner of the analyzer display on the appropriate table in the Performance Test Record Test Port Crosstalk for an HP 8752C with Options 003 and 075 1 Press PRESET STOP 1 Q G G n MEAS TRANSMISSN To set the test port power to 0 dBm press MENU POWER 0 x1 2 34 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 Press DOME IF BY MOS AVERAGING FACTOR OE AVERAGING ON 3 Press MKR FCTN MRK SEARCH ON TRACKING ON SEARCH MAX 4 Press TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS a 5 When the analyzer is done sweeping record the marker value as shown in the upper right hand corner of the analyzer display on the appropriate table in the Performance Test Record 6 To verify the analyzer system crosstalk in the extended frequency range press 0060 Gf GTOP G G n T Press TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 a 8 When the analyzer is done sweeping record the marker value as shown in the upper right hand corner of the analyzer display on the appropriate table in the Performance Test Record In case of difficulty 1 Remove t
81. a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer The minimum signal may or may not drop down into the noise floor 100kHz API1 API2 API3 API4 ORANGE R77 R35 R43 R45 R47 A13 Fractional N Analog Assembly sg69d Figure 3 22 Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments 6 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 048105 MHz 7 On the HP 8752C press CENTER 676 048105 M74 8 Adjust the APII R35 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 9 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 007515 MHz 10 On the HP 8752C press CENTER 676 004515 M74 11 Adjust the API2 R43 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 12 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 003450 MHz 13 On the HP 8752C press CENTER 676 00045 M74 14 Adjust the API3 R45 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 15 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 003045 MHz 3 56 Adjustments and Correction Constants 16 On the HP 8752C press CENTER 676 000045 M j 17 Adjust the API4 R47 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer In Case of Difficulty 18 If this adjustment cannot be performed satisfactorily repeat the entire procedure If the adjustment is still unattainable replace the A13 board assembly Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 57
82. analyzer first connect the signal to the rear panel AUX INPUT and then switch the function ON COUNTER OFF switches the internal counter off and removes the counter display from the display The counter can be switched on with one of the next three keys Note Using the counter slows the sweep The counter bandwidth is 16 MHz unless otherwise noted for a specific node Note OUTPCNTR is the HP IB command to output the counter s frequency data Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 27 ANALOG BUS switches the counter to monitor the analog bus FRAC N switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional N VCO frequency at the node shown on the Overall Block Diagram in the Start Troubleshooting chapter DIV FRAC N switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional N VCO frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for phase locking the VCO 10 28 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Analog Bus Nodes The following paragraphs describe the 31 analog bus nodes The nodes are listed in numerical order and are grouped by assembly Refer to the Overall Block Diagram for node locations A3 Source To observe six of the eight A3 analog bus nodes not node 5 or 8 perform Step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then follow the node specific instructions Step A3 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN CW FREQ 0006 G n SWEEP TYPE MENU POWER SWEEP Servi
83. and static control table mat 1 3 EDIT 10 6 edit list menu 10 6 EEPROM backup disk procedure 3 38 equipment A9 CC jumper position adjustment 3 5 ADC offset correction constants adjustment 3 21 analog bus correction constants adjustment 3 10 cavity oscillator frequency correction constants adjustment 3 24 display degaussing 3 45 display intensity adjustment 3 15 EEPROM backup disk procedure 3 38 fractional N frequency range adjustment 3 46 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 54 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 49 frequency response correction constants adjustment 3 22 high low band transition adjustment 3 51 IF amplifier correction constants adjustment 3 19 model number correction constant adjustment option 075 only 3 42 option numbers correction constant adjustment 3 34 RF output power correction constants adjustment 3 11 Index 8 serial number correction constant adjustment 3 32 source default correction constants adjustment 3 8 source pretune correction constants adjustment 3 14 source pretune default correction constants adjustment 3 9 source spur avoidance tracking adjustment 3 58 vertical position and focus adjustments 3 43 equipment for service 1 1 error BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 54 BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 10 54 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 54 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 55 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 55 CORRECTION
84. assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter 5 2 Power Supply Troubleshooting Simplified Block Diagram Figure 5 1 shows the power supply group in simplified block diagram form Refer to the detailed block diagram of the power supply Figure 5 8 located at the end of this chapter to see voltage lines and specific connector pin numbers A17 MOTHERBOARD 5VD 1G Ad AB POST PREREGULATOR REGULATOR 5V 5VCPU SWITCHING a POWER SUPPLY l Iv LINE AND HAD oe INSTRUMENT POWER POWER REGULATOR 18V a REGULATORS MICROCIRCUIT POWER vs 8V l FAN POWER 8y l PROBE POWER w HEN d DISPLAY POWER Wie TOR eae 70V I A15W1 GREEN RED LED LED EN EN 9 GREEN LEDS UN A OFF DURING ALL ON DURING NORMAL OPERATION NORMAL OPERATION ON DURING NORMAL OPERATION sg636d Figure 5 1 Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 3 Start Here Check the Green LED and Red LED on A15 Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer Check the two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the A15 preregulator casting by
85. at instrument preset The analyzer reports the first failure detected Refer to the internal tests and the self diagnose feature descriptions earlier in this chapter SOURCE POWER TRIPPED RESET UNDER POWER MENU Information You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the Message inputs and power has been automatically reduced The annotation Pl indicates that power trip has been activated When this occurs reset the power and then press MENU POWER SOURCE PWR on OFF to switeh on the power This message follows error numbers 57 58 and 59 10 62 Service Key Menus and Error Messages SYSTEM IS NOT IN REMOTE Error Number The analyzer is in local mode In this mode the analyzer will 52 not respond to HP IB commands with front panel key equivalents It will however respond to commands that have no such equivalents such as status requests SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP Error Number If you select external source auto or manual instrument mode 187 and you do not also select CW mode the analyzer is automatically switched to CW TEST ABORTED Error Number You have prematurely stopped a service test 113 TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER Service Error Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress Number 115 is not correct Check the setup diagram and instructions in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter Start the procedure again WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIAL
86. available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Safety and Licensing 15 1 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices US FIELD OPERATIONS US TMO Call Center Hewlett Packard Co 9780 So Meridian Blvd Englewood CO 80112 800 452 4844 Colorado Hewlett Packard Co 24 Inverness Place East Englewood CO 80112 303 649 5512 New Jersey Hewlett Packard Co 150 Green Pond Rd Rockaway NJ 07866 201 586 5400 California Northern Hewlett Packard Co 301 E Evelyn Mountain View CA 94041 415 694 2000 Atlanta Annex Hewlett Packard Co 2124 Barrett Park Drive Kennesaw GA 30144 404 648 0000 Texas Hewlett Packard Co 930 E Campbell Rd Richardson TX 75081 214 231 6101 California Southern Hewlett Packard Co 1421 South Manhattan Ave Fullerton CA 92631 714 999 6700 Illinois Hewlett Packard Co 545 E Algonquin Rd Arlington Heights IL 60005 847 342 2000 EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Hewlett Packard S A 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Switzerland 41 22 780 8111 Great Britain Hewlett Packard Ltd Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5DZ England 44 734 696622 France Hewlett Packard France 1 Avenue Du Canada Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf F 91947 Les Ulis Cedex France 83 1 69 82 60 60 Germany Hewlett Packard GmbH
87. cece ccc cn ences HP P N 1250 0077 Adapter APC 3 5 f to Nf 0 cece eens HP P N 1250 1745 Cable 500 type N 24 inch 0 0 00 00 0 c cece eee ees HP P N 8120 4781 Additional equipment required for analyzers with Option 075 500 to 75Q minimum loss pad 0 00 00 HP 11852B Warm up time 30 minutes Description This test determines the analyzer s reflection test port output frequency range and accuracy over its entire operating frequency range The frequencies are verified relative to room temperature 25 C 5 C System Verification and Performance Tests 2 13 Procedure 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 2 Press PRESET NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER FOON REFLEC TI TEST PORT ADAPTER BNC m TO TYPE N f ADAPTER APC 3 5 f TO TYPEN t CABLE 24 TYPE N xh619 Figure 2 2 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Test Setup Press MENU CW FREQ 5 0 0 k m Depending on the analyzer s options record the frequency counter reading in the appropriate table 2 through 6 in the Performance Test Record Repeat step 2 for each instrument s CW frequency listed in the appropriate table 2 through 6 in the Performance Test Record In case of difficulty 1 If any measured frequency barely fails the specification check the time base accuracy of the frequency co
88. counter reading should change to values very close to those indicated below Frequency Entered Counter Reading 0 03 to 1 MHz frequency entered 4 kHz 1 to 16 MHz not accurate 16 MHz to 6 GHz 1 MHz Node 25 PL Ref phase lock reference Perform step A12 above and then press ANALOG IN COUNTER ANALOG BUS MENU CW FREQ This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on the All phase lock assembly As you vary the frequency the counter reading should change as indicated below Frequency Entered Counter Reading 0 3 to 1 MHz frequency entered 1 to 16 MHz not accurate 16 MHz to 6 GHz 1 MHz 10 46 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 26 Ext Ref rear panel external reference input Perform step A12 above and then press ANALOG IN x1 The voltage level of this node indicates whether an external reference timebase is being used a No external reference about 0 9V a With external reference about 0 6V Node 27 VCXO Tune 40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage Perform step A12 above and then press ANALOG IN 27 1 MKR FCTN MARKER REFERENCE This node displays the voltage used to fine tune the A12 reference VCXO to 40 MHz You should see a flat line at some voltage level the actual voltage level varies from instrument to instrument Anything other than a flat line indicates that the VCXO is tuning to different frequencies Refer to the Frequenc
89. degrees Uncert dB Accuracy degrees Value 20 lt 0 46 N A 30 lt 0 35 N A 40 lt 0 36 N A 50 lt 0 38 N A 60 lt 0 40 N A 70 lt 0 70 N A 80 lt 1 90 N A 90 lt 6 00 N A 100 lt 18 00 N A 110 lt 55 00 N A 2 76 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 28 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 10 Compression CW Magnitude Spec Meas Phase Spec Meas Freq GHz Value dB Uncert Value degrees Uncer dB degrees dB 0 05 lt 0 45 N A lt 4 2 N A 1 00 lt 0 45 N A lt 4 2 N A 1 30 lt 0 45 N A lt 4 2 N A System Verification and Performance Tests 2 77 Adjustments and Correction Constants The accuracy of the analyzer is achieved and maintained through mechanical adjustments and correction constants The correction constants are empirically derived data that is stored in memory Correction constants refine the analyzer s measurements and define its operation When to Perform the Adjustment Procedures Perform the following adjustment procedures in these two instances m if one of the analyzer s assemblies has been replaced or m if one or more of the analyzer s performance tests failed Keep Correction Constants Current to Save Time Keep the correction constants current by performing 15 EEPROM Backup
90. drive Press SAVE RECALL SELECT DISK EXTERNAL DISK Verify that the address is set correctly Press LOCAL SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS DISK Ensure that the disk drive is set up correctly m power is on m an initialized disk in the correct drive a correct disk unit number and volume number press LOCAL to access the softkeys that display the numbers default is O for both m with hard disk Winchester drives make sure the configuration switch is properly set see drive manual 4 8 Start Troubleshooting Here 4 Press START 1 M A GAVE RECALL SAVE STATE Then press RECALL STATE o If the resultant trace starts at 1 MHz HP IB is functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers or the Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section in this chapter a If the resultant trace does not start at 1 MHz suspect the HP IB function of the analyzer refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Connect any other system peripherals but not a controller to the analyzer one at a time and check their functionality Any problems observed are in the peripherals cables or are address problems see above Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer s peripheral functions are normal Therefore if the analy
91. external 10 12 internal 10 7 patterns 10 17 system verification 10 13 tests diagnostics 6 11 test set 12 23 theory of operation 12 4 tests menu 10 3 test status terms 10 4 theory of operation 12 1 5V digital supply 12 7 A15 green LED 12 7 A15 preregulator 12 6 A15 red LED 12 7 A3 source 12 3 12 14 A8 green LEDs 12 8 A8 post regulator 12 8 A8 shutdown circuit 12 8 air flow detector 12 8 digital control 12 9 display power 12 9 functional groups 12 5 line power module 12 7 microprocessor 12 4 power supply 12 6 power supply shutdown 12 7 preregulated voltages 12 7 probe power 12 9 receiver 12 4 12 23 signal separation 12 23 source attenuator 12 3 test set 12 4 variable fan circuit 12 8 tool kit 1 3 tools assembly replacement 14 2 tools for service 1 1 transmission tracking characteristics type N test port 500 2 7 type N test port 750 2 8 transmission tracking Er 11 19 TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER 10 63 troubleshooting 1st LO signal at sampler mixer 8 12 A10 by substitution or signal examination 8 8 All phase lock 7 37 All phase lock and A3 source check 7 8 A12 reference 7 13 A13 A14 Fractional N 7 24 A14 Divide by N Circuit Check 7 29 A15 preregulator 5 9 A1 A2 front panel 6 7 AT pulse generator 7 33 accessories 9 1 broadband power problems 7 40 diagnostics 4 3 digital control 6 1 disk drive 4 8 fan 5 22 faulty group identification 4 10 fr
92. for relative power measurements Press POWER 2 x1 Record the power meter reading in the Measured Value column on the HP 8752C Performance Test Record 9 of 28 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 17 16 Utilizing the Power Offset value listed in the Performance Test Record 9 of 28 calculate the Power Level Linearity using the following formula Power Level Linearity Measured Value Power Offset 17 Record the result of your calculation on the Performance Test Record 9 of 28 18 Repeat steps 15 16 and 17 for the other power levels listed in the Performance Test Record 9 of 28 Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 003 and 075 19 Press CW FREQ 2 G n 20 Perform steps 14 15 16 and 17 for the power levels listed in the Performance Test Record 12 of 28 Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Option 006 21 Press CW FREQ 6 G n 22 Perform steps 14 15 16 17 and 18 for the power levels listed in the Performance Test Record 10 of 28 In case of difficulty 1 If you cannot set the test port power at any power level be sure the analyzer s source power is activated To do so press POWER Check the SOURCE PWR softkey ON should be highlighted 2 Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter in this manual Perform the RF Output Power Correction Constants Adjustment proced
93. gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity HP 8752C with Options 004 and 075 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 1 3 GHz 15 0 10 0 2 0 14 12 0 7 0 2 0 13 10 0 5 0 2 0 13 8 0 3 0 2 0 20 6 0 1 0 2 0 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 14 2 0 3 0 2 0 13 0 0 5 0 5 0 13 2 0 7 0 5 0 20 4 0 9 0 5 0 16 5 0 10 0 5 0 15 8 0 13 0 5 0 15 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 69 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 21 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity HP 8752C with Options 003 004 and 075 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 2 GHz 15 0 10 0 2 0 14 12 0 7 0 2 0 13 10 0 5 0 2 0 13 8 0 3 0 2 0 20 6 0 1 0 2 0 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 14 2 0 3 0 2 0 13 0 0 5 0 5 0 13 2 0 7 0 5 0 20 4 0 9 0 5 0 16 5 0 10 0 5 0 15 8 0 13 0 5 0 15 2 70 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Rec
94. improve low level dynamic accuracy Sampler Cor Measures the absolute amplitude response of the R sampler against an external power meter via HP IB then compares A and B magnitude and phase against R It improves the R input accuracy and A B R tracking 10 14 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 54 55 56 57 58 Cav Osc Cor Calculates the frequency of the cavity oscillator and the instrument temperature for effective spur avoidance Serial Cor Stores the serial number input by the user in the Display Title menu in EEPROM This routine will not overwrite an existing serial number Option Cor Stores the option keyword required for Option 002 006 010 or any combination Cal Kit Def Not used Init EEPROM This test initializes certain EEPROM addresses to zeros and resets the display intensity correction constants to the default values Also the test will not alter the serial number and correction constants for Option 002 006 and 010 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 15 Display Tests These tests do not return a PASS FAIL condition All six amber front panel LEDs will turn off if the test passes The display will be blank press to exit the test If any of the six LEDs remain on the test has failed 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 Disp cpu com Checks to confirm that the CPU can communicate with the A19 GSP board The CPU writes all zeros all ones and then a walking one pattern to the
95. input signals up to 3 and 6 GHz respectively The mixing products are filtered so that the only remaining response is the difference between the source frequency and the harmonic 1 MHz below it This fixed 1 MHz signal is the 1st IF Part of the 1st IF signal from the A4 R sampler is fed back to the All phase lock assembly The Sampler Circuit in Low Band In low band the sampler diodes are biased continuously on so that the RF input signal passes through them unchanged Thus the 1st IF is identical to the RF output signal from the source 300 kHz to 16 MHz and sweeps with it Part of the 1st IF signal from the A4 R sampler is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly Refer to Source Theory Overview for information on high band and low band operation of the source The 2nd LO Signal The 2nd LO is obtained from the A12 reference assembly In high band the 2nd LO is fixed at 996 kHz This is produced by feeding the 39 84 MHz output of a phase locked oscillator in the A12 assembly through a divide by 40 circuit In low band the 2nd LO is a variable frequency produced by mixing the output of the fractional N VCO with a fixed 39 996 MHz signal in the A12 assembly The 2nd LO covers the range of 0 014 to 16 004 MHz in two subsweeps that correspond with the source subsweeps These subsweeps are 0 304 to 3 304 MHz and 3 304 to 16 004 MHz 12 28 Theory of Operation The Mixer Circuit The 1st IF and the 2nd LO are combined in the
96. light output of the A18 display and checks for color purity In this and other solid test patterns an extremely thin full screen horizontal line will be seen about 1 4 screen height from the bottom This condition is characteristic of the display and does not indicate any problem 67 69 Test Pat 2 4 Displays a red green and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the display and also the ability to independently control each gun color If the purity of the displayed test pattern is a problem it usually indicates that the face of the display needs to be de gaussed de magnetized If the purity is bad cycling the power a few times may cure the problem If this does not work a commercially available de magnetizer must be used 70 Test Pat 5 Displays a 16 step gray scale for verifying that the palette chip on the A19 GSP board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color in this case white This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits 71 Test Pat 6 Displays a 3 step gray scale pattern for adjusting the background level or O step so that the first bar is not visible and the second bar is just barely visible This pattern consists of the first three gray scale bars of the 16 step gray scale 72 Test Pat 7 Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color convergence It is mainly for use by t
97. looking through the holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch see Figure 5 2 During normal operation the bottom green LED is on and the top red LED is off If these LEDs are normal then A15 is 95 verified Continue with Check the Green LEDs on A8 o If the green LED is not on steadily refer to If the Green LED on A15 is not On Steadily in this procedure o If the red LED is on or flashing refer to If the Red LED On A15 is On in this procedure jl Y A CAUTION e WARNING A CAUTION l 5 A UNE ofere m ODO Red LED Green LED Line Voltage Normally Off Normally On Selector Switch sh663c Figure 5 2 Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDs 5 4 Power Supply Troubleshooting Check the Green LEDs on A8 1 Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the A8 post regulator Use the location diagram under the top cover if necessary 2 Check to see if the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are all on There are nine green LEDs one is not visible without removing the PC board stabilizer a If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are on there is a 95 confidence level that the power supply is verified To confirm the last 5 uncertainty of the power supply refer to
98. mixer circuit The resulting difference frequency the 2nd IF is a constant 4 kHz in both bands as Table 12 3 shows Table 12 3 Mixer Frequencies Band 1st IF 2nd LO 2nd IF Low 0 300 to 16 0 MHz 0 304 to 16 004 MHz 4 0 kHz High 1 000 MHz 0 996 MHz 4 0 kHz A10 Digital IF The three 4 kHz 2nd IF signals from the sampler mixer assemblies are input to the A10 digital IF assembly These signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate A fourth input is the analog bus which can monitor either an external input at the rear panel AUX IN connector or one of 31 internal nodes A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the signals to the ADC analog to digital converter Here they are converted to digital form and sent to the A9 CPU assembly for processing Refer to Digital Control Theory for more information on signal processing Theory of Operation 12 29 13 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the HP 8752C network analyzer Replaceable parts include the following m major assemblies m cables m chassis hardware In general parts of major assemblies are not listed Refer to Abbreviations at the back of this chapter to help interpret part descriptions in the replaceable parts lists that follow Replaceable Parts 13 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C Network Analyzer 1 Ident
99. of the different receiver functional groups for the various analyzer options Theory of Operation 12 23 FROM A7 PULSE FROM A12 GENERATOR I REFERENCE Ist LO 2nd LO ea A10 DIGITAL IF AUX IN l or ABUS i MUX f 69 2nd IF e ADC e A20 DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER FROM A3 SOURCE 2nd LO sh61080 Figure 12 6 Receiver Functional Group standard and Option 003 12 24 Theory of Operation TO ANT PHASE LOCK Sm 1 FROM A7 PULSE FROM A12 GENERATOR I REFERENCE Ist LO 2nd LO ea A10 DIGITAL IF R l SAMPLER AUX IN MIXER ist LO or ABUS i MUX 1st IF 2nd IF ADC H FROM A3 SOURCE S 69 a ASO DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER FROM A3 SOURCE Ist LO 2nd LO REFLECTION TEST PORT sh61090 Figure 12 7 Receiver Functional Group Option 003 and 004 Theory of Operation 12 25 TO A11 PHASE LOCK E E FROM A7 PULSE FROM A12 GENERATOR I REFERENCE ist LO 2nd LO ea A10 DIGITAL IF R AUX IN Sawer eye tst Le or ABUS i MUX 69 2nd IF e ADC H mu ASO DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER FROM A3 SOURCE ist LO 2nd LO REFLECTION TEST PORT l EE O i sh6111o Figure 12 8 Receiver Functional Group Option 006 12 26 Theory o
100. s line power before removing or installing assemblies Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 5 A16 NOT VISIBLE A15 A8 AQ A10 A11 A12 A13 AU A19 A18 A7 A17 A3 A A AJO A5 AGB NOT VISIBLE A2 NOT VISIBLE NOT VISIBLE sh65c Figure 3 1 Location of Major Assemblies 3 6 Adjustments and Correction Constants 1 Remove the analyzer top cover see the section titled Analyzer Cover Removal located earlier in this chapter Remove the PC board stabilizer item 1 Figure 3 1 3 Remove the A9 CPU assembly by pulling on the white lifters N HP 8752 A9CPU Assembly RUN 1 2 4 0000 NRM Normal ALT Alter sh640c Figure 3 2 NRM Normal and ALT Alter Positions of A9 CC Jumper Move the A9 CC jumper to the ALT position Refer to Figure 3 2 Reinstall the A9 assembly and run the correction constant routine s Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure D NH Note Update the EEPROM backup disk by performing 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure at the end of this chapter Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 7 2 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 Equipment No equipment is required to perform this adjustment Warm up time 5 minutes Description and Procedure This internal adjustment test writes default correction constants for
101. shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz when tuning up in frequency and at 29 2 MHz and 15 MHz when tuning down are due to switching of the digital divider This mode can be used with the SRC TUNE mode as described in Source Troubleshooting chapter accesses the functions that allow you to adjust the source SRC TUNE on OFF tests the pretune functions of the phase lock and source assemblies Use the entry controls to set test port output to any frequency from 300 kHz to 6 GHz When in this mode o Set analyzer to CW frequency before pressing SRC TUNE ON a Test port output is 1 to 6 MHz above indicated entered frequency ci Instrument does not attempt to phase lock O Residual FM increases SRC TUNE FREQ allow you to change the source tune frequency 10 20 Service Key Menus and Error Messages SOURCE PLL ON off SM3 PLL AUTO ON off SMA ALC ON off toggles the automatic leveling control ALC on and off MAIN PWR DAC with the ALC switched on the main power dac controls the reference level of the ALC loop With the ALC switched off it controls the drive to the ALC modulator The main power DAC gets overwritten at every internal phase locking SLOPE DAC for manufacturing use only SRC ADJUST DACS for manufacturing use only HB FLTR SW on OFF for manufacturing use only With this mode switched OFF the source stays in the pretune mode and does not attempt to complete the phase lock sequence Also all phase lock
102. spare inside holder 3 Check the line voltage setting use small screwdriver to change 4 If the problem persists refer to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Start Troubleshooting Here 4 3 Step 2 Confidence Test The confidence test verifies that the circuits in the analyzer are functioning properly However it does not verify the accessories or the analyzer specifications The resulting measurement must fall within a limit testing window to pass the test The window size is based on both source and receiver specifications The characteristics tested are combinations of source match reflection tracking directivity transmission tracking noise floor and crosstalk The confidence test adds all the applicable error terms together To separate them out or to keep a record of them for maintenance refer to the Error Terms chapter If you want to test the individual analyzer specifications then refer to the Verification and Performance Tests chapter Procedure 1 Select the test data printing status m If you do not want the test data to automatically print continue with step 2 m If you want to have the test data automatically print press PRESET SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS RECORD ON Note When using an InkJet printer the analyzer must be set to the standard print mode through the COPY menu 2 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXTERNAL TESTS EXECUTE TEST The analyzer should display a shor
103. temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly 21 have detected an over temperature condition The power supplies regulated on the post regulator have been shut down Refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN Error Number One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly have 22 been shut down due to an over current over voltage or under voltage condition Refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The printer does not respond to control Verify power to the 24 printer and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the printer Ensure that the printer address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the printer itself Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 61 PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN Error Number The analyzer biasing supplies to the HP 85024A external probe 23 are shut down due to excessive current Troubleshoot the probe and refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY Error Number You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due 151 to insufficient memory Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save recall registers and pressing PRESET or by storing files to a disk SELF TEST n FAILED Service Error Internal test n has failed Several internal test routines are Number 112 executed
104. that they are all correct Figure 5 4 shows how to remove the line fuse using a small flat bladed screwdriver to pry out the fuse holder Figure 5 2 shows the location of the line voltage selector switch 2 Use a small flat bladed screwdriver to select the correct switch position O If the A15 green LED is still not on steadily replace A15 Ce FUSE IN USE SPARE FUSE INSERT SCREWDRIVER PRY OPEN qg652d Figure 5 4 Removing the Line Fuse Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 7 If the Red LED On A15 is On If the red LED is on or flashing the power supply is shutting down Use the following procedures to determine which assembly is causing the problem Check the AS Post Regulator 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Disconnect the cable A15W1 from the A8 post regulator see Figure 5 5 3 Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on Al5 a If the red LED goes out the problem is probably the A8 post regulator Continue with Verify the A15 Preregulator to first verify that the inputs to A8 are correct a If the red LED is still on the problem is probably the A15 preregulator or one of the assemblies obtaining power from it Continue with Check for a Faulty Assembly 5 8 Power Supply Troubleshooting A15W1 TO POST
105. the digital signal processor memory storage The main CPU is the master controller for the analyzer including the other dedicated microprocessors The memory includes EEPROM RAM EPROM and ROM Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A9 CPU assembly from the A10 digital IF The data taking sequence is triggered either from the A14 fractional N assembly externally from the rear panel or by firmware on the A9 assembly Main CPU The main CPU is a 16 bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire instrument through the instrument bus The main CPU receives external control information from the front panel or HP IB and performs processing and formatting operations on the raw data in the main RAM It controls the digital signal processor the front panel processor the display processor and the interconnect port interfaces In addition when the analyzer is in the system controller mode the main CPU controls peripheral devices through the peripheral port interfaces The main CPU has a dedicated EPROM that contains the operating system for instrument control Front panel settings are stored in CMOS RAM with a battery providing at least 5 years of backup storage when external power is switched off Main RAM The main RAM random access memory is shared memory for the CPU and the digital signal processor It stores the raw data received from the digital signal processor while additional calculations are pe
106. the analyzer s full serial namber and the options about to be installed on the analyzer 3 Press PRESET 4 Press MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE Rotate the RPG knob to position the arrow below each character of the first keyword and press SELECT LETTER to enter each in turn Press BACKSPACE if you made a mistake When you have finished entering the keyword press DONE Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 35 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 56 x1 When the display shows Option Cor press EXECUTE TEST Press YES at the query to alter the correction constant and observe the analyzer s display m If DONE is displayed the adjustment is complete Continue with step 6 m FAIL is displayed check the keyword again to make sure it is correct particularly if it contains the letters I or O or the numbers 1 or 0 Repeat the procedure beginning with step 2 If the procedure continues to fail contact HP If the analyzer has more than one option repeat steps 3 4 and 5 to install the remaining options Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Option 004 Installation 1 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS 2621814 x1 POKE D xi Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION 3 Verify that Option 004 is shown o
107. the good short to the reflection port Press SCALE REF ELECTRICAL DELAY Turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the left side of the smith chart see Figure 9 2a Replace the good short with the questionable short at the reflection port The trace of the questionable short should appear very similar to the known good short 3 Connect the good open to the reflection port Press ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the right side of the circle see Figure 9 2b Replace the good open with the questionable open at the reflection port The trace of the questionable open should appear very similar to the known good open 9 6 Accessories Troubleshooting CH1 RFL 1UFS EHI RFL 1 U FS hp ay PRm PR Cor i Cor Del ELECTRICAL DELAY me 25 144 ps 16 536 mm t START 300 000 MHz STOP 6 000 008 g MHz START 300 gag MHz STOP 6 000 6000 asa MHz A B sh61150 Figure 9 2 Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short a and Open b Accessories Troubleshooting 9 7 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus These menus allow you to perform the following service functions m test m verify m adjust m control m troubleshoot The menus are divided into two groups o Internal Diagnostics o Service Features When applicable the HP IB mnemonic is written in pare
108. troubleshoot the A12 assembly and associated signal path 8 14 Receiver Troubleshooting Accessories Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise Measurement failures can be divided into two categories a Failures which don t affect the normal functioning of the analyzer but render incorrect measurement data m Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the use of a feature This chapter addresses the first category of failures which are usually caused by the following m Operator errors m faulty calibration devices or connectors m bad cables or adapters m improper calibration techniques These failures are checked using the following procedures m Inspect the Accessories m Inspect the Error Terms Accessories Troubleshooting 9 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures
109. way power splitter 00 0 cece teenies HP 11667A Cable 500 type N 24 inch 3 required HP P N 8120 4781 Additional equipment required for analyzers with Option 075 500 to 750 minimum loss pad 2 required 0 05 HP 11852B Warm up time 1 hour 2 40 System Verification and Performance Tests Description This test verifies the magnitude dynamic accuracy of the analyzer s transmission test port The test is performed at a CW frequency of 30 MHz Procedure 1 On the HP 8902A press the blue shift key and INSTR PRESET CLEAR Press the yellow shift key and TUNED RF LEVEL Press to have the HP 8902A display linear readings dBm Press Pct 2 Set the HP 8496A to 20 dB 3 On the analyzer press CW FREQ 5 0 M 1 Press NUMBER of POINTS 5 OG Press AVG IF BW MOE 4 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 15 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 41 HP 8752C OPTION 003 0PTION 006 HP 8902A MEASURING RECEIVER are ooooo ooooo oa REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT INPUT 509 CABLE 500 CABLE 500 TYPE N TYPE N 24 INCH 24 INCH 110 dB STEP ATTENUATOR COBEE lt 50 HP 11667A POWER SPLITTER ADAPTER TYPE N m TO TYPE N m HP 8752C OPTION 075 HP 8902A MEASURING RECEIVER or coos
110. 0 x1 Press DOMM I Bw DOE AVERAGING FACTOR QG AVERAGING ON Press MKR FCTN MRK SEARCH ON TRACKING ON SEARCH MAX Press TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS a When the analyzer finishes sweeping record the marker value as shown in the upper right hand corner of the analyzer s display on the appropriate table in the Performance Test Record Test Port Crosstalk for an HP 8752C with Option 006 1 Press PRESET STOP G G n MEAS TRANSMISSN To set the test port power to 0 dBm press POWER 0 x1 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 33 Press SCALE REF 2 O ED AVG IF BW OO a AVERAGING FACTOR 5 G1 AVERAGING ON Press MKR FCTN MRK SEARCH ON TRACKING ON SEARCH MAX Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 x1 When the analyzer finishes sweeping record the marker value as shown in the upper right hand corner of the analyzer display on the appropriate table in the Performance Test Record To verify the analyzer system crosstalk in the extended frequency range press START G n GTOP O Gin Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 x1 When the analyzer finishes sweeping record the marker value as shown in the upper right hand corner of the analyzer display on the appropriate table in the Performance Test Record Test Port Crosstalk for an HP 8752C with Option 075 1 Press PRESET MEAS TRANSMISSN
111. 0 0 5 0 2 0 13 8 0 3 0 2 0 20 6 0 1 0 2 0 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 14 2 0 3 0 2 0 13 0 0 5 0 5 0 13 2 0 7 0 5 0 20 4 0 9 0 5 0 16 5 0 10 0 5 0 15 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 61 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 13 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Report Number Serial Number Date gt gt 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C with Options 003 and 075 without Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 2 GHz 20 0 15 0 5 0 13 18 0 13 0 5 0 20 16 0 11 0 5 0 16 14 0 9 0 2 0 14 12 0 7 0 2 0 13 10 0 5 0 2 0 13 8 0 3 0 2 0 20 6 0 1 0 2 0 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 14 2 0 3 0 2 0 13 0 0 5 0 5 0 13 2 0 7 0 5 0 20 4 0 9 0 5 0 16 5 0 10 0 5 0 15 2 62 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 14 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range HP 8752C with Option 004 Power Range Power Level Specification Mean Value Measurement dBm Value dB dB Uncertainty dB dB
112. 0 Minimum Loss Pad HP 11852B option 075 analyzers only Warmup time 30 minutes Description and Procedure This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API analog phase interpolator on the fractional N assembly circuits It also improves the sideband characteristics 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 21 2 Make sure the instruments are set to their default HP IB addresses HP 8752C 16 Spectrum Analyzer 18 3 54 Adjustments and Correction Constants 509 COAX BNC EXT REF INPUT HP 87520 10_ MHz HP amp 563E REF IN OUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER ADAPTER APC 7 TO TYPE N f SOQNTYPE N CABLE ASSEMBLY EXT REF INPUT HP 8563E HP 8752C SPECTRUM ANALYZER OPTION 075 10_ MHz REF IN OUT ooo a O 888 8 eee 00004 9 gg coo INIMUM LOSS PAD HP 118528 S5ONTYPE N CABLE ASSEMBLY sg6115c Figure 3 21 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 3 Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows Reference Level 0 0 0 0 cc cc eee ce cece cece ence teen eens 0 dBm Resolution Bandwidth 0 0 00 0 0000 ccc cece ee ees 100 Hz Center Frequency 0 eee eens 676 145105 MHz Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 55 4 On the HP 8752C press PRESET CENTER 676 045105 M74 5 Refer to Figure 3 22 Adjust the 100 kHz R77 for
113. 0 Source Troubleshooting Receiver Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise The receiver group assemblies consist of the following a A4 5 6 sampler mixer assemblies a A10 digital IF assembly a A30 dual directional coupler Receiver Troubleshooting 8 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Receiver Failure Error Messages There are two error messages that indicate receiver group problems These messages may be caused by the analyzer itself or by external devices or connections An explanation of each error message follows CAUTION OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT POWER REDUCED You have exceed
114. 00 9 00008 s sg627s Figure 7 26 Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE SRC TUNE Mode 7 36 Source Troubleshooting A11 Phase Lock Check At this point the All phase lock assembly appears to be faulty its inputs should have been verified already Nevertheless you may elect to use the phase lock diagnostic routines or check the relevant signals at the assembly itself for confirmation Note If external source mode is the only operating mode with phase lock problems replace the A11 phase lock assembly Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG Refer to Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools in Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix at the end of this chapter for an explanation of the error messages and the diagnostic routines Follow the steps there to determine in which state the phase lock is lost O If NO IF FOUND is displayed confirm that the analog bus is functional and perform the Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 as outlined in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter a If phase lock is lost in the ACQUIRE state the All assembly is faulty a If phase lock is lost in the TRACK state troubleshoot source phase lock loop components other than the All assembly Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination To confirm that the All assembly is receiving the signals required for its operation perform the following steps 1 Place the All assembly on the large extender board 2 Switch on the ana
115. 000 700 007 000 0 000 840 1 300 0 1 299 987 000 1 300 013 0 001 560 2 54 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 6 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Report Number Serial Number Date gt gt 1 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy HP 8752C Options 003 and 075 CW Frequencies Min Results Measured Max Measurement MHz MHz MHz MHz Uncertainty MHz 0 3 0 299 997 0 300 003 0 000 000 360 5 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 000 006 16 0 15 999 840 16 000 160 0 000 019 31 0 30 999 690 31 000 310 0 000 037 60 999 999 60 999 390 61 000 610 0 000 073 121 0 120 998 790 121 001 210 0 000 145 180 0 179 998 200 180 001 800 0 000 216 310 0 309 995 900 310 003 100 0 000 372 700 0 699 930 000 700 007 000 0 000 840 1 300 0 1 299 987 000 1 300 013 0 001 560 2 000 0 1 999 980 000 2 000 020 000 0 002 400 3 000 0 2 999 970 000 3 000 030 000 0 003 600 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 55 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 7 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C without Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dB
116. 04 12 3 Option Cor 10 15 option numbers correction constant test 456 adjustment 3 34 options 008 3 GHz operation 1 7 004 step attenuator 1 7 006 6 GHz operation 1 7 010 time domain 1 7 075 750 impedance 1 7 1CM rack mount flange kit without handles 1 7 1CP rack mount flange kit with handles 1 8 Index 14 AFN add 500 test port cable 1 8 AFP add 750 test port cable 1 8 B02 external disk drive 1 8 descriptions of 13 40 options available 1 7 oscilloscope 1 3 oscilloscope check of reference frequencies 7 15 output frequency in SRC tune mode 7 8 overall block diagram 4 16 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED 10 59 OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT POWER REDUCED 10 58 OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT POWER REDUCED 10 59 P P 10 60 packaging materials 15 3 panel key codes 6 8 parts replaceable 13 1 patterns test 10 17 PEEK 10 50 PEEK POKE 10 50 PEEK POKE ADDRESS 10 50 peek poke menu 10 50 performance testing 2 1 performance test record 2 50 performance tests 2 1 2 11 compression 2 47 equipment required 2 12 list of 2 11 magnitude dynamic accuracy 2 40 phase dynamic accuracy 2 45 reflection test port output frequency range and accuracy 2 13 reflection test port output power range and level linearity 2 15 reflection test port output power range and level linearity option 004 2 19 system trace noise 2 36 test port crosstalk 2 32 transmission test port input noise floor level 2 24 transmissi
117. 1 SEMI RIGID CA ASSY A3 to A30 w3 5021 8771 1 SEMERIGID CA ASSY A30 to A5 W17 08753 60033 1 RIBBON CA ASSY A2 to A17 W50 1250 2189 1 CA ASSY A30 to REFLECTION PORT W75 075 1250 2311 1 CA ASSY A30 to REFLECTION PORT Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes Note The cables described on this page are common to all instrument options For option specific cables refer to the Source and Sampler Parts section for your option 13 14 Replaceable Parts Front Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware W17 Wi WSO or W75 WS 1 BEHIND 3 PLACES sh63c Replaceable Parts 13 15 Rear Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware Item Opt HP Part Qty Description Number 1 0515 0965 4 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 14 SH HX 2 2190 0584 4 WASHER LOCK M3 0 NOM A15W1 p o A15 1 CA ASSY A15 to A8 and A17 A16W1 08753 60033 1 RIBBON CA ASSY A16 to A17 p o A16 W13 08753 60026 1 FLX RF CA ASSY REAR PANEL to A12 W21 08753 60117 1 FLX RF CA ASSY RED p o A16 W22 08753 60118 1 FLX RF CA ASSY GREEN p o A16 W23 08753 60119 1 FLX RF CA ASSY BLUE p o A16 Metric hard
118. 1 shows another variation of the basic four spur pattern some up some down and the target spur itself almost indistinguishable 3 30 Adjustments and Correction Constants 13 Mar 1995 14 24 15 CH1 B log MAG 05 dB REF 7 05 dB 1 7 0806 JB Ea q SBI SES 075 MHz CENTER 2 983 000 000 MHz SPAN 5 000 000 MHz sh6162c Figure 3 11 Variation of Display of Four Spurs without Filter 13 Rotate the RPG knob to position the marker on the target spur Then press SELECT and observe the display m DONE appears the procedure has been performed successfully Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure m If ND not done is displayed repeat this procedure Refer to Source Troubleshooting if ND is still displayed Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 31 12 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 55 Equipment No equipment is required for this adjustment Warm up time 5 minutes Description and Procedure This procedure customizes the replacement A9 CPU assembly by storing the analyzer s unique serial number as a correction constant in EEPROM Caution Perform this procedure ONLY if the A9 CPU assembly has been replaced 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Pos
119. 1A power sensor to channel B Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry 7 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A to access the calibration factor menu Note In this menu you can build a table of up to twelve points twelve frequencies with their cal factors Cal factor and frequency values are listed on the back of the power sensor m Input the cal factor frequency as GHz or MHz by pressing the appropriate entry key m Input cal factor percentages as whole numbers for example enter CAL FACTOR 98 as 98 The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu SEGMENT press the softkey and use RPG or entry keys to select a point EDIT press the softkey to change a previously entered value DELETE press the softkey to delete a point from the table ADD press the softkey to add a point to the table 3 12 Adjustments and Correction Constants CLEAR LIST press the softkey to erase the entire table DONE press the softkey when a table is complete and correct 8 Press the appropriate softkeys to build a sensor calibration table Note The Sensor s reference calibration factor is the calibration factor for 50 MHz 9 Carefully zero and calibrate the power meter sensor refer to the power meter sensor manual as required Source Correction Routine 10 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS to display Source Cor 11 Press EXECUTE TEST and YES at the prompt to alter t
120. 20 0394 1 BATTERY LITHIUM 3V 1A not shown A10 08753 60095 1 DIGITAL IF BD ASSY 08753 69095 DIGITAL IF BD ASSY Rebuilt Exchange All 08753 60162 1 PHASE LOCK BD ASSY A12 08752 60023 1 REFERENCE BD ASSY A13 08753 60013 1 FRACTIONAL N ANALOG BD ASSY 08753 69013 FRACTIONAL N ANALOG BD ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A14 08753 60068 1 FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL BD ASSY A15 08753 60098 1 PREREGULATOR ASSY 08753 69098 PREREGULATOR ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A16 REAR PANEL BD ASSY see Rear Panel Assemblies Al 08753 60130 1 MOTHERBOARD ASSY REPLACEMENT KIT includes motherboard card cage and corner struts A18 2090 0210 1 DISPLAY ASSY 5180 8484 DISPLAY ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A19 08753 60170 1 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR GSP ASSY A30 5086 7955 1 509 DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 5086 6955 509 COUPLER Rebuilt Exchange 075 5086 7557 1 759 DUAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 075 5086 6557 759 COUPLER Rebuilt Exchange AT1 006 8 dB ATTENUATOR see Source and Sampler Parts B1 08753 60047 1 FAN ASSEMBLY includes bracket and front panel connectors 13 6 Replaceable Parts Major Assemblies A16 NOT VISIBLE A15 A8 AQ A10 A11 A12 A13 AU A19 A18 A7 A17 A3 A AU AJO A5 A6 NOT VISIBLE A2 NOT VISIBLE NOT VISIBLE sh65c Replaceable Parts 13 7 Front Panel Assemblies Ttem Opt HP Part Qty Description Number 1 08752 60029 1 509 FRONT DRESS PANEL 1 075
121. 2035 25 4 u ear rr E ca ee a E aA a 2 32 Descriptiom naite aa a sted eee A it ote 2 32 Procedure a us te ad A Bee De es 2 33 Test Port Crosstalk for a Standard HP 8752C or an HP 8752C With Option 003 2 38 Contents 3 Test Port Crosstalk for an HP 8752C with Option 006 Test Port Crosstalk for an HP 8752C with Option 075 Test Port Crosstalk for an HP 8752C with Options 003 and 075 In case of difficulty 2 20 2 0 0 Te System Prace NOS 85 cc se Set tee A a ee Te A a te A Specifications acy a ee Se ie A se ee ee ed Equipment 1 a a a a a e A aog pA Description PEOCCUTE lt i BE yaa eee A ee Se Ge es 6 Reflection Trace Noise Magnitude 2 Reflection Trace Noise Phase 04 Transmission Trace Noise Magnitude 2 2 Transmission Trace Noise Phase 8 In case of difficulty 2 2 8 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy HP 8752C All Options SpeGifications e 4 29 a e lw ee oe BB ela a ES ee h Eg pment sep g areri p ao i eee A ee ee a DESGTIPUOM oa a A ee ee a E a Y Proced re mte iso ia A A SO eS In case of difficulty aoa a a a 9 Phase Dynamic Accuracy HP 8752C All Options Specifications L ao sad ne k e e E A T A a a EGUMEN Caida e Se kee e A ii ad A ee DESCADLION 2 rad aretes e do idee a ee E de as E Aa PrOCEQULS y os a A ee ee e E A 10 Compression 2 6 a a e a a Specifications old mece
122. 3 Error Messages This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to servicing the analyzer The information in the list includes explanations of the displayed messages and suggestion to help solve the problem Note The error messages that pertain to measurement applications are included in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED Error Number 183 The battery protection of the non volatile CMOS memory has failed The CMOS memory has been cleared The battery should be replaced See the Preset State and Memory Allocation chapter in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information about the CMOS memory BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK Error Number 184 The battery protection of the non volatile CMOS memory is in danger of failing If this occurs all of the instrument state registers stored in CMOS memory will be lost Save these states to a disk and refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter for battery replacement instructions See the Preset State and Memory Allocation chapter in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information about the CMOS memory CALIBRATION ABORTED Error Number 74 You have changed the active channel during a calibration so the calibration in progress was terminated Make sure the appropriate channel is active and restart the cal
123. 3 32 3 32 3 34 3 34 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 38 3 38 3 38 3 39 3 40 3 42 3 42 3 42 3 42 3 43 3 43 3 43 3 43 3 43 3 44 3 45 3 45 3 45 3 45 3 46 3 46 Warm up time 2 2 ee e a e a E Description and Procedure 8484 20 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 4 Equipment Required ee Warm up time 2 gore e a E A A A Description and Procedure 21 High Low Band Transition Adjustment Equipment Required Warm up time 2 1 ee Description and Procedure 0484 22 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Equipment Required ee ee Warmup time ee a a a y Description and Procedure 484 23 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment Equipment Required 2 ee ee ee ee Warm up time 2 ee Description and Procedure 848 Start Troubleshooting Here Assembly Replacement Sequence Having Your Analyzer Serviced 2 a a a ee Step 1 Initial Observations Initiate the Analyzer Self Test 0 4 If the Self Test Failed 2 2 a Step 2 Confidence Test 0 0 0884 PrOCEQULS pecu hohe GOR ea bey GES ae Re ek E Cable Confidence Test 2 0 2 a ee o PEOCOAUTE e ee ok A eee he Se a a ee ee ta Step 3 HP IB Systems Check 2 2 ee If Using a Plot
124. 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 13 1 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 14 11 Analog Bus Node Ts gen ks ao ke a oe SE Bee a a 10 35 Analog Bus Node 14 10 38 Analog Bus Node 15 e 10 39 Analog Bus Node 16 een 10 40 Counter Readout Location a a a a a 10 41 Analog Bus Node 18 2 en 10 42 Analog Bus Node 20 2 2 e 10 43 Analog Bus Node 23 2 ww e 10 45 Analog Bus Node 29 2 2 e 10 48 Analog Bus Node 30 gt a so 2 e o 10 49 Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display 10 51 Standard Connections for One Port Error Correction 11 4 Standard Connections for Response Calibration 11 6 Standard Connections for Isolation Calibration 11 7 Typical Ep Reflection Test Port 02 11 12 Typical Eg Reflection Test Port 11 14 Typical En Reflection Test Port 11 16 Typical Ex with 10 Hz Bandwidth 2 11 18 Typical Ex with 3 kHz Bandwidth 2 2 2 11 18 TypicalE zu o a et a oe de a La gh Oe ye te 11 20 Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System 12 2 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram 12 6 Digital Control Group Block Diagram 2 2 12 10 Low Band Operation of the Source 20 12 17 High Band Operation of the Source
125. 60 POW MET INVALID 10 60 POW MET not on not connected wrong addrs 10 61 POW MET NOT SETTLED 10 60 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs 10 61 PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN 10 62 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 62 SELF TEST n FAILED 10 62 SOURCE POWER TRIPPED RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 62 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 63 SYSTEM IS NOTIN REMOTE 10 63 TEST ABORTED 10 63 TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER 10 63 WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK 10 63 message for phase lock error 7 4 messages error 10 1 meter power 1 3 microprocessor theory of operation 12 4 microwave connector care 1 5 minimum loss pad 1 3 miscellaneous part numbers 13 38 mnemonic definitions 10 52 mnemonics for service keys 10 1 model number correction constant adjustment option 075 only 3 42 motherboard check 5 13 Index 13 N NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 57 nodes for analog bus 10 29 NO FILE S FOUND ON DISK 10 57 NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 7 4 7 39 10 58 NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 7 4 7 39 10 58 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 58 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 57 O one port error correction procedure 11 4 open and short device verification 9 6 open loop compared to phase locked output in SRC tune mode 7 9 operating temperature check 5 13 operation check of A19 GSP and A18 display 6 7 operation check of A9 CPU 6 4 Option 0
126. 87 000 1 300 013 0 001 560 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 51 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 3 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Report Number Serial Number Date gt gt 1 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy HP 8752C Option 003 CW Frequencies Min Results Measured Max Measurement MHz MHz MHz MHz Uncertainty MHz 0 3 0 299 997 0 300 003 0 000 000 360 5 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 000 006 16 0 15 999 840 16 000 160 0 000 019 31 0 30 999 690 31 000 310 0 000 037 60 999 999 60 999 390 61 000 610 0 000 073 121 0 120 998 790 121 001 210 0 000 145 180 0 179 998 200 180 001 800 0 000 216 310 0 309 995 900 310 003 100 0 000 372 700 0 699 930 000 700 007 000 0 000 840 1 300 0 1 299 987 000 1 300 013 0 001 560 2 000 0 1 999 980 000 2 000 020 000 0 002 400 3 000 0 2 999 970 000 3 000 030 000 0 003 600 2 52 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 4 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 1 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy HP 8752C Option 006 CW Frequencies Min Results Measured Max Measurement MHz MHz MHz MHz Uncertai
127. 9 10 48 analog bus node 3 10 32 analog bus node 30 10 49 analog bus node 4 10 33 analog bus node 5 10 34 analog bus node 6 10 34 analog bus node 7 10 35 analog bus node 8 10 35 analog bus node 9 10 36 analog bus nodes 10 29 A3 10 29 ANALOG BUS ON OFF 10 24 analog in menu 10 27 analog node 10 10 36 analyzer theory of operations 12 1 analyzer block diagram 4 16 analyzer HP IB address 4 7 analyzer options available 1 7 analyzer spectrum 1 3 antistatic wrist strap 1 3 appendix for source group troubleshooting 7 39 assemblies part numbers 13 6 rebuilt exchange 13 2 assembly replacement 14 1 A15 preregulator 14 12 A16 rear panel board 14 14 A18 display 14 16 Al front panel keyboard 14 8 A2 front panel interface 14 8 A30 directional coupler 14 18 A3 source 14 10 A9BTI battery 14 21 Bl fan 14 20 covers 14 3 front panel 14 4 rear panel 14 6 tools 14 2 Index 4 assembly replacement sequence 4 2 assistance 15 1 attenuator theory of operation 12 8 attenuators fixed 1 3 attenuator step 1 3 AUX OUT ON OFF 10 27 available options 1 7 B Bl fan removal 14 20 bad cables 9 1 battery removal 14 21 BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 54 BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 10 54 block diagram 4 16 digital control group 6 3 power supply 5 24 power supply functional group 5 3 broadband power problems 7 40 built in test set 12 23 bulk tape erase
128. AC 10 21 Main VRAM 10 16 major assemblies part numbers 13 6 rebuilt exchange 13 2 measurement calibration coefficients 11 1 measurement calibration procedure 11 4 11 6 measurement uncertainty 2 4 window 2 4 measuring receiver 1 3 menu analog in 10 27 edit list 10 6 peek poke 10 50 service keys 10 19 service modes 10 23 test options 10 5 tests 10 3 menus for service 10 1 message BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED 10 54 BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 10 54 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 54 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 55 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 10 55 CORRECTION TURNED OFF 10 55 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 55 DEADLOCK 10 55 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 56 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 56 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 10 56 DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 56 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 57 error 10 54 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 57 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 57 NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 10 58 NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 10 58 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 58 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 57 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED 10 59 OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT POWER REDUCED 10 58 OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT POWER REDUCED 10 59 PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 10 59 PHASE LOCK LOST 10 60 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 60 POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 61 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 61 POWER UNLEVELED 10
129. AR E OR yttrium iron garnet OPTIONS DO rta eri cut E TT 3 GHz performance A E A TET ETTE E 70 dB step attenuator A E E E E SETE es 6 GHz performance A E E EL EE EA EEE ET time domain OTB 2 cats ld ad nA 75 ohm test set 13 40 Replaceable Parts 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of the HP 8752C network analyzer A table showing the corresponding post repair procedures for each replaced assembly is located at the end of this chapter Procedures described in this chapter consist of the following Cover Removal Initial Front Panel Procedure Initial Rear Panel Procedure Al A2 keyboard front panel interface A3 source A15 A16 preregulator rear panel board A18 display A30 directional coupler Bl fan A9BTI1 battery Caution Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replac
130. C jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 6 and switch the analyzer s line power on 3 Press PRESET 4 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 54 x1 5 When the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor press EXECUTE TEST Then press YES at the query to alter the correction constants Note During this adjustment routine you will see several softkeys CONTINUE sweeps the current frequency span may be pressed repeatedly for additional looks at the current frequency span NEXT sweeps the next frequency span 2 MHz higher SELECT enters the value of the marker which should be on the spur and exits the routine ABORT exits the routine 6 Press CONTINUE to sweep the first frequency span three times If there are no spurs displayed press NEXT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 25 Note Each new span overlaps the previous span by 3 MHz the center frequency increases by 2 MHz the span is 5 MHz Thus anything visible on the right half of the display on one set of sweeps will appear on the left half or center of the display 7 Press NEXT repeatedly while watching the trace on each sweep and trying to spot the target spur With the filter the target spur will be one of two obvious spurs see Figure 3 7 Without the filter not recommendea it will be one of four or five less distinct spurs as shown in Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 and
131. CE MENU TESTS 52 1 When the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor press EXECUTE TESI 4 Press YES at the query to alter the correction constants Observe the display m ADC Ofs Cor DONE displayed the adjustment is complete Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure m ADC Ofs Cor FAIL displayed rerun the routine in case of continued improper operation refer to the chapter titled Digital Control Troubleshooting Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 21 10 Frequency Response Correction Constants Tests 53 and 57 Equipment Required Item 500 Analyzers 750 Analyzers RF cable HP PN 8120 4781 HP PN 8120 2408 type N calibration kit HP 85032B HP 85036B Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure Perform 5 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 before continuing if you have replaced one or more of these assemblies A3 source A9 CPU A30 directional coupler n n a a ATI attenuator Note This procedure must be performed with the RF cable that will be used with the analyzer When the RF cable is replaced this procedure should be performed again to keep the correction constants current 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Press PRESET Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU T
132. EM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN i AUTO SCALE MARKER 2 Node 3 measures the current that goes to the main IF amplifier At normal operation this node should read about 430 mA from 300 kHz to 3 GHz 500 mA from 3 GHz to 6 GHz CH1 AUX Re 18 mU REF 478 mU 2 494 17 mU h 5 apa hoa oda mHz 1 451 21 mU 1 GHz MARKER 2 5 Hz aA Fi START 309 094 MHz STOP 6 400 004 gag MHz sh6118c Figure 10 6 Analog Bus Node 3 10 32 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 4 Det detects RF OUT power level Perform step A3 described previously to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press ANALOG IN AUTO SCALE Node 4 detects power that is coupled and detected from the RF OUT arm to the ALC loop Note that the voltage exponentially follows the power level inversely Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 85 dBm and 10 dBm CH1 AUX Re 264 mus REF 548 mu tp PRm SCALE 206 mon Ert _ START 25 0 dBm CM 1 300 000 090 MHz STOP 6 8 dBm sh6119c Figure 10 7 Analog Bus Node 4 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 33 Node 5 Temp temperature sensor This node registers the temperature of the cavity oscillator which must be known for effective spur avoidance The sensitivity is 10 mV C The oscillator changes frequency slig
133. ER ASSY A5 08753 60004 1 A SAMPLER ASSY A6 08753 60169 1 BSAMPLER ASSY Wi 08752 20021 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to COUPLER A30 w2 5021 8770 1 RF CA COUPLER A30 to R SAMPLER A4 w3 5021 8771 1 RF CA COUPLER A30 to A SAMPLER A5 W34 08752 20023 1 RF CA TRANSMISSION PORT to 8 dB ATTENUATOR ATI 13 24 Replaceable Parts Source and Sampler Parts Option 006 w1 Au A5 A6 ATI not visible m o LEO l w34 0 CI i A 0 A lenr CWO 0 i w00 y L DU LU o WS W2 SAMPLERS AND FRONT PANEL CABLES sh6135e A3W7 A3MP1 DY RADAR 9 A3W1 o 2 2 LA 2 A3W2 A3 SOURCE CABLES sae Replaceable Parts 13 25 Display Bezel Assembly Item Opt HP Part Qty Description Number 1 08757 40012 1 SOFTKEYS COVER 2 5062 7208 1 BEZEL ASSY nameplate must be ordered separately 3 0515 2113 2 SCREW MACHINE M4 0x8 PC PN TX 4 08752 80032 1 NAMEPLATE 87520 4 003 08752 80034 1 NAMEPLATE 87520 OPTION 003 4 006 08752 80035 1 NAMEPLATE 8752C OPTION 006 5 08757 40003 1 BEZEL SUPPORT Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes 13 26 Replaceable P
134. ESTS 57 1 EXECUTE TEST YES Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 53 x1 When Freq Resp Cor ND appears press EXECUTE TEST YES This allows the correction constants to be altered 6 Connect a standard as prompted on the display then press the corresponding softkey NN Fe Wh 3 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants Note For open and short standards you must select an additional softkey that indicates whether the test port is male or female In this case it is female f co 00 10 Press THRU 12 13 Press DONE after the standard is measured Measure all three standard types short open load Press DONE 1 PORT CAL to allow the analyzer to compute the calibration coefficients This takes about 20 seconds Connect the RF cable between the reflection and transmission test ports After the analyzer underlines THRU on the display press DONE RESPONSE When the procedure is finished look at the display m If DONE is displayed this procedure is complete Store the new correction constants to disk Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure m If FAIL is displayed refer to the chapter titled Receiver Troubleshooting Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 23 11 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants Test 54 Equipment Required Ttem 500 Analyzers 750 Analy
135. GSP and reads them back If the test fails the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until PRESET is pressed DRAM cell Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the DRAM and then verifying that it can be read back Main VRAM Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in each bank and then writing all ones to one location in each bank Finally a walking one pattern is written to one location in each bank VRAM bank Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks VRAM video Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both write and read shift register transfers It also checks the video signals LHSYNC LVSYNC and LBLANK to verify that they are active and toggling RGB outputs Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it verifies their functionality Inten DAC Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and high 10 16 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Test Patterns Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments diagnostics and troubleshooting but they are not used for field service Test patterns are executed by entering the test number 66 through 80 then pressing EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE The test pattern will be displayed and the softkey labels blanked To exit the test pattern and return the softkey labels press softkey 8 bottom softkey The following is a description of the test patterns 66 Test Pat 1 Displays an all white screen for verifying the
136. HP 8752C or an HP 8752C with options System Verification and Performance Tests 2 11 Equipment Required to Run the Performance Tests Description Quantity HP Model or Part Number Calibration kit 500 type N 1 HP 85032B Calibration kit 750 type N 1 HP 85036B Measuring Receiver 1 HP 8902A Frequency counter 1 HP 5343A Power meter 1 HP 436A HP 487A HP 438A Power sensor 1 HP 8482A Power sensor 1 HP 8481 A Power sensor 1 HP 8483A Power sensor 1 HP 8483A Option H03 Printer 1 HP ThinkJet DeskJet LaserJet 110 dB step attenuator 1 HP 8496A 2 Way power splitter 500 1 HP 11667A Cable 500 type N 24 inch 3 HP P N 8120 4781 Cable 750 type N 24 inch 2 HP P N 8120 2408 Minimum Loss Pad 2 HP 11852B Adapter type N m to type N m 1 HP P M 1250 1528 Adapter BNC m to N f 1 HP P N 1250 0077 Adapter APC 3 5mm f to N f 1 HP P N 1250 1745 1 Required only for instruments with Option 075 2 Required only for instruments with Option 006 3 Required only for instruments with Option 003 and Option 075 2 12 System Verification and Performance Tests 1 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Specifications Frequency Range Frequency Accuracy 300 kHz to 1 3 GH 10 ppm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 10 ppm 300 kHz to 6 GHz 10 ppm 1 At 25 C 5 C 2 HP 8752C with Option 003 3 HP 8752C with Option 006 Equipment Frequency COUNT HP 5343A Adapter BNC m to N f 000 anaana
137. ID 4 0380 0643 2 STANDOFF HEX 0 255 INCH LONG 6 32 THREAD 5 1251 2942 2 LOCK SUBMIN D CONN includes lockwashers 6 0515 0372 3 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 8 CW PN TX 7 2110 0780 1 FUSE 3A 250V NON TIME DELAY Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes 7 PLACES 1X2 314 2 PLACES NOT SHOWN i A CAUTION i 000000 e WARNING A CAUTION 2 PLACES 13 36 Replaceable Parts oy 3 PLACES sh611c Replaceable Labels Item HP Part Qty Description Number 1 08752 80003 1 LABEL LOCATION DIAGRAM 2 7120 4295 1 LABEL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WARNING 3 7120 6999 1 LABEL LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH 4 7121 2527 1 LABEL METRIC HARDWARE CAUTION 5 08753 80066 1 LABEL WARNING CAUTION 6 7121 5125 1 TAG WARNING ESD SENSITIVE HEWLETT OP LOCATION DIAGRAM MAJOR ASSEMBLIES RF CABLES WARNING CAUTION WARNING CAUT I ON sh616c Replaceable Parts 13 37 Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories HP Part Number Description ACCESSORIES 5062 4072 OPT 1CP RACK MOUNT KIT FOR INSTRUMENTS EQUIPPED WITH HANDLES 0515 1106 REPLACEMENT SC
138. IZE DISK Error Number You have attempted to store load or read file titles but your 77 disk format does not conform to the Logical Interchange Format LIF You must initialize the disk before reading or writing to it Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 63 11 Error Terms The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when a measurement error correction measurement calibration is performed These factors are known by the following terms m error terms a E terms m measurement calibration coefficients The analyzer creates error terms by measuring well defined calibration devices over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for the devices The differences represent systematic repeatable errors of the analyzer system The resulting calibration coefficients are good representations of the systematic error sources For details on the various levels of error correction refer to the Optimizing Measurement Results chapter of the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide For details on the theory of error correction refer to the Application and Operation Concepts chapter of the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide Error Terms 11 1 Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose Specific parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the Characteristics of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we know what typical err
139. Kit Operation and Service Manual or HP 85036B 759 Type N Calibration Kit Operation and Service Manual Measurement Uncertainty Associated with any analyzer are measurement errors that add uncertainty to the measured results This uncertainty limits how accurately a device under test DUT can be measured The measurement uncertainty is defined to be the sum of the residual systematic repeatable and random non repeatable errors in the measurement system The systematic errors are effective directivity effective source match load match reflection and transmission tracking and isolation crosstalk Random errors include errors due to noise drift connector repeatability and test cable stability The typical measurement uncertainties for type N connectors using a 1 port error correction utilize an RSS Root Sum of Squares model for the contributions of random errors such as noise pin depth pin diameter variation load return loss and connector repeatability Measurement Uncertainty Window The PASS FAIL result of the limit line test generally indicates the status of the verification test The validity of the limit lines drawn on the analyzer display during the verification tests are determined by the measurement uncertainty The measurement uncertainty must be taken into account when analyzing the test results If the analyzer detects the test data outside of the limits a FAIL will be displayed on the analyzer This FAIL statu
140. LL must be ON for the counter to be updated at each bandswitch The counter works in swept modes or in CW mode It can be used in conjunction with SERVICE MODES for troubleshooting phase lock and source problems To read the counter over HP IB use the command OUTPCNTR Notes The display and marker units U correspond to volts Nodes 17 1st IF and 24 2nd LO are unreliable above 1 MHz About 0 750 MHz is a typical counter reading with no AC signal present Anything occurring during bandswitches is not visible Fast moving waveforms may be sensitive to sweep time The analog bus input impedance is about 50K ohms Waveforms up to approximately 200 Hz can be reproduced 10 26 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Analog In Menu Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes using the analog bus and internal counter as explained below To switch on the analog bus and access the analog in menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN The RESOLUTION LOW key toggles between low and high resolution Resolution Maximum Signal Minimum Signal LOW 0 5 V 0 5 V HIGH 10 V 10 V AUX OUT on OFF allows you to monitor the analog bus nodes except nodes 1 2 3 4 9 10 12 with external equipment oscilloscope voltmeter etc To do this connect the equipment to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the rear panel and press AUX OUT until ON is highlighted Caution To prevent damage to the
141. Magnitude 3 kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Reflection Phase 3 kHz lt 0 038 rms N A Transmission Magnitude 3 kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Transmission Phase 3kHz lt 0 038 rms N A HP 8752C Options 003 and 075 ONLY Reflection Magnitude 3 kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Reflection Phase 3kHz lt 0 038 rms N A Transmission Magnitude 3 kHz lt 0 006 dB rms N A Transmission Phase 3kHz lt 0 038 rms N A 2 74 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 26 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 8 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Trans Port HP 8496A Trans Port HP 8902A Measured Spec Meas Input Power Setting dB dB Value dB Uncer dB dB dB dB 20 10 lt 0 058 0 02 30 20 lt 0 050 0 02 40 30 lt 0 050 0 04 50 40 lt 0 053 0 06 60 50 lt 0 060 0 08 70 60 lt 0 115 0 14 80 70 lt 0 285 0 16 90 80 lt 0 860 0 18 100 90 lt 2 500 0 20 110 100 lt 5 400 0 20 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 75 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 27 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 9 Phase Dynamic Accuracy Trans Port Magnitude A B Calculated Spec Meas Input Power Dynamic Value
142. N AGREEMENT WITH WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS THE WAR RANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL DFARS Restricted Rights Notice If software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or subcontract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 J une 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 J une 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial license terms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 J une 1987 U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 J une 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data Printing Copies of Documentation from the Web To print copies of documentation from the Web download the PDF file from the Agilent web site Goto http www agilent com Enter the document s part number located on the title page in the Quick Search box Click GO Click on the hyperlink for the document Click the printer icon located in the tool bar Contacting Agilent This inf
143. N TUNE and SRC TUNE service modes CHL AUX Re 200 mus REF 1 2 U 1 1 656 U ta 18 hee oda MHz START 3 8 488 MHz STOP 28 886 888 MHz sh6152c Figure 10 14 Analog Bus Node 18 10 42 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 19 IF Det 2W IF after 16 MHz filter Perform step A11 above and then press ANALOG IN 19 x1 STOP 20 x1 SCALE REF 2 G1 REFERENCE VALUE 1 2 x1 This node detects IF after the 16 MHz filter limiter The filter is used during pretune and acquire but not in band 1 Normal state is a flat line at about 1 7 V Node 20 IF Det 1 IF after 30 MHz filter Perform step A11 above and then press ANALOG IN 20 x1 SCALE REF REFERENCE VALUE xi The trace should be a flat line across the entire frequency band at least 0 5 V greater than Vbb node 14 The correct trace indicates the presence of IF after the first 30 MHz filter limiter CH1 AUX Re 3088 muy REF 1 29 U ista u hp 1 gaa 66 BEB MHz REFERENCE VALUE 1 e9 Unjts START 300 096 MHz STOP 6 608 488 ggg MHz sh6122c Figure 10 15 Analog Bus Node 20 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 43 A12 Reference To observe the A12 analog bus nodes perform step A12 below Then follow the node specific instructions Step Al2 Press ANALOG IN MKR SERVICE MENU A
144. NALOG BUS ON Node 21 100 kHz 100 kHz reference frequency Perform step A12 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 21 GI COUNTER ANALOG BUS This node counts the Al2 100 kHz reference signal that is used on A13 the fractional N analog assembly as a reference frequency for the phase detector Node 22 A12 Gnd 1 ground 10 44 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 23 VCO Tune A12 VCO tuning voltage Perform Step A12 above and then press AD DD Eo Gr w a ANALOG IN GD AUTO SCALE MARKER 2 18 MA The trace should show a voltage step as shown in Figure 10 16 At normal operation the left half trace should be 0 1000 mV and the right half trace should be 100 to 200 mV higher that is one to two divisions If the trace does not appear as shown in Figure 10 16 refer to the High Low Band Transition Adjustment in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter CHL AUX Re 58 mU REF 5 mU 2 46 524 mU 18 ee ada MHz 1 118 23 mU 15 MHz MARKER 2 18 MHz START 11 000 046 MHz STOP 21 000 004 MHz sg6273d Figure 10 16 Analog Bus Node 23 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 45 Node 24 2nd LO Perform step A12 above and then press ANALOG IN COUNTER ANALOG BUS MENU CW FREQ This node counts the 2nd LO used by the sampler mixer assemblies to produce the 2nd IF of 4 kHz As you vary the frequency the
145. NE DONE 5 EXECUTE TEST EXET runs the selected test and may display these softkeys CONTINUE TESR1 continues the selected test YES TESR2 alters correction constants during adjustment tests NEXT TESRA displays the next choice SELECT TESR6 chooses the option indicated ABORT TESR8 terminates the test and returns to the tests menu INTERNAL TESTS evaluates the analyzer s internal operation These tests are completely internal and do not require external connections or user interaction EXTERNAL TESTS evaluate the analyzer s external operation These additional tests require some user interaction such as keystrokes 10 4 Service Key Menus and Error Messages SYS VER TESIS ADJUSTMENT TESTS DISPLAY TESTS Test Options Menu verifies the analyzer system operation by examining the contents of the measurement calibration arrays The procedure is in the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Information about the calibration arrays is provided in the Error Terms chapter generates and stores the correction constants For more information refer to the Adjustments chapter checks for correct operation of the display and GSP board To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS TEST OPTIONS CONTINUE TEST TESR1 REPEAT on OFF TO2 RECORD on OFF TO1 LIMITS NORM SPCL POWER LOSS POWLLIST accesses softkeys that affect the way t
146. NUMBER of GROUPS 5 a 10 When the measurement is finished record the s dev standard deviation value on the Performance Test Record Transmission Trace Noise Magnitude 11 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 14 HP 8752C REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT xh62e Figure 2 14 Transmission Trace Noise Test Setup 12 To switch to the transmission mode press TRANSMISSN 13 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 6 xi GCALE REF AUTOSCALE 14 When the measurement is finished record the s dev standard deviation value on the Performance Test Record 2 38 System Verification and Performance Tests Transmission Trace Noise Phase 15 Press FORMAT PHASE AUTOSCALE 16 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 xi 17 When the measurement is done record the s dev standard deviation value on the Performance Test Record In case of difficulty 1 Replace the A10 digital IF board assembly Rerun the test System Verification and Performance Tests 2 39 8 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy HP 8752C All Options Specifications DYNAMIC ACCURACY HP8 752C Reference Power 34 dBm 3 to 3880 MHz 3 to 6 GHz AB Accuracy B2 Bi 005 Fest Port Power dEm Equipment Measuring receiver 110 dB step attenuator Adapter N m to N M asana nanana anaana ene ee HP P N 1250 1528 500 2
147. Performance Test Record 2 46 System Verification and Performance Tests 10 Compression Specifications Frequency Range Magnitude Phase 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz lt 0 45 dB lt 4 2 1 3 GHz to 3 GHz lt 0 45 dB lt 4 2 3 GHz to 6 GHz lt 0 82 dB lt 5 0 1 10 Hz IF BW 2 HP 8752C with Option 003 3 HP 8752C with Option 006 Equipment HP 8752C or HP 8752C Option 003 or HP 8752C Option 006 Cable 500 type N 24 inch 0 0 0 HP P N 8120 4781 HP 8752C Option 075 Cable 750 type N 24 inch 2 0 0 0 cee eee HP P N 8120 2408 Warm up time 1 hour Description This test verifies the compression expansion levels of the analyzer s transmission test port sampler Due to their frequency dependent characteristics the compression test is performed at selected CW frequencies System Verification and Performance Tests 2 47 Procedure 1 11 12 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 16 HP 8752C OPTION 003 0PTION 006 HP 8752C OPTION 075 REFLECTION TRANMISS1ON REFLECTION TRANSMISSION PORT PORT PORT PORT CABLE 50 2 TYPE N 73 ATYPE N 24 INCH 24 INCH sh698c Figure 2 16 Compression Test Setup Press PRESET MEAS TRANSMISSN Press avc IF BW 1 0 1 Press CW FREQ 5 0 M p Press SWEEP TYPE MENU POWER SWEEP CTRDO ODOE TOR a Press TRIGGER MENU SINGLE At the en
148. Power Supply Troubleshooting Intermittent Problems PRESET states that appear spontaneously without pressing PRESET typically signal a power supply or A9 CPU problem Since the A9 CPU assembly is the easiest to substitute do so If the problem ceases replace the A9 If the problem continues replace the A15 preregulator assembly Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 23 5 24 Power Supply Troubleshooting ibe CAS POST A15 PREREGULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM A17 MOTHERBOARD Ae PEER la REGULATOR Ll l GNODSENSE_ l VOS RECTIFIER assmea aros ee to 298 nonsense wo ATADO ape al lt a E 10 t 1 es ov sias contro i 22 23 el fet ceu Ea 1 an ele LINE POWER SWITCH A as RECTIFIER 6 RECTIFIER LIND onoo Le 4 l passz NEUTRA oor 5 o6 12 si cromo gt el 120v 1 1 si o i 220v 220v RECTIFIER l Il m gt E z 10V_BIAS SHUTDOWN BD de 31 10V BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUITRY F son 1 1 A GREEN TEMPERATURE l 1 AS RECTIFIER l ul o Y e gt 7 a P s gpa l a SHuToom Siowts i cD Br oe amor O e o E 9 over VOLTAGE LINE LJ arov CD gt 2 gt sera oe ie aden 31 OR Ear eE an Pe Des Parr 5 I MOTHERBOARD I l 4 reo surco I HORUALLY OFF manra aros anasa jar ison sio lt gt 7 L gt 3 gt i ibs A1S PRE 1 REGULATOR As POST REGULA
149. R MENU SINGLE 17 When the measurement is done record the mean value 18 Use the equation Power dBm 20 logio linear magnitude mean value to convert the linear magnitude mean value measured in step 17 to log magnitude Record this calculated value on the Performance Test Record 22 of 28 Noise Floor Level at 3 GHz to 6 GHz Option 006 with IF BW of 3 kHz 19 Press AVG IF BW 3 k m 20 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU NUMBER of GROUPS 5 xi 21 When the sweeps are finished record the mean value as shown on the analyzer display Repeat step 18 In case of difficulty 1 Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter Perform the ADC Linearity Correction Constants Adjustment procedure Rerun the Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level test 2 If the Noise Floor Level test still fails suspect the A10 Digital IF board assembly 3 Refer to the Receiver Troubleshooting section in this manual for more troubleshooting information 2 28 System Verification and Performance Tests 5 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C with Option 075 Specifications Frequency Range IF Bandwidth Average Noise Floor Level Transmission 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 dBm 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 dBm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 dBm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 dBm 1 HP 8752C with Option 003 Equipment Calibration kit 750 type N 0
150. REWS FOR OPT 913 5062 3978 OPT ICM RACK MOUNT KIT FOR INSTRUMENTS WITHOUT HANDLES 0515 1114 REPLACEMENT SCREWS OPT 908 HP 85032B 50 OHM TYPE N CALIBRATION KIT OPT 001 HP 850330 50 OHM 3 5 MM CALIBRATION KIT OPT 001 HP 11852B 50 750 MINIMUM LOSS ATTENUATOR HP 11853A 500 TYPE N ADAPTER KIT HP 11878A 500 3 5 MM ADAPTER KIT HP 11854A 500 BNC ADAPTER KIT HP 11855A 750 TYPE N ADAPTER KIT HP 11856A 750 BNC ADAPTER KIT 8120 4781 500 TYPE N TEST PORT RETURN CA 8120 2408 750 TYPE N TEST PORT RETURN CA 9300 0969 ESD WRIST STRAP SMALL 9300 1117 ESD WRIST STRAP MEDIUM 9300 0970 ESD WRIST STRAP LARGE HP 92175T ESD TABLE MAT HP 10833A HP IB CA 1 M 3 3 FEET HP 10833B HP IB CA 2 M 6 6 FEET HP 108330 HP IB CA 4 M 13 2 FEET HP 10833D HP IB CA 0 5 M 1 7 FEET HP 92192A FLOPPY DISKS box of 10 double sided 3 5 inch disks HP 85043B SYSTEM RACK MOUNT 13 38 Replaceable Parts Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories HP Part Number Description SOFTWARE 08753 10004 HP 87520 EXAMPLE MEASUREMENT PROGRAM DISK 08753 10005 HP 87520 EXAMPLE MEASUREMENT PROGRAM DISK SERVICE TOOLS 08753 60023 HP 87520 TOOL KIT DOCUMENTATION 08752 90134 HP 87520 MANUAL SET includes the following 08752 90135 HP 8752C USER S GUIDE includes Quick Reference 08752 90138 08752 90137 HP 87520 PROGRAMMING GUIDE 08752 90139 HP 87520 INSTALLATION QUICK START GUIDE 08752 90157 HP 8752C SYSTEM VERIFICATION AND PE
151. RFORMANCE TESTS 08752 90136 HP 87520 SERVICE GUIDE this manual 08752 90158 HP 87520 COMPONENT LEVEL INFORMATION UPGRADE KITS HP 11884D 6 GHz UPGRADE KIT conversion to Opt 006 HP 11885A 3 GHz RECEIVER UPGRADE KIT conversion to Opt 003 HP 850190 TIME DOMAIN UPGRADE KIT conversion to Opt 010 08752 60019 ATTENUATOR UPGRADE KIT conversion to Opt 004 SERVICE NOTES 8753A 1 9 EEPROM BACKUP 8753A 5 IMPROVING RELIABILITY OF THE A3 SOURCE ASSEMBLY TOUCH UP PAINT 6010 1146 DOVE GRAY PAINT front panel frame portions of front handles 6010 1147 FRENCH GRAY side top bottom covers 6010 1148 PARCHMENT WHITE rack mount flanges rack support shelves front panel To obtain a service note contact your local HP Service Center Replaceable Parts 13 39 Abbreviations Reference Designations Abbreviations and Options REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS NA A da baad assembly Briana dia da fan motor Vivas electrical connector stationary portion jack RPG reir dea rotary pulse generator Minsa cable transmission path wire ABBREVIATIONS Ma nose ampere ALC d automatic level control ARSY ar IA dd assembly AUX ta Cache es Bs auxiliary BD viaria da wok eee eens i board CA cs atcha A lesthyied cable COAX ndo tid Sea era ida baina coaxial CRW mad ai central processing unit COM aie alee ieee slog conical washer screws Deir cnica be Sei beds dt Ques diameter ESD nta toa eee electrostatic discharge A ae taj ek RNa eae as exte
152. SK Error Number No files of the type created by an analyzer store operation were 45 found on the disk If you requested a specific file title that file was not found on the disk Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 57 NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL Error Number The first IF signal was not detected during pretune Check the 5 front panel R channel jumper If there is no visible problem with the jumper refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL Error Number The first IF signal was detected at pretune but phase lock could 7 not be acquired Refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS Error Number You cannot store a calibration set due to insufficient memory 70 You can free more memory by clearing a saved instrument state from an internal register which may also delete an associated calibration set if all the instrument states using the calibration kit have been deleted You can store the saved instrument state and calibration set to a disk before clearing them After deleting the instrument states press PRESET to run the memory packer OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 20 dBm at the reflection 58 port The RF output power is automatically reduced to 20 dBm The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been act
153. Samplers A9 CC Jumper Position Frequency Response CC Tests 53 and 57 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 EEPROM Backup Disk Test Port Crosstalk A7 Pulse Generator A9 CC Jumper Position Frequency Response CC Tests 53 and 57 EEPROM Backup Disk Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity AS Post Regulator A9 CC Jumper Position Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Cavity Oscillator CC Test 54 EEPROM Backup Disk Internal Test 0 Check A8 Test Point Voltages 14 22 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Table 14 1 Post Repair Procedures continued Replaced or Repaired Assembly Adjustments Correction Constants CC Verification A9 CPU A9 CC Jumper Position Model Number CC 750 only Display Intensity CC Test 49 Serial Number CC Test 55 Option Number CC Test 56 Source Default CC Test 44 Source Pretune Default CC Test 45 Analog Bus CC Test 46 RF Output Power CC Test 47 Source Pretune CC Test 48 Frequency response CC Tests 53 and 57 ADC Offset CC Test 52 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 Cavity Oscillator CC Test 54 EEPROM Backup Disk Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Phase Dynamic Accuracy A10 Digital IF A9 CC Jumper Position Analog Bus CC Test 46 Frequency Response CC Tests 53 and 57 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 EEPROM Backup Disk Transmission Test Port Input Noise
154. Service Guide Agilent Technologies 8752C Network Analyzer Agilent Technologies Manufacturing Part Number 08752 90136 Printed in USA Print Date February 1998 Supersedes December 1997 Agilent Technologies Inc 1998 Hewlett Packard to Agilent Technologies Transition This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies To reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP 8752C is now model number Agilent 8752C Documentation Warranty THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING CHANGED WITHOUT NOTICE IN FUTURE EDITIONS FUR THER TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW AGILENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AGILENT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD AGILENT AND THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTE
155. TOR BLOCK DIAGRAM FILTER REG FILTER FILTER TPs isv P6 t lt 12 000 To status FILTER SHUTOOM CAUSES pe AIRFLOW 8 over voce pa FAN Y ro ra TON pisau sosoo 1v orive POWER SUPPLY BLOCK DIAGRAM Digital Control Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise If you suspect an HP IB interface problem refer to HP IB Failures at the end of this chapter The digital control group assemblies consist of the following m Al front panel keyboard m A2 front panel interface a A9 CPU a A10 digital IF m Al6 rear panel A18 display m A19 GSP Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembl
156. TURNED OFF 10 55 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 10 55 DEADLOCK 10 55 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs 10 56 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 56 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 10 56 DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 56 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 57 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 57 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS 10 57 NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 10 58 NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 10 58 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS 10 58 NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE 10 57 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED 10 59 OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT POWER REDUCED 10 58 OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT POWER REDUCED 10 59 PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 10 59 PHASE LOCK LOST 10 60 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 60 POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 61 POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN 10 61 POWER UNLEVELED 10 60 POW MET INVALID 10 60 POW MET not on not connected wrong addrs 10 61 POW MET NOT SETTLED 10 60 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs 10 61 PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN 10 62 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 62 SELF TEST n FAILED 10 62 SOURCE POWER TRIPPED RESET UNDER POWER MENU 10 62 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 10 63 SYSTEM IS NOT IN REMOTE 10 63 TEST ABORTED 10 63 TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER 10 63 WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK 10 63 error correction procedure 11 4 error message for phase lock 7 4 error messages 10 1 10 54 during adjustments 3 1 error me
157. Tests 2 31 6 Test Port Crosstalk Specifications Frequency Range Test Port Impedance Test Port Crosstalk 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 500 100 dB 300 kHz to 3 GHz 500 100 dB 3 GHz to 6 GHz 500 90 dB 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 75Q 100 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 aus 75Q 97 dB 1 HP 8752C with Option 003 2 HP 8752C with Option 006 3 HP 8752C with Option 003 and 075 Equipment For analyzers without Option 075 Calibration kit 500 type N 0 0 0 0 cnc eee nee eens HP 85032B For analyzers with Option 075 Calibration kit 750 type N 0 0 0 0 ence cen een ene HP 85036B Warm up time one hour Description This test verifies the signal leakage interference between the analyzer reflection and transmission test ports The system crosstalk is checked by driving the reflection test port and measuring the transmission test port simultaneously 2 32 System Verification and Performance Tests Procedure 1 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 12 HP 87520 REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT TERMINATION i SHORT xh617 Figure 2 12 Test Port Crosstalk Test Setup Depending on the options that are currently installed in your analyzer go to the appropriate following section to test the system crosstalk Test Port Crosstalk for a Standard HP 8752C or an HP 8752C with Option 003 1 Press TRANSMISSN To set the test port power to 0 dBm press MENU POWER
158. Then press SET ADDRESSES and the appropriate softkeys to verify that the device addresses will be recognized by the analyzer The factory default addresses are Device HP IB Address HP 8752C 16 Plotter port HP IB 5 Printer port HP IB 1 Disk external Controller 21 Power meter HP IB 13 Note You may use other addresses with two provisions m Each device must have its own address m The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the analyzer and displayed Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch Refer to the manual of the peripheral to read or change its address Start Troubleshooting Here 4 7 If Using a Plotter or Printer 1 Ensure that the plotter or printer is set up correctly m power is on m pens and paper loaded m pinch wheels are down m some plotters need to have P1 and P2 positions set Press COPY and then PLOT or PRINT MONOCHROME c If the result is a copy of the analyzer display the printing plotting features are functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers or the Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section in this chapter O If the result is not a copy of the analyzer display suspect the HP IB function of the analyzer refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter If Using an External Disk Drive 1 Select the external disk
159. This runs only when selected ABUS Test Tests analog bus accuracy by measuring several analog bus reference voltages all nodes from the A10 digital IF This runs only when selected FN Count Uses the internal counter to count the A14 fractional N VCO frequency 120 to 240 MHz and the divided fractional N frequency 100 kHz It requires the 100 kHz signal from A12 and the counter gate signal from A10 to pass Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 11 External Tests These tests require either external equipment and connections or operator interaction of some kind to run Tests 23 and 24 are comprehensive front panel checks more complete than test 12 that checks the front panel keys and knob entry 21 Port 1 Op Chk Part of the Operator s Check procedure located in the Start Troubleshooting chapter The procedure requires the external connection of a short to PORT 1 22 Port 2 Op Chk Same as 21 but tests PORT 2 23 Fr Pan Seq Tests the front panel knob entry and all Al front panel keys as well as the front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly It prompts the user to rotate the front panel knob then press each key in an ordered sequence It continues to the next prompt only if the current prompt is correctly satisfied 24 Fr Pan Diag Similar to 23 above but the user rotates the front panel knob or presses the keys in any order This test displays the command the instrument received 25 ADC Hist Fact
160. U 12 11 main RAM 12 11 theory of operation 12 9 digital control block diagram 6 3 digital control check 4 12 digital control lines observed using L INTCOP as trigger 8 10 digital control signals A14 to A13 check 7 30 digital control signals check 7 23 digital control signals generated from Al4 7 31 digital control troubleshooting chapter 6 1 digital data lines observed using L INTCOP as trigger 8 10 digital IF 10 36 12 29 digital control 12 11 digital voltmeter 1 3 directional coupler removal 14 18 directivity characteristics type N test port 50Q 2 6 type N test port 750 2 7 directivity Ep 11 11 disable shutdown circuitry 5 16 DISK not on not connected wrong addrs 10 56 disk drive check 4 8 disk drive external HP IB address 4 7 disk floppy 1 3 DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 10 56 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 10 56 DISK READ WRITE ERROR 10 57 Disp 2 Ex 10 14 Disp cpu com 10 16 display digital control 12 12 power 12 9 removal 14 16 display bezel part numbers 13 26 display degaussing demagnetizing 3 45 display intensity adjustments test 49 3 15 display operation check 6 7 display power supply on A19 6 13 display tests 10 3 10 16 DISPLAY TESTS 10 5 DIV FRAC N 10 28 Divide by N Circuit Check 7 29 DONE 10 6 DRAM cell 10 16 DSP ALU 10 9 DSP Control 10 10 DSP Intrpt 10 9 DSP RAM 10 9 DSP Wr Rd 10 9 dual directional coupler 12 23 Index 7 E earth ground wire
161. U 1_ 6 3496 U CH1 START 36 000 000 MHz STOP 60 750 000 MHz CH2 AUX Re 200 mu REF 6 77 U 1 6 5772 U 006 CH2 START O s CW 31 000 100 MHZ STOP 012 s sh6157c Figure 3 16 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Display b If the marker value is greater than 7 readjust FN VCO ADJ to 7 refer to Figure 3 14 Perform steps 2 through 7 to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers respectively are still above and below the reference line c If the adjustment cannot be performed correctly replace the A14 board assembly 3 48 Adjustments and Correction Constants 20 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Equipment Required Ttem HP Model Number 500 to 750 minimum loss pad HP 11852B type N cable HP PN 8120 4781 type N f to BNC m adapter HP PN 1250 0077 Frequency counter HP 5343A option 075 analyzers only Warm up time 30 minutes HP8752C OPT 075 HP8752C HP5343A aU HP5343A gt ADAPTER NC to BNC m MINIMUM ADAPTER LOSS PAD 500 752 TYPE N CABLE TYPE N CABLE sh646c Figure 3 17 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup Note For 750 analyzers insert an HP 11852B 500 to 750 minimum loss pa
162. a ee Pia a 10 44 A14 Fractional N Digital 24 10 47 PEEK POKE Men 2 2 ee ee p 10 50 Firmware Revision Softkey 0 0 2 00484 10 51 Contents 11 HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions Invoking Tests Remotely 0 0 0 0 00 22 4s Analog Bus Codes 1 we ee Error Messages 2 1 we aa a 11 Error Terms Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose Reflection l Port Error Correction Procedure Response and Isolation Calibration Procedures Error Term Inspection 1 ee ee If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values Uncorrected Performance 0 8804 es Error Term Descriptions 1 ee ee ee Directivity Ep After a Reflection 1 Port Calibration Description a gt nar oy Sete de eho di Ap ES Se Significant System Components 0 0 Affected Measurements 2 a eee ee Pr ced te n ee Be eee sh OR A et A ee Source Match Es After a Reflection l Port Calibration Descrip sae be oe woe ck a a SB Gey gh Se hee 8 Significant System Components 0 0 Affected Measurements o Procedures a od ae Ab oh Ohl te Se oh Set NAO en Rd eS Reflection Tracking Er After a Reflection 1 Port Calibration De Seriptiony s cca a a e ee ew a E A Significant System Components 0 0 Affected Measurements 2 ee ee ee Procedur tny Ae ais ee a A A ee T A Isolati
163. a temperature problem it is likely that A15 is faulty Inspect the Motherboard If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of A15 switch off the analyzer and inspect the motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts The 5VD 5VCPU or 5VDSENSE lines may be bad Refer to the block diagram Figure 5 8 at the end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines on the A17 motherboard Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 13 If the Green LEDs On A8 are not All On The green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator are normally on Flashing LEDs on A8 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A8 post regulator is protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by repeatedly shutting them down This may be caused by supply loading on A8 or on any other assembly in the analyzer Remove A8 Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Remove A8 from its motherboard connector but keep the A15W1 cable connected to A8 3 Remove the display power cable W14 see Figure 5 5 4 Short A8TP2 AGND see Figure 5 3 to chassis ground with a clip lead 5 Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8 O If any green LEDs other than 5VD are still off or flashing continue with Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages o If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the 5VD LED the A15 preregulator and A8 post regulator a
164. ace A10 18 ADC Ofs A10 Replace A10 19 ABUS Test A10 Replace A10 20 FN Count AI A14 A13 A10 Most likely A14 or A13 as previous tests check A10 Refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter P part of PRESET sequence AI part of ALL INTERNAL sequence t in decreasing order of probability 6 12 Digital Control Troubleshooting A19 GSP and A18 Display Troubleshooting Measure Display Power Supply Voltages on A19 Measure the display power supply voltages on the A19 GSP assembly Check pins 2 4 and 6 on A19J5 for 65 0 4 V see Figure 6 5 c If the voltages are incorrect continue with the next check a If the voltages are correct go to Run Display Test 59 later in this chapter REAR W20 A18W1 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 sh6201c Figure 6 5 Pin Locations on A19J5 Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 13 Measure Display Power Supply Voltages Entering A19 Measure the power supply voltages entering the A19 assembly coming from the A8 assembly Check pins 1 and 2 on the connector of W14 for 65 0 4 V and pin 6 for 5 16 0 1 V see Figure 6 6 a If the
165. al Number Date gt gt 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 003 without Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 3 0 GHz 20 0 15 0 5 0 23 18 0 13 0 5 0 15 16 0 11 0 5 0 01 14 0 9 0 2 0 06 12 0 7 0 2 0 07 10 0 5 0 2 0 09 8 0 3 0 2 0 06 6 0 1 0 2 0 03 4 0 1 0 2 0 02 2 0 3 0 2 0 01 0 0 5 0 5 0 09 2 0 7 0 5 0 06 4 0 9 0 5 0 03 5 0 10 0 5 0 03 2 58 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 10 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 006 without Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 6 0 GHz 20 0 15 0 5 0 23 18 0 13 0 5 0 15 16 0 11 0 5 0 01 14 0 9 0 2 0 06 12 0 7 0 2 0 07 10 0 5 0 2 0 09 8 0 3 0 2 0 06 6 0 1 0 2 0 03 4 0 1 0 2 0 02 2 0 3 0 2 0 01 0 0 5 0 5 0 09 2 0 7 0 5 0 06 4 0 9 0 5 0 03 5 0 10 0 5 0 03
166. al observations 4 3 inputs check R A and B 8 4 inspect cables 6 10 inspect error terms 9 3 inspection of test port connectors and calibration devices 9 3 inspect the accessories 9 3 Inten DAC 10 16 Index 11 Intensity Cor 10 14 internal diagnostics 10 2 internal diagnostic tests 6 11 internal tests 10 3 10 7 INTERNAL TESTS 10 4 invoking tests remotely 10 52 isolation calibration procedure 11 6 isolation crosstalk Ex 11 17 J jumper position 10 8 K key codes 6 8 key failure identification 6 8 keys in service menu 10 1 kits calibration kit 7 mm 50Q 1 3 calibration kit type N 750 1 3 tool 1 3 verification kit 7 mm 1 3 L labels part numbers 13 37 L ENREF line 7 23 L HB and LLB Lines 7 24 licensing 15 1 light occluder 1 3 LIMITS NORM SPCL 10 5 line fuse check 5 7 line power module theory of operation 12 7 line voltage check 5 7 LINTCOP as trigger to observe control lines 8 10 L INTCOP as trigger to observe data lines 8 10 L LB and L HB Lines 7 24 LO 2ND waveforms 7 21 load device verification 9 4 Index 12 load match characteristics type N test port 500 2 7 type N test port 750 2 8 location diagnostic LEDs for A15 5 4 post regulator test points 5 5 power supply cable 5 8 lock error 7 4 LO OUT waveform at A14J2 7 28 LOSS SENSR LISTS 10 5 low band REF signal 7 18 low pass filter 1 3 M main ADC 10 25 Main DRAM 10 7 MAIN PWR D
167. alibration Kit load X open short X X Analyzer sampler X X X A10 digital IF X dual directional coupler X X X X X X test port connectors X X X X External cables If you detect problems using error term analysis use the following approach to isolate the fault 1 Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking terms If those terms are incorrect go to Cable Test 2 Verify the calibration kit devices Loads If the directivity error term looks good the load and the port are good If directivity looks bad check directivity again with a known good load If the problem is still present replace the dual directional coupler assembly Shorts and opens If the source match and reflection tracking terms look good the shorts and the opens are good If these terms look bad while the rest of the terms look good proceed to Verify Shorts and Opens 9 4 Accessories Troubleshooting Cable Test The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems You can further verify a faulty cable by measuring the reflection of the cable Connect the suspect cable between the reflection port and the transmission port Figure 9 1 shows the return loss trace of a good left side and faulty cable Note that the important characteristic of a cable trace is its level the good cable trace is much lower not its regularity Refer to the cable manual for return loss specifications Another
168. analyzer s RPG knob until the photometer registers 100 NITs of output light if the glass bezel assembly is not installed Adjust for 60 NITs if the glass bezel is installed 12 Press the top softkey on the analyzer and observe the display m If DONE is displayed the adjustment is complete Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants This completes the series of three display intensity adjustments Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure m If the analyzer continues to operate improperly refer to Start Troubleshooting Here to isolate the problem 3 18 Adjustments and Correction Constants 8 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 Equipment Required Item 500 Analyzers 750 Analyzers RF cable Pad attenuator N A 50 759 min loss pad 2 N A HP PN 8120 4781 HP PN 8120 4781 HP 8491A Option 020 HP 11852B Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure HP 8752C FLECTION PORT TRANSMISSION PORT 500 TYPE N RF THRU CABLE HP 8752C OPTION 075 REFLECTION PORT TRANSMISSION PORT MINIMUM MINIMUM LOSS PAD LOSS PAD 2048 PAD 502 TYPE N RF THRU CABLE sh654c Figure 3 5 IF Amplifier Correction Constant Setup These correction constants compensate for possible discontinuities of signal
169. analyzer fails the checks replace the source RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 Follow the instructions for this procedure given in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter The procedure is complete when DONE appears on the analyzer display Use a power meter to verify that power levels are now correct O If power levels are incorrect or if the analyzer fails the routine proceed with step 3 3 Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 1 Follow the instructions for this procedure given in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter The procedure is complete when DONE appears on the analyzer display Repeat step 2 a If the analyzer fails the routine in step 2 replace the source a If the analyzer fails the routine in step 3 replace the source Source Troubleshooting 7 3 Phase Lock Error USE WITH SPECTRUM ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER OSCILLOSCOPE a a NETWORK ANALYZER _ all 20055 ooo 9 mann EXT REF SS INPUT o0 m 0000 als F a llos ooo onno A gt S2500 S38 Seadoo 10MHz 90000 ooo 00 500000 OUT E ooo 0 0 sh6730 Figure 7 1 Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup Troubleshooting tools include the assembly location diagram and phase lock diagnostic tools The assembly loc
170. and phase measuring capability the analyzer is phase locked to a highly stable crystal oscillator For this purpose a portion of the transmitted signal is routed to the R sampler mixer of the receiver where it is sampled by the phase detection loop and fed back to the source The Source Step Attenuator Option 004 The HP 8752C Option 004 includes a 70 dB electro mechanical step attenuator This very low loss attenuator is contained in the source assembly It is used to adjust the power level to the device under test without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path The user sets the attenuation levels via the front panel softkeys Theory of Operation 12 3 The Built In Transmission Reflection Test Set The HP 8752C features a built in test set that provides the signal separation capability for the device under test The test uses a dual directional coupler to separate the incident signal from the transmitted and reflected signals The incident signal is applied to the R sampler mixer via one of coupled arms of the dual directional coupler Meanwhile the reflected signal is routed from the reflection test port via the other coupled arm of the dual directional coupler to the input of the A sampler mixer in the receiver The transmitted signal is fed directly from the transmission test port to the B sampler mixer Analyzers having Option 006 have an 8 dB pad between the transmission test port and the B sampler mixer
171. arts Display Bezel Assembly ACTIVE CHANNEL 1 ENTRY e Oe 0000 ES Y ann aowa OOOO f DO DODO ILI Ei CS O cere O UUUU UU sh64c Replaceable Parts 13 27 Chassis Parts Item HP Part Qty Description Number 1 5062 3735 1 COVER TOP ASSY 2 5021 5806 1 REAR FRAME 3 5062 3842 1 COVER SIDE for use with strap handle 4 5062 3704 1 STRAP HANDLE 18 INCH 5 5041 8820 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP REAR 6 0515 1384 2 SCREW MACHINE M5 0x 10 PC FL TX 7 5001 0540 2 TRIM SIDE used when front handles are removed 5041 8819 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP FRONT 1460 1345 2 TILT STAND 10 5041 8801 4 FOOT STANDARD 11 5062 3747 1 COVER BOTTOM ASSY order item 11A also 11A 08753 20039 1 BOTTOM COVER MYLAR INSULATOR not shown 12 5062 3817 1 COVER SIDE PERF 13 5041 8802 1 TRIM TOP 14 5062 3990 1 FRONT HANDLE KIT for rack mount options 15 5041 8821 4 REAR STANDOFF 16 0515 1402 4 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 8 PC PN TX 17 5021 8405 1 FRONT FRAME Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes NOTE See Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories for touch up paint
172. as solid as the signal in Figure 7 4 50 000 nsec 0 00000 sec 50 000 neec PAE EE UA A UE a HA A y MES M A 7 9 EEES Ch 100 0 mvolte div Of feet 4 000 mvolte Ti coi 10 0 neuc div Delay 0 00000 sec sg607s Figure 7 4 Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode 6 The signal observed on the spectrum analyzer will appear jittery as in Figure 7 5b not solid as in Figure 7 5a This is because in SRC TUNE mode the output is not phase locked SOC kHz CENTER 41 706 Mhz RES OW sg609s Figure 7 5 Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune Mode Source Troubleshooting 7 9 T Press MENU POWER to vary the power and check for corresponding level changes on the test instrument A power change of 20 dB will change the voltage observed on the oscilloscope by a factor of ten 8 Note the results of the frequency and power changes a If the frequency and power output changes are correct continue with A12 Reference Check located in this chapter a If the frequency changes are incorrect continue with YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus a If the power output changes are incorrect check analog bus node 3 a Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN Aux Input MORE REAL lt i b Press MARKER 2 G n The marker should read approximately 434 mU c Press MARKER 4 G n The marker should read approximately 646 mU 7 10 Source Troubleshooting YO Co
173. at the analyzer operates properly Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 11 A15 Preregulator How to Remove the Preregulator 1 Perform the Initial Rear Panel Procedure A CAUTION ha 0000000 sh685c Figure 14 8 Location of Preregulator Fasteners and Wires 14 12 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 2 Remove the remaining four screws item 22 Figure 14 8 in the rear frame two on the top and two on the bottom 3 Disconnect the A15 wire bundle item 23 from the A8 post regulator board assembly Disconnect the A15 wires item 24 from the motherboard Pull the preregulator assembly free from the frame SS Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall After reinstallation refer to Post Repair Procedures at the end of this chapter to ensure that the analyzer operates properly Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 13 A16 Rear Panel Board Assembly How to Re
174. ation Devices 9 3 Inspect the Error Terms 0 22 2 ee 9 3 Gable Leste ta a Bete RR ee a he to eS 9 5 Verify Shorts and Opens 2 ee en 9 6 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus suos aoe a ee boe a oa a Poen a a 10 1 Error Messages 40 8 ade a ee epo RE eee ee Wee pok e 10 1 Service Key Menus Internal Diagnostics 2 2 10 2 Tests Men r e da a e Ee oe a SE epa 10 3 Test Options Men 2 eo a a a a E 10 5 Self Diagnose Softkey oouo a a a 10 7 Test Descriptions s e e a A e A A E 10 7 Internal TESES api sea e ew AA ep CP e a 10 7 External Tests k a a o a a 10 12 System Verification Tests a e 10 13 Adjustment Tests dsb ok a ae a E o ae 10 14 Display Tests cia Ana de a ee i eb a ee U 10 16 Test Patterns e 10 17 Service Key Menus Service Features 2 2 aa 10 19 Service Modes Menu 2 ee ee 10 20 Service Modes More Menu 88 10 23 Analog BUSY A reet prii Bape Aloha pt ea Dc Pe Agta O oS 10 25 Description of the Analog Bus 10 25 The M it ADCs 212 ola a a we GP doa Vote Gh dapat 10 25 The Frequency Counter 0 2 0084 10 25 Analog In Menu 2 008 8 eee ee 10 27 Analog Bus Nodes we 10 29 AS SOUTE oe o ek a ee ee ON me es 10 29 ATODISICalTE aa ein Se Oe Be ee Oe BS A Be e 10 36 All Phase Lock gors i ersin aoe gi an i e 10 37 ATZ Referentes s oi hok e
175. ation diagram is on the underside of the instrument top cover The diagram shows major assembly locations and RF cable connections The phase lock diagnostic tools are explained in the Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix and should be used to troubleshoot phase lock problems The equipment setup shown in Figure 7 1 can be used throughout this chapter Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check Phase lock error messages may appear as a result of incorrect pretune correction constants To check this possibility perform the pretune correction constants routine The four phase lock error messages listed below are described in the Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix at the end of this chapter m NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL m NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL m PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED m PHASE LOCK LOST 7 4 Source Troubleshooting 1 Make sure the A9 CC Jumper is in the ALTER position a oO a Unplug the analyzer b Remove the A9 CPU board Remove the top cover Move the jumper to the ALT position Refer to Figure 7 2 Replace the A9 CPU board top cover and power cord HP 8752 A9CPU Assembly RUN 1 2 4 0000 NRM Normal ALT Alter sh640c Figure 7 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU Source Troubleshooting 7 5 2 Switch on the analyzer and press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS x1 EXECUTE TEST YES to generate new analog bus correction constants
176. ation on the FRACN TUNE mode 3 Vary the fractional N VCO frequency with the front panel knob and check the signal with the oscilloscope The waveform should resemble Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 and Figure 7 19 If the fractional N output signals are correct continue source troubleshooting by continuing with A7 Pulse Generator Check 50 000 nsec 0 00000 sec 50 000 nsec 00 0 mvolts div Offset Ch 2 0 0 nsec div Delay 0 000_ volts 0 00000 sec sg619s Figure 7 17 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 7 26 Source Troubleshooting 50 000 nsec 0 00000 sec 50 000 nsec Ch 2 100 0 mvolts div Offset 0 000 volts Timebase 10 0 nsec div Delay 0 00000 sec sg620s Figure 7 18 25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 50 000 nsec 0 00000 sec 50 000 nsec ALA A A AAA E A AA E dN ds ee E E Ch 2 100 0 mvolts div Offset 9 000 volts Timebose 10 0 nsec div Delay 0 00000 sec sg621s Figure 7 19 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 Source Troubleshooting 7 27 A14 VCO Exercise The nominal tuning voltage range of the VCO is 10 to 5 volts When the analyzer is in operation this voltage is supplied by the A13 assembly This procedure substitutes a power supply for the A13 assembly to check the frequency range of the A14 VCO 1 Switch off the analyzer and remove the A13 assembly 2 Put the A14 assembly on an extender board and switc
177. ative Setup 11 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3 8 12 Without the filter the target spur will appear in a variety of disguises Often it will be difficult to identify positively occasionally it will be nearly impossible to identify Press CONTINUE as many times as necessary to thoroughly inspect the current span Without the filter the target spur usually appears as one of a group of four evenly spaced spurs as in Figure 3 9 The target spur is the right most spur fourth from the left On any particular sweep any or all of the spurs may be large small visible invisible above or below the reference line 3 28 Adjustments and Correction Constants 13 Mar 1995 14 19 19 CHi B log MAG 05 dB REF 7 95 dB 13 57 1517 dB teal P 83 909 345 MHz l sh6160c Figure 3 9 Typical Display of Four Spurs without Filter On occasion the target spur appears as one of a group of five evenly spaced spurs as in Figure 3 10 The target spur is again the fourth from the left not the fifth right most spur Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 29 13 Mar 1995 144 12 56 CHI B log MAG 02 3B REF 7 dB 15 6 947 dB PA 2 983 600 090 MHz i CENTER 2 983 000 OCG MHz STAN 5 000 GOO MHz sh6161c Figure 3 10 Typical Display of Five Spurs without Filter Figure 3 1
178. ay vary from pulse generator to pulse generator tp REF 0 0 dBm ATTEN 30 de 19 d8 CENTER 56 923 J MHz SPAN 10 8 mHz RES BW 308 Hz VBW 380 Hz SWP 1 88 sec sg626s Figure 7 25 Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope Perform this check if a spectrum analyzer is not available 1 Remove the A4 to A11 SMB cable from the A4 R sampler mixer output Connect the oscilloscope to the A4 output 1st IF Activate the FRACN TUNE service mode and tune the fractional N to 50 MHz Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON TD Activate the SRC TUNE service mode of the analyzer and tune the source to 50 MHz Press SRC TUNE ON SRC TUNE FREQ 50 jj Source Troubleshooting 7 35 4 Set the SRC TUNE frequency to those listed in Table 7 7 and observe the 1st IF waveforms They should appear similar to Figure 7 26 a If the signals observed are correct continue with A11 Phase Lock Check O If the signals observed are questionable use a spectrum analyzer to perform the preceding A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer Table 7 7 1st IF Waveform Settings SRC TUNE FRACN Harmonic 1st IF 50 MHz 50 MHz 1 1 to 6 MHz 250 MHz 50 MHz 5 1 to 6 MHz 2550 MHz 50 MHz 51 1 to 6 MHz 1 00000 us 0 00000 s 1 00000 us 15 On mv aolre di Offset met Freg 4 21283 MHz volts 0 0
179. bon cable for a loose connection 2 Repeat Run Display test 59 If the test fails a walking one pattern will be continuously transferred from the CPU through the cable to the GSP 3 Immediately go to the next check Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 15 Perform Walking One Pattern 1 Disconnect the W20 A9 A19 ribbon cable from A19J6 2 Use an oscilloscope to verify a walking one pattern is transferring from the A9 CPU through the cable The walking one pattern see Figure 6 7 is found on pins 3 through 10 and 13 through 20 on the connector of W20 see Figure 6 8 a If the signal is not present at the end of the cable check for it at the A9 connector of the ribbon cable a If the signal is still not present replace the A9 assembly AA A IMA aes NU TE QUITE I a i 1 I sg601s Figure 6 7 A9 CPU Walking One Pattern 6 16 Digital Control Troubleshooting meo REAR Ad E i ne PINS ON CONNECTOR OF W20 1211018 j 4 2 34 30 30 23 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 A19J6 wig 33 31 29 27 25 23 24 19 17 15 13 11 9 I u w sh6206c F
180. cable follow the keystrokes in parentheses 10 2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Tests Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS TESTS TEST D accesses a menu that allows you to select or execute the service tests The default is set to internal test 1 Note Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given under the heading Test Descriptions in the following pages The tests are divided by function into the following categories a Internal Tests 0 20 o External Tests 21 26 a System Verification Tests 27 43 o Adjustment Tests 44 58 o Display Tests 59 65 o Test Patterns 66 80 To access the first test in each category press the category softkey To access the other tests use the numeric keypad step keys or front panel knob The test number name and status abbreviation will be displayed in the active entry area of the display Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 3 Table 10 1 shows the test status abbreviation that appears on the display its definition and the equivalent HP IB code The HP IB command to output the test status of the most recently executed test is OUTPTESS For more information refer to HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions located at the end of this chapter Table 10 1 Test Status Terms Display Abbreviation Definition HP IB Code PASS PASS 0 FAIL FAIL 1 IP IN PROGRESS 2 NA NOT AVAILABLE 3 ND NOT DONE 4 DO
181. ce Key Menus and Error Messages 10 29 Node 1 Mn Pwr DAC main power DAC Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN 1 x1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE MKR Node 1 is the output of the main power DAC It sets the reference voltage to the ALC loop At normal operation this node should read approximately 4 volts at 0 dBm with a slope of about 150 mV dB This corresponds to approximately 4 volts from 15 to 10 dBm CH1 AUS Re i Uf REF 2 0 1i 5 1216 U hp G8 dBm PRm MARKER 1 START 25 0 dBm Ch 1 300 000 000 MHz STOP 6 9 dBm sh6117c Figure 10 4 Analog Bus Node 1 10 30 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 2 Sre 1V GHz source 1 volt per GHz Press the following to view analog bus node 2 PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN OO AUTO SCALE MARKER 2 2 G n Node 2 measures the voltage on the internal voltage controlled oscillator During normal operation it should read 1V GHz CH1 AUX Re 1 UY REF 3U 2 2 1397 U me 2 oaa das ade MHz 1 1 yee 0 1 GHz MARKER 2 GHz Ple t START 300 008 MHz STOP 6 000 000 000 MHz sg6263d Figure 10 5 Analog Bus Node 2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 31 Node 3 Amp Id amplifier current Press the following keys to view analog node 3 PRESET SYST
182. chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter 9 2 Accessories Troubleshooting Inspect the Accessories Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibration Devices 1 Check for damage to the mating contacts of the test port center conductors and loose connector bulkheads 2 Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and other physical damage Refer to the calibration kit operating and service manual for information on gaging and inspecting the device connectors If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical tolerance replace the device Inspect the Error Terms Error terms are a measure of a system a network analyzer calibration kit and any cables used As required refer to Chapter 11 Error Terms for the following m The specific measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error terms m The routines required to extract error terms from the instrument m Typical error term data Use Table 9 1 to cross reference error term data to system faults Accessories Troubleshooting 9 3 Table 9 1 Components Related to Specific Error Terms Component Directivity Source Reflection Isolation Load Transmission Match Tracking Match Tracking C
183. chapter and you suspect there is an HP IB problem in the analyzer perform the following test It checks the internal communication path between the A9 CPU and the A16 rear panel It does not check the HP IB paths external to the analyzer Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 13 x1 EXECUTE TEST o If the analyzer fails the test the problem is likely to be the A16 rear panel o If the analyzer passes the test it indicates that the A9 CPU can communicate with the A16 rear panel with a 50 confidence level There is a good chance that the A16 rear panel is working This is because internal bus lines have been tested between the A9 CPU and A16 and HP IB signal paths are not checked external to the analyzer 6 18 Digital Control Troubleshooting Source Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter This chapter is divided into two troubleshooting procedures for the following problems m Incorrect power levels Perform the Power troubleshooting checks m Phase lock error Perform the Phase Lock Error troubleshooting checks The source group assemblies consist of the following m A3 source m A4 sampler mixer m A7 pulse generator m All phase lock m Al2 reference m A13 fractional N analog m Al4 fractional N digital Source Troubleshooting 7 1 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8752C
184. chapter to ensure that the analyzer operates properly Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 9 A3 Source How to Remove the Source 1 Remove the power cord and the top cover see Cover Removal Procedure 2 Remove the two screws with washers item 17 Figure 14 7 from the source retainer bracket Remove the bracket muu O sh621c Figure 14 7 Location of Source Parts 3 Disconnect the semi rigid cables item 18 at the bulkhead connector and source 4 Pull the two retention clips item 19 at the front and rear of the source module to an upright position 5 Push the disconnected cables toward the right side of the analyzer 6 Pull up on the source bracket handle item 20 and remove the source 14 10 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall m Keep the semi rigid cables out of the way as you reinstall the source m Make sure the edges of the sheet metal partition slide into the guides at the front and back of the source compartment m Make sure the source is well seated in the motherboard connector m Remember to push down the retention clips m After reinstallation refer to Post Repair Procedures at the end of this chapter to ensure th
185. check 7 37 A12 digital control signals check 7 23 A12 reference 10 44 source 12 14 A12 reference check 7 13 A13 A14 Fractional N Check 7 24 A13 frac N analog source 12 14 A14 Divide by N Circuit Check 7 29 A14 frac N digital source 12 14 A14 fractional N digital 10 47 A14 generated digital control signals 7 31 A14 to A13 digital control signals check 7 30 A14 VCO exercise 7 28 A15 preregulator Index 1 removal 14 12 theory of operation 12 6 A15 preregulator check 5 9 A15W1 plug detail 5 10 A16 rear panel digital control 12 13 A16 rear panel board removal 14 14 A18 display digital control 12 12 power 12 9 removal 14 16 A18 display operation check 6 7 A18 power supply voltages 6 13 A19 graphics system processor digital control 12 12 A19 GSP digital control 12 12 A19 GSP and A18 display operation check 6 7 A19 power supply voltages for display 6 13 A19 walking one pattern 6 16 A1 A2 front panel troubleshooting 6 7 Al front panel keyboard digital control 12 10 removal 14 8 A2 front panel interface removal 14 8 A2 front panel processor digital control 12 11 A30 directional coupler removal 14 18 A30 dual directional coupler 12 23 A3 source high band theory 12 19 low band theory 12 16 removal 14 10 source 12 15 theory of operation 12 3 12 14 Index 2 A3 source and A11 phase lock check 7 8 A4 R sampler mixer 12 28 A4 sampler mixer check 7 6 A5 A sampler mixer 12 28
186. ction Constants 3 15 3 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 49 i 4 The analyzer should display Intensity Cor ND Note The display could be so far out of adjustment that the annotation will be very difficult to read 5 Press EXECUTE TEST top softkey and YES second from top softkey at the prompt to alter the correction constants Alternating vertical bars of three different intensities will be drawn on the display Each bar has a number written below it either 0 1 or 2 6 Adjust the analyzer s RPG knob until the vertical bar labeled 1 is just barely visible against the black border Vertical bar 0 must not be visible Maximum Intensity Adjustment This adjustment ensures that the light output at the 100 intensity level is equal to or less than 150 NITs The level is set using a photometer to measure the display s light output level Caution Operating the display at intensities higher than 150 NITs may reduce the life of the display 3 16 Adjustments and Correction Constants HP 8752C NETWORK ANALYZER oo anes SiS 0000 EEEE E e oo posan poo naco oo Dovoo0oo 0O o l O 000 00000 oo PHOTOMETER PHOTOMETER PROBE sh642c Figure 3 4 Maximum Intensity Adjustment Set up 7 Press the top softkey 8 Set the photometer probe to NORMAL Press POWER on the photometer to switch it on and allow 30 minutes warm u
187. d The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Before Applying Power Caution Make sure that the analyzer line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Caution If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral grounded side of the mains supply Servicing Warning No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers Warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened 15 6 Safety and Licensing Warning Adjustments described in this document may be performed with power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed Energy available at many points may if contacted result in personal injury Warning The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects t
188. d and adapters between frequency counter port and type N cable Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 49 Description and Procedure This adjustment sets the VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator frequency to maintain the analyzer s frequency accuracy 1 Remove the analyzer s top cover and connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 17 2 Press PRESET 3 Press MENU CW FREQ M u and note the frequency m Frequency 50 MHz 500 Hz no adjustment is required a To adjust the frequency locate the A12 assembly red extractors and adjust VCXO ADJ see Figure 3 18 for a frequency counter reading of 50 MHz 500 Hz 4 If you are unable to adjust the frequency as specified replace the A12 assembly VCO ADJ VOXO RED C85 ADJ A12 Reference Assembly sg64d Figure 3 18 VCXO ADJ Adjustment Location 3 50 Adjustments and Correction Constants 21 High Low Band Transition Adjustment Equipment Required No equipment is required for this adjustment procedure Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure This adjustment centers the VCO voltage controlled oscillator of the A12 reference assembly for reliable high band and low band operation 1 N Remove the top cover see 1 A9CC Jumper Position Procedure Remove the PC board stabilizer and place the A12 assembly on an extender board Use extension SMB cables as needed
189. d arm of the dual directional coupler 4 The synthesizer signal and the source signal are combined by the sampler A difference frequency is generated In the A4 R sampler the 1st LO signal from the pulse generator is combined with the source output signal The IF intermediate frequency produced is a first approximation of 1 MHz The Ist IF is routed back to the All phase lock assembly 5 The difference frequency 1st IF from the A4 R sampler is compared to a reference The Ist IF feedback signal from the A4 is filtered and applied to a phase comparator circuit in the All phase lock assembly The other input to the phase comparator is a crystal controlled 1 MHz signal from the A12 reference assembly Any frequency difference between these two signals produces a proportional error voltage Theory of Operation 12 19 6 A tuning signal YO DRIVE tunes the source and phase lock is achieved The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator in order to bring it closer to the required frequency The loop process continues until the 1st IF feedback signal to the phase comparator is equal to the 1 MHz reference signal and phase lock is achieved 7 A synthesized subsweep is generated by A13 A14 The A3 source tracks the synthesizer When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the start frequency the synthesizer starts to sweep The phase locked loop forces the source to track the synthesizer maintaining a constant 1 MH
190. d from its input and then compares it with the incident signal generated by the swept RF source These signals are then applied to a receiver for measurement signal processing and display The HP 8752C vector network analyzer integrates a high resolution synthesized RF source transmission reflection test set and a dual channel three input receiver to measure and display magnitude phase and group delay of transmitted and reflected power The HP 8752C Option 010 has the additional capability of transforming measured data from frequency domain to time domain Figure 12 1 is a simplified block diagram of the network analyzer system A detailed block diagram of the analyzer is located at the end of the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter E PHASE LOCK 300 KHz to 1 3 GHz 30 kHz to 3 or 6 GHz p Sat SYNTHESIZED RECE I VER E DISPLAY REFLECTION TRANSMISSION TEST PORT OPTION 003 300 kHz TO 3 GHz OPTION 006 300 kHZ TO 6 GHz sh6113c Figure 12 1 Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System 12 2 Theory of Operation The Built In Synthesized Source The analyzer s built in synthesized source produces a swept RF signal in the range of 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz The HP 8752C Option 003 is able to generate signals up to 3 GHz and the Option 006 generates signals up to 6 GHz The source output power is leveled by an internal ALC automatic leveling control circuit To achieve frequency accuracy
191. d of the sweep press AUTOSCALE Press MKR FCTN MKR SEARCH SEARCH MAX Press MKR MARKER 2 MKR FCTN MKR SEARCH SEARCH MIN 10 Press MKR A MODE MENU A REF 1 Record the absolute delta value of the marker 2 marker 1 reading from the upper right top most value in the Magnitude Value column of the Performance Test Record Press FORMAT PHASE 2 48 System Verification and Performance Tests 13 Press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE At the end of the sweep press AUTOSCALE 14 Press MKR MARKER A REF 1 MKRFCTN MKR SEARCH SEARCH MAX 15 Press MKR MARKER 2 MKRFCTN MKR SEARCH SEARCH MIN 16 Record the absolute delta value of the marker 2 marker 1 reading from the upper right top most value in the Phase Value column of the Performance Test Record Note Marker 2 has unit reading of m which means milli degrees 17 Press FORMAT LOG MAG CW FREQ G G n 18 Press TRIGGER MENU SINGLE At the end of the sweep press AUTOSCALE 19 Press MKR MARKER A REF 1 MKRFCTN MKR SEARCH SEARCH MAX 20 Press MKR MARKER 2 MKRFCTN MKR SEARCH SEARCH MIN 21 Record the absolute delta value of the marker 2 reading in the Magnitude Value column of the Performance Test Record 22 Repeat steps 12 to 21 for the other CW frequencies listed in the Performance Test Record In case of difficulty 1 If this test fails suspect the A6 B sampler assembly R
192. d phase lock is achieved 12 16 Theory of Operation 6 A synthesized sub sweep is generated The source tracks the synthesizer When phase lock is achieved at the start frequency the synthesizer starts to sweep This changes the phase lock reference frequency and causes the source to track at a difference frequency 40 MHz below the synthesizer A13 14 FRACT IONAL N 30 to 60 MHz VCO 1ST IF A12 REFERENCE A11 PHASE LOCK TO A5 A SAMPLER MIXER 3 GHz TO 6 GHz lt AZATI oF gt gt I P lt i REFLECTION Son TEST PORT SOURCE P hon o Ose QUIET 4 dB PAD DUAL DIRECTIONAL 300 KHz soos COUPLER TO 3 GHz 3 8 GHz CAVITY OSC FOR THE OPTION 004 THE 4 dB PAD IS REPLACED BY A 70 dB STEP ATTENUATOR sh6106c Figure 12 4 Low Band Operation of the Source Theory of Operation 12 17 The full low band is produced in two subsweeps to allow addition IF filtering below 3 MHz At the transition between subsweeps the source is pretuned and then relocks Table 12 1 lists the low band subsweep frequencies at the fractional N VCO and the source output Table 12 1 Low Band Subsweep Frequencies Fractional N MHz 1st IF MHz Source Output MHz 40 3 to 43 3 0 3 to 3 3 0 3 to 3 3 43 3 to 56 0 3 3to16 0 3 3 to 16 0 12 18 Theory of Operation
193. disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs Note a Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting assemblies m When extensive disassembly is required refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter m Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter to identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter a If all the LEDs light the assembly removed or one receiving power from it is faulty a If the LEDs are still not on steadily continue with Inspect the Motherboard Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 17 Table 5 4 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection Assembly Removal or Other Assemblies that Receive To Remove Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly 1 A3 Source Remove from Card Cage None 2 A7 Pulse Generator Remove from Card Cage None 3 A4 R Sampler Remove from Card Cage None 4 A5 A Sampler Remove from Card Cage None 5 A6 B Sampler Remove from Card Cage None 6 A2 Front Panel Interface Disconnect W17 Al Front Panel Keyboard 7 A16 Rear Panel Interface Disconnect A16W1 None Inspect the Motherboard Inspect the A17 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces In particular inspect the traces that carry the supplies whose LEDs faulted when A8TP4 SDIS was grounded earlier 5 18 Power Supply Troubleshooting Error Messages Three error messages are a
194. div Offset 0 000 volts Timebose 100 nsec div Delay 0 00000 sec sg603s Figure 8 4 4 MHz REF Waveform Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination If the 4 MHz REF signal is good at the A10 digital IF assembly check the A10 assembly by one of the following methods m Substitute another A10 assembly and rerun internal tests 18 and 17 m Check the signal control lines required for its operation The pins and signal sources of those lines are identified in Table 8 1 It is possible that the A9 assembly may not be providing the necessary signals These signal checks allow you to determine which assembly is faulty Some of the waveforms are illustrated by Figure 8 5 and Figure 8 6 8 8 Receiver Troubleshooting If the substitute assembly shows no improvement or if all of the input signals are valid continue with Check the 4 kHz Signal Otherwise troubleshoot the suspect signal s or consider the A10 assembly faulty Table 8 1 Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation Mnemonic Description A10 Signal See Location Source Figure DIFDO Digital IF data O LSB P2 27 A9P2 27 i DIFD1 Digital IF data 1 P2 57 A9P2 57 5 DIFD2 Digital IF data 2 P2 28 A9P2 28 i DIFD3 Digital IF data 3 P2 58 A9P2 58 i DIFD4 Digital IF data 4 P2 29 A9P2 29 i DIFD5 Digital IF data 5 P2 59 A9P2 59 i DIFD6 Digital IF data 6 P2 30 A9P2 30 i DIFD7 Digital IF data 7 MSB P2 60 A9P2 60 i L DIFENO Digital IF enable 0 P2 34 A9P2 34 a L DIFEN1 Digi
195. dure All color monitors are susceptible to external magnetic fields The usual symptom is a discoloration or slight dimming usually occurring near the top left corner of the analyzer s display In extreme cases a total color shift may be observed for example a trace that was red may shift to green Like most displays the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic fields generated from unshielded motors In countries that use a 50 Hz line voltage frequency some 10 Hz jitter may be observed If this problem is observed remove the device causing the magnetic field Should the display become magnetized or if color purity is a problem cycle the power several times Leave the analyzer off for at least 30 seconds before switching it on This will activate the automatic degaussing circuitry in the display If this is insufficient to achieve color purity use a commercially available demagnetizer either a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser Follow the manufacturer s instructions keeping in mind the following m Initially use the demagnetizer no closer than 4 inches 10 cm from the face of the CRT m If needed try again at a slightly closer distance until the CRT is demagnetized Caution Applying a strong magnetic field to the CRT face can permanently destroy it Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 45 19 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Equipment Required No equipment is required to perform this adjustment p
196. e This signal is active during the 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep The upper trace of Figure 7 22 shows relative inactivity of this signal during preset condition The lower trace shows its status during a 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep with inactivity during retrace only 1 00000 sec 0 00000 sec 1 00000 sec Preset Ch 1 4 000 volte div Offset 0 000 volts Timebase 200 msec div Delay 0 00000 sec sg623s Figure 7 22 H MB Signal at A14P1 5 Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep 7 32 Source Troubleshooting A7 Pulse Generator Check The pulse generator affects phase lock in high band only It can be checked with either a spectrum analyzer or an oscilloscope A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer 1 Remove the A7 to A6 SMB cable W7 from the A7 pulse generator assembly Set the analyzer to generate a 16 MHz CW signal Connect the spectrum analyzer to the A7 output connector and observe the signal The A7 comb should resemble the spectral display in Figure 7 23 Pear aa orl a cll ie eee PMU EALE TT UT tee dee TA sg624s Figure 7 23 Pulse Generator Output Source Troubleshooting 7 33 2 If the analyzer malfunction relates to a particular frequency or range look more closely at the comb tooth there Adjust the spectrum analyzer span and bandwidth as required Even at 3 GHz the comb should look as clean as Figure 7 24 For Option 006 instruments at 6 GHz the comb tooth level should be approximately
197. e refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter CHi AUX Re l Ur REF 4 U hp START 9 304 409 MHz STOP 6 000 009 4688 MHz sh6151c Figure 10 12 Analog Bus Node 16 10 40 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 17 Ist IF IF used for phase lock Perform step All above and then press ANALOG IN COUNTER ANALOG BUS CW FREQ Vary the frequency and compare the results to the table below Entered Frequency Counter Reading 0 2 to 15 999 MHz same as entered 16 MHz to 3 GHz 1 MHz This node displays the IF frequency see nodel7 as it enters the A11 phase lock assembly via the A4 R sampler assembly This signal comes from the R sampler output and is used to phase lock the source CH1 AUX Re 266 mur REF U hp FREQUENCY 10 MHz 3 16 886 MHz START ch 10 009 0080 MHz STOP 100 sg6271d Figure 10 13 Counter Readout Location Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 18 IF Det 2N IF on A11 phase lock after 3 MHz filter Perform step A11 above and then press ANALOG IN AUTOSCALE This node detects the IF within the low pass filter limiter The filter is used during the track and sweep sequences but never in band 1 3 3 to 16 MHz The low level about 1 7V means IF is in the passband of the filter This node can be used with the FRAC
198. e A13 assembly as in high band operation 2 The fractional N VCO signal is mixed with 40 MHz to produce a reference signal The signal FN LO from the fractional N VCO goes to the A12 reference assembly where it is mixed with the 40 MHz VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator The resulting signal is the reference to the phase comparator in the A11 assembly 3 The A3 source is pretuned The source output is fed to the A4 R sampler mixer The pretuned DAC in the All phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a frequency 1 to 6 MHz above the start frequency This signal source output is applied to the A4 R sampler mixer assembly via the coupled arm of the A30 dual directional coupler 4 The signal from the source is fed back 1st IF to the phase comparator The source output signal passes directly through the R sampler in the A4 assembly because the sampler is biased on The signal 1st IF is fed back unaltered to the phase comparator in the All phase lock assembly The other input to the phase comparator is the heterodyned reference signal from the A12 assembly Any frequency difference between these two signals produces a proportional error voltage 5 A tuning signal YO DRIVE tunes the source and phase lock is achieved The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator to bring the YIG closer to the reference frequency The loop process continues until the source frequency and the reference frequency are the same an
199. e A9 CPU the A16 rear panel the A18 display and the A19 graphics system processor GSP assemblies The A10 digital IF assembly is also related to this group These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the analyzer Source The source group consists of the A3 source AT pulse generator All phase lock A12 reference A13 fractional N analog and A14 fractional N digital assemblies The A4 R sampler is also related since it is part of the source phase lock loop The source supplies a phase locked RF signal to the device under test Signal Separation The signal separation group consists of the A30 dual directional coupler assembly This assembly performs the function of a reflection transmission test set It divides the source signal into a reference path and a test path and provides connections to the device under test Receiver The receiver group consists of the A4 A5 A6 sampler mixers and the A10 digital IF assemblies The A12 reference assembly and the A9 CPU assembly are also related The receiver measures and processes input signals for display The following pages describe the operation of each of the functional groups Theory of Operation 12 5 Power Supply Theory The power supply functional group consists of the A15 preregulator and the A8 post regulator These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply that provides regulated DC voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer The A15 preregulator i
200. e Parts 13 33 Right View of Attaching Hardware Ttem HP Part Qty Description Number 1 0515 2086 8 SCREW MACHINE M4 0x 7 PC FL TX 2 0515 1400 1 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 8 PC FL TX Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes 8 PLACES 13 34 Replaceable Parts sh61c Left View of Attaching Hardware Item HP Part Qty Description Number Ae 0515 2086 8 SCREW MACHINE M4 0x 7 PC FL TX ae 0515 2086 3 SCREW MACHINE M4 0x 7 PC FL TX 3 1460 1573 1 SPRING EXTENSION 138 OD 4 0515 0430 1 SCREW MACHINE M3 0x 6 CW PN TX 5 08753 00036 1 INSULATOR SWITCH 6 08753 00048 1 ACTUATOR LINE SWITCH 7 08757 40005 1 LINE BUTTON Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes 11 PLACES 000 00000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 00000 sh62c NOT VISIBLE Replaceable Parts 13 35 Rear Panel Attaching Hardware Item HP Part Qty Description Number 1 2190 0102 4 WASHER LOCK INTERNAL TEETH 15 32 INCH 0 472 INCH ID 2 2950 0035 7 NUT HEX DOUBLE CHAMFER 15 32 32 THREAD 3 2190 0586 2 WASHER LOCK HELICAL 4 0 MM 4 1 MM
201. e Pattern 2 6 16 6 8 Pin Locations on Connector of W20 6 17 7 1 Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup 7 4 7 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU 2 4 7 5 7 3 Sampler Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram 7 7 7 4 Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode 7 9 7 5 Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune Mode 2 ena ee ELEn ae i ea Ta 7 9 Contents 18 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 7 27 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 9 1 9 2 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 1V GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Off YO and YO Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PLL ORE e a a A A a Se ee BS Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 any frequency High Band REF Signal gt 16 MHzCW 2 2 2 2 REF Signal at ALITP9 5MHzCW aaa aaa Typical FN LO Waveform at Al2J1 4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP9 Preset 90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals gt 16 MHz Wa aane AA wae Tee ce O hy el tint She a In Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals 14 MHz CW L ENREF Line at A12P2 16 Preset Complementary L HB and L LB Signals Preset 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from Al4J1 25 MHz HI OUT Wave
202. e for the CW frequency Refer to Table 7 2 10 Verify the remaining CW frequencies comparing the counter reading with the value in Table 7 2 a Press 2 M74 b Press M p 11 Check the results a If all the counter readings match the frequencies listed in Table 7 2 continue with A13 A14 Fractional N Check a If the counter readings are incorrect at the 500 kHz and 2 MHz settings only continue with FN LO at Al2 Check a If all the counter readings are incorrect at all three CW frequencies the counter may be faulty Perform the Oscilloscope Method check of the signals described below If the signals are correct either the A10 or A14 assemblies could be faulty 7 14 Source Troubleshooting Oscilloscope Method You need not use the oscilloscope method unless the analog bus is non functional or any of the signals fail the specifications listed in Table 7 2 If the analog bus is non functional or the previous check has revealed questionable signals observe the signal s with an oscilloscope Table 7 3 identifies convenient test points and figures showing the five signals listed Table 7 3 A12 Reference Frequencies Mnemonic Signal Test Point See Analyzer Description Location Figure Setting FN100kHzREF 100 kHz Reference A13TP5 Figure 7 8 any REF Phase Lock A11TP1 PIN 9 Figure 7 9 gt 16 MHz CW Reference REF Phase Lock A11TP1 PIN 9 Figure 7 10 5 MHz CW Reference FN LO Fractional N
203. e shown in the following Error Term descriptions section and to previously measured data If data is not available from previous measurements refer to the typical uncorrected performance specifications listed in Table 11 2 5 Make a hardcopy of the measurement results a Connect a printing or plotting peripheral to the analyzer b Press LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER SET ADDRESSES and select the appropriate peripheral to verify that the HP IB address is set correctly on the analyzer C Press and then choose either PRINT or PLOT d Press MORE TITLE and title each data trace so that you can identify it later for detailed information on creating hardcopies refer to Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results in the AP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide 11 8 Error Terms If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values 1 Perform a system verification to verify that the system still conforms to specifications 2 If system verification fails refer to Start Troubleshooting Here Uncorrected Performance The following table shows typical performance without error correction RF cables are not used except as noted Related error terms should be within these values Table 11 2 Uncorrected System Performance Frequency Range GHz 0 0003 to 1 3 1 3 to 3 0 3 0 to 6 0 Directivity 40 aB 35 dB 32 dB Source Match 30 dB 25 dB 20 dB Reflection Tracking 0 2 dB 0 3 dB 0 4 dB Transmiss
204. e trace in Figure 8 3 Receiver Troubleshooting 8 5 CHL B log MAG 2dBe REF 16 dB tp SCALE 2 dBedi START 300 608 MHz STOP 6 888 686 gga MHz sh61050 Figure 8 3 Sample B Input Trace 4 Review the results ci If none of the input traces resemble the corresponding sample trace continue with Troubleshooting When All Inp uts Look Bad ci If at least one input trace resembles its corresponding sample trace continue with Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good 8 6 Receiver Troubleshooting Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad Run Internal Tests 18 and 17 l Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST to run the ADC offset 2 Then when the analyzer finishes test 18 press EXECUTE TEST to run the ADC linearity test 3 If either of these tests FAIL continue with Check the 4 MHz REF Signal Receiver Troubleshooting 8 7 Check the 4 MHz REF Signal 1 Press PRESET 2 Use an oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz reference signal at A10P2 6 a If the signal does not resemble Figure 8 4 troubleshoot the signal source A12P2 36 and path a If the signal is good the probability is greater than 90 that the A10 assembly is faulty For confirmation perform Vhrvk S10 by Substitution or Signal Examination 500 000 nsec 0 00000 sec 500 000 nsec Ch 1 1 000 volts
205. eaded holes 13 30 Replaceable Parts Top View of Attaching Hardware and Post Regulator Fuses 2 PLACES 2 PLACES UNDERNEATH 6 ABF2 ABF1 5 0 amp E MIITTA cO ABF3 ASFUL z E MEg UNDERNEATH q E E 4 PIECES E E 5 CAP BAR ABFS o 2 SCREWS Y ASF6 E al E qi o a El ABF7 qi oT DI A8F8 ia 15 PLACES ol a i 3 5 oe O A8F9 3 9 ly 8 wai 7 3 PLACES el A MP2 I m MP1 o o o o o o o o o o o o 8 1 MPE 9NO0 2 sh66c Replaceable Parts 13 31 Bottom View of Attaching Hardware Item HP Part Qty Description Number 1 0515 1400 5 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 8 PC FL TX 2 5180 8500 1 INSULATOR 3 0515 0377 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 10 CW PN TX 4 0515 0458 2 SCREW MACHINE M3 5x 8 CW PN TX A17 MOTHERBOARD ASSY see Major Assemblies Metric hardware other thread types will damage threaded holes 13 32 Replaceable Parts Bottom View of Attaching Hardware 5 PLACES UNDERNEATH sh69c Replaceabl
206. eappear reconfigure the test setup to keep input power levels at 0 dBm or below o If P reappears continue with Check the R A and B Inputs Receiver Troubleshooting 8 3 Check the R A and B Inputs Use the following procedure to check the flatness of the R A and B input traces by comparing them with the sample traces shown in Figure 8 1 through Figure 8 3 1 Check the R trace a Press INPUT PORTS R AUTO SCALE b Check the flatness of the R trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8 1 CH1 R log MAG 1 dB REF 1 dB i SCALE a START 300 B G MHz STOP 6 608 484 ggg MHz sh61030 Figure 8 1 Sample R Input Trace 2 Check the A trace a Connect a short to the reflection test port of the analyzer b Press MEAS INPUT PORTS A SCALE REF AUTO SCALE c Check the flatness of the input A trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8 2 8 4 Receiver Troubleshooting CHL A log MAG 1 dBe REF 12 dB SCALE ik Bedi WAV 4 EOR Y START 394 208 MHz STOP 6 008 400 808 MHz sh6104 Figure 8 2 Sample A Input Trace 3 Check the B trace a Connect a thru cable from the reflection test port to the transmission test port of the analyzer Press MEAS INPUT PORTS B AUTO SCALE Check the flatness of the input B trace by comparing it with th
207. earity is found by calculating the difference between the power meter reading and the power offset listed in the appropriate table 7 through 13 of the Performance Test Record System Verification and Performance Tests 2 15 Procedure Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C or an HP 8752C Option 075 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 3 Note For instruments with Option 075 a use an HP 8483A 750 power sensor b use tables 11 through 13 in the Performance Test Record For instruments with Option 075 and Option 003 use an HP 8483A Option H03 750 power sensor HP 87520 HP 438A LS REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSM a LON TEST PO HP 8481A POWER SENSOR HP 8482A 8483A POWER SENSOR xh621e Figure 2 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity Test Setup 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter For more information on how to perform this task refer to the power meter Operating and Service manual 3 Press PRESET MENU CW FREQ G O O m 4 Press POWER E a Set the power meter cal factor for this CW frequency On the power meter set the current power level as the reference for relative power dB measurements This can be done by 2 16 System Verification and Performance Tests pressing on an HP 436A or on an HP 438A power meter front panel Press POWER E C 0 1 Record the power meter readi
208. ecord its mean value Use the equation Power dBm 20 logio linear magnitude mean value to convert the linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude Record this calculated value on the Performance Test Record 22 of 28 This completes the Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level test if you are working with either a standard analyzer or an analyzer with Option 003 Proceed to the next section if your analyzer has Option 006 installed 2 26 System Verification and Performance Tests Noise Floor Level at 3 GHz to 6 GHz Option 006 with an IF BW of 10 Hz 13 Press START G G n STOP 6 S n Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 8 HP 8752C REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT xh62e Figure 2 8 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 1 14 Press POWER 0 TRIGGER MENU SINGLE 15 When the sweep is finished press DISPLAY DATA MEMORY DATA MEM Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 9 HP 8752C TERMINATION Cable Type N 24 inch Type N m TERMINATION Type N f xh618 Figure 2 9 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 27 16 Tf your analyzer has Option 004 press POWER 8 TRIGGER MENU SINGLE If your analyzer does not have Option 004 installed press POWER 2 Gi MENU TRIGGE
209. ed approximately 20 dBm at the reflection port The RF output power is automatically reduced to 20 dBm The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated To reset the analyzer s power and regain control of the power level do the following 1 Remove any devices under test which may have contributed excess power to the analyzer s reflection port 2 Press MENU POWER xi SOURCE POWER ON to turn the analyzer s internal source back on 8 2 Receiver Troubleshooting a If the power trip indicator P does not reappear reconfigure the test setup to keep input power levels at 0 dBm or below o If P reappears continue with Check the R A and B Inputs CAUTION OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT POWER REDUCED You have exceeded approximately 4 dBm at the transmission port The RF output power is automatically reduced to 20 dBm The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated To reset the analyzer s power and regain control of the power level do the following 1 Remove any devices under test which may have contributed excess power to the analyzer s transmission port 2 Connect a cable from the reflection port to the transmission port 3 Press POWER 0 SOURCE POWER ON to turn the analyzer s internal source back on a If the power trip indicator P does not r
210. eflection Test Port 11 12 Error Terms Source Match Es After a Reflection 1 Port Calibration Description Source match is a measure of test port connector match as well as the match between all components from the source to the test port It is obtained by measuring the reflection of an open and a short connected directly to the test port Significant System Components open calibration kit device short calibration kit device analyzer s directional coupler test port connectors Affected Measurements Reflection and transmission measurements of highly reflective devices are most affected by source match errors Procedure To view the analyzer s source match parameters perform a 1 port calibration then press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST 63 x1 Error Terms 11 13 CHL MEM log MAG 5 dB REF 40 dB x ES REFLEC ION TEST PORT PRm Cor Mal Hid wd s f Ar 7 START 300 gga MHz STOP EG 648 988 gga MHz sh6125c Figure 11 5 Typical Es Reflection Test Port 11 14 Error Terms Reflection Tracking Er After a Reflection 1 Port Calibration Description Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path R path and the frequency response of the reflection test path A input path The error term is obtained by measuring the reflections of an open and a short during calibration Significant System Comp
211. ement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Tools Required a ESD wrist strap and grounding cord Small flat edge screwdriver a TORX driver o Number 10 o Number 15 o Number 25 renches open end 3 16 inch 9 32 inch 5 16 inch 9 16 inch E u0i00 g 14 2 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Cover Removal Procedure sh682c Figure 14 1 Cover Removal Procedure To remove top cover To remove right side cover remove screws 1 amp upper standoffs 2 remove top cover loosen screw 3 remove screw 9 amp lower standoff 10 slide cover off loosen screw 11 slide cover back To remove left side cover To remove bottom cover remove top cover remove bottom feet 12 remove screw 4 lower standoff 5 remove screws 4 9 amp lower standoffs 5 10 remove screws 6 amp handle 7 loosen screw 13 loosen screw 8 slide cover off slide cover back Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 3 Initial Front Panel Procedure ACTIVE CHANNEL
212. ep from 30 MHz to 60 MHz The faster analog bus method should suffice unless problems are detected Fractional N Check with Analog Bus l Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MEAS ANALOG IN Aux Input FRAC N to switch on the analog bus and the fractional N counter 2 Then press CW FREQ to set the analyzer to CW mode 3 Set the instrument as indicated in Table 7 5 and see whether the VCO generates the frequencies listed 7 24 Source Troubleshooting Table 7 5 VCO Range Check Frequencies Instrument Setting Counter Reading 31 MHz 30 0 030 MHz 60 999999 MHz 60 0 060 MHz 4 Check the counter reading at the frequencies indicated O If the readings are within the limits specified the probability is greater than 90 that the fractional N assemblies are functional Either continue with the A7 Pulse Generator Check or perform the more conclusive A 14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope described below a If the readings fail the specified limits perform the A14 VCO Exercise Source Troubleshooting 7 25 A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope 1 Remove the W9 HI OUT cable A14J1 to A7 from the A7 assembly and connect it to an oscilloscope set for 50 ohm input impedance Switch on the analyzer 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to activate the FRACN TUNE service mode See the Service Key Menus and Error Messages chapter for more inform
213. epeat this test Replace the sampler assembly if the problem still exists System Verification and Performance Tests 2 49 Performance Test Record HP 8752C Performance Test Record 1 of 28 Calibration Lab Address Model HP 8752C Serial No Firmware Revision Ambient Temperature Test Equipment Used Description Model Number Report Number Date Last Calibration Date Customer s Name Performed by Option s Relative Humidity Trace Number Cal Due Date Frequency Counter Power Meter Power Sensor Calibration Kit Notes Comments 2 50 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 2 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 1 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Standard HP 8752C CW Frequencies Min Results Measured Max Measurement MHz MHz MHz MHz Uncertainty MHz 0 3 0 299 997 0 300 003 0 000 000 360 5 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 000 006 16 0 15 999 840 16 000 160 0 000 019 31 0 30 999 690 31 000 310 0 000 037 60 999 999 60 999 390 61 000 610 0 000 073 121 0 120 998 790 121 001 210 0 000 145 180 0 179 998 200 180 001 800 0 000 216 310 0 309 995 900 310 003 100 0 000 372 700 0 699 930 000 700 007 000 0 000 840 1 300 0 1 299 9
214. er Hardware Remove the screw on the side edge of the frame item 38 Disconnect the semi rigid cables from the coupler Remove the coupler and bracket from the analyzer Remove the screws item 39 that fasten the bracket to the coupler Disconnect any remaining cables from the coupler Oo ons Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall After reinstallation refer to Post Repair Procedures at the end of this chapter to ensure that the analyzer operates properly Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 19 B1 Fan How to Remove the Fan 1 Perform the Initial Rear Panel Procedure 4 PLACES 41 WARNING A CAUTION A LINE JE oo oo o ah f 40 Figure 14 13 Location of Fan Wire Bundle and Screws sh689c 2 Disconnect the fan s wire bundle from its motherboard connector item 40 Figure 14 13 3 Remove the Torx screws item 41 from the four corners of the fan Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall After reinstallation refer to Post Repair Procedures at the end of this chapter to ensure that the analyzer operates properly
215. er meter HP 436A 437B or 438A Power sensor HP 8482A HP 8483A Option HO3 special option power sensor NETWORK ANALYZER POWER METER REFLECTION PORT sh634c Figure 4 5 Equipment Setup for Source Power Check 3 Switch on the instruments Zero and calibrate the power meter 4 On the analyzer press PRESET Stimulus MENU POWER 220 xi MENU CW FREQ 300 K m The power meter should read approximately 20 dBm 85 dBm for Option 004 5 Press 16 m z to change the CW frequency to 16 MHz The power meter should read approximately 20 dBm throughout the analyzer s frequency range Repeat checking the frequency at 1 GHz intervals up to the maximum frequency of the analyzer 6 Press POWER 5 i to increase the output power to 5 dBm 10 dBm for Option 004 7 Step through the frequencies as above the power meter should read approximately 5 dBm at all frequencies 10 dBm with Option 004 If any incorrect power levels are measured refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter Otherwise continue with Receiver Check 4 14 Start Troubleshooting Here Receiver Check 1 Connect an RF cable directly between the reflection and transmission ports 2 On the analyzer press PRESET TRANSMISSION SCALE REF 5 x1 3 Notice the condition of the trace it should resemble Figure 4 6 If the trace shows u
216. er right hand corner of the analyzer display on the Performance Test Record 14 of 28 8 Press POWER POWER RANGES RANGE 1 25 to 0 Enter the power level value listed in the Performance Test Record For this power range press OOO 9 Repeat steps 6 7 and 8 for the other power ranges listed in the Performance Test Record 14 of 28 Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Option 004 or an HP 8752C withOptions 004 and 075 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 5 Note For instruments with Option 075 a use an HP 8483A 759 power sensor b use tables 19 through 21 in the Performance Test Record For instruments with Option 075 and Option 003 use an HP 8483A Option H03 750 power sensor HP 8752C HP 438A LS REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSM A LON TEST PO 481A HP amp HP 8482A 8483A POWER SENSOR POWER SENSOR xh621e Figure 2 5 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity Test Setup System Verification and Performance Tests 2 21 Zero and calibrate the power meter For more information on how to perform this task refer to the power meter s Operating and Service manual Press PRESET CW FREQ G OO k m Press POWER 2 6 x1 Set the power meter cal factor for this CW frequency On the power meter set the current power level as the reference for relative power dB measurements by pres
217. error messages are disabled The fractional N circuits and the receiver operate normally Therefore the instrument sweeps but the source is being driven by the pretune DAC in a stair stepped fashion Automatically attempts to determine new pretune values when the instrument encounters phase lock problems for example harmonic skip With PLL AUTO OFF the frequencies and voltages do not change like when they are attempting to determine new pretune values so troubleshooting the phase locked loop circuits is more convenient This function may also be turned off to avoid pretune calibration errors in applications where there is a limited frequency response in the R reference channel For example in a high power test application using band limited filters for R channel phase locking Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 21 PLL DIAG on OFF SM5 PLL PAUSE MORE displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of each band This sequence normally occurs very rapidly making it difficult to troubleshoot phase lock problems Switching this mode ON slows the process down allowing you to inspect the steps of the phase lock sequence pretune acquire and track by pausing at each step The steps are indicated on the display along with the channel C1 or C2 and band number B1 through B13 This mode can be used with PLL PAUSE to halt the process at any step It can also be used with the analog bus counter used only w
218. ersedes December 1997 Printed in USA February 1998 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Copyright 1995 1997 1998 Hewlett Packard Company Contents 1 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Table of Service Test Equipment Principles of Microwave Connector Care 2 Analyzer Options Available ee Option 003 3 GHz Operation 2 ee Option 004 Step Attenuator 0 Option 006 6 GHz Operation 20240 Option 010 Time Domain 20428 Option 075 75Q Impedance o Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles Option AFN add 500 Test Port Cable Option AFP add 750 Test Port Cable Option B02 External Disk Drive 4 Service and Support Options ee a pl Al pd pl pd pl t co 00 00 00 ON LLL Oe 2 System Verification and Performance Tests How to Test the Performance of Y
219. eshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools 2 2 2 2 0484 Phase Lock Error Messages 1 Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines Broadband Power Problems 2 084 Receiver Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence Receiver Failure Error Messages 0 ee CAUTION OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT POWER REDUCED CAUTION OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT POWER REDUCED Check the R A and B Inputs Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad Run Internal Tests 18 and 17 Check the 4 MHz REF Signal Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good Check the Frequency Response Correction 2 Check the 4 kHz Signal a a a Check Ist LO Signal at Sampler Mixer 2 2 Contents 10 7 21 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 23 7 24 7 24 7 24 7 26 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 32 7 33 7 33 7 35 7 35 7 37 7 37 7 37 7 39 7 39 7 39 7 39 7 40 7 40 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 7 8 7 8 8 8 8 8 11 8 11 8 11 8 12 Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler Mixer 2 8 13 Check Input Trace 2 goa e a a a a A a a X 8 14 9 Accessories Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence 9 2 Inspect the Accessories o 9 3 Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibr
220. ests routines run or supply necessary additional data resumes the test from where it was stopped toggles the repeat function on and off When the function is ON the selected test will run 10 000 times unless you press any key to stop it The analyzer shows the current number of passes and fails toggles the record function on and off When the function is ON certain test results are sent to a printer via HP IB This is especially useful for correction constants The instrument must be in system controller mode or pass control mode to print refer to the Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results chapter in the HP 8752C User s Guide selects either NORMal or SPeCiaL tighter limits for the Operator s Check The SPCL limits are useful for a guard band accesses the following Edit List menu to allow modification of the external power loss data table Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 5 LOSS SENSR LISTS accesses the power loss sensor lists menu USE SENSOR A B selects the A or B power sensor calibration factor list for use in power meter calibration measurements CAL FACTOR SENSOR 4 CALFSENA accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor A CAL FACTOR SENSOR B CALFSENB accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor B POWER LOSS POWLLIST accesses the Edit List menu to allow modificati
221. f Microwave Connector Care Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate repeatable measurements Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information Prior to making connections to the network analyzer carefully review the information about inspecting cleaning and gaging connectors Having good connector care and connection techniques extends the life of these devices In addition you obtain the most accurate measurements This type of information is typically located in Chapter 3 of the calibration kit manuals For additional connector care instruction contact your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office about course numbers HP 85050A 24A and HP 85050A 24D See the following table for quick reference tips about connector care Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 5 Table 1 3 Connector Care Quick Reference Handling and Storage Do Do Not Keep connectors clean Extend sleeve or connector nut Use plastic end caps during storage Touch mating plane surfaces Set connectors contact end down Visual Ins pection Do Do Not Inspect all connectors carefully Look for metal particles scratches and dents Use a damaged connector ever Connector Cleaning Do Do Not Try compressed air first Use isopropyl alcohol Clean connector threads Use any abrasives Get liquid into plastic support beads Gag
222. f Operation TO A11 PHASE LOCK FROM A7 PULSE FROM A12 GENERATOR I REFERENCE dst LO 2nd LO ea A10 DIGITAL IF R AUX IN iS ist LO N or ABUS MUX ist IF 2nd IF ADC ne Se gt OO L d A30 DUAL DIRECTIONAL ist LO 2nd LO COUPLER FROM A3 AS SOURCE SAMPLER MIXER st ES 2nd LO REFLECTION TEST PORT LATA me dB EE Sp l AAA TN sh61100 Figure 12 9 Receiver Functional Group Option 004 and 006 Theory of Operation 12 27 A4 A5 A6 Sampler Mixer The A4 A5 and A6 sampler mixers all down convert the RF input signals to fixed 4 kHz 2nd IF signals with amplitude and phase corresponding to the RF input For the analyzer with with Option 006 the A6 B sampler mixer assembly includes an 8 dB gain preamplifier in front of the sampler This improves the noise figure performance of the analyzer s receiver channel B The Sampler Circuit in High Band In high band operation the sampling rate of the samplers is controlled by the 1st LO from the A7 pulse generator assembly The lst LO is a comb of harmonics produced by a step recovery diode driven by the fractional N VCO fundamental signal One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start frequency set at the front panel The Ist LO is combined in the samplers with the source output signal In options 003 and 006 samplers are additionally capable of receiving RF
223. f applicable Press PRESET and verify that good data was transferred to EEPROM by performing a simple measurement 3 40 Adjustments and Correction Constants 13 Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure m In case of difficulty refer to the chapter titled Start Troubleshooting Here Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 41 16 Model Number Correction Constant Option 075 Only Equipment No equipment is required for this adjustment Warmup time 5 minutes Description and Procedure This procedure sets an EEPROM bit for HP 8752C analyzers with Option 075 so that certain system default values will be correct after the A9 CPU assembly firmware is replaced Firmware and A9 CPU assemblies are shipped with the bit set correctly for HP 8752C analyzers without Option 075 Caution After installing new A9 CPU or new firmware but before performing this procedure perform 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure found at the end of this chapter 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Press PRESET 3 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS 1 POKE 1 Ga RESET MEMORY PRESET 4 To verify that the procedure was successful press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION Opt 075 should appear on the display If Opt 075 is not displayed repeat the procedure Contact the nearest HP sales and
224. f your analyzer has Option 006 press 6 S n Press INPUT PORIS B DATA MEMORY DATA MEM Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 7 HP 8752C TERMINATION Cable Type N 24 inch Type N m TERMINATION Type N f xh618 Figure 2 7 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 25 If your analyzer has Option 004 press POWER 8 LIN MAG AUTOSCALE If your analyzer does not have Option 004 installed press POWER 2 0 G1 FORMAT LIN MAG SCALE REF AUTOSCALE 6 Press MKR FCTN MARKER MODE MENU STATS ON MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE 7 When the trace is settled record its mean value as shown on the analyzer display 8 Use the equation Power dBm 20 logio linear magnitude mean value to convert the linear magnitude mean value measured in step 7 to log magnitude Record this calculated value on the Performance Test Record 22 of 28 Note If your analyzer has Option 008 then record the value calculated during the previous step step 8 on the Performance Test Record under section HP 8752C Option 003 ONLY Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Standard Option or 300 kHz to 3 GHz Option 003 with an IF BW of 10 Hz 9 10 11 12 Press AVG IF BW 1 0 i to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz Press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE When the sweep is done r
225. ference Check 2 1 1 ee 7 13 Analog Bus Method 048 7 13 Oscilloscope Method 7 15 100 kHz Pulses 1 e 7 16 PLREF Waveforms 2 2 2 ee ee ee 7 17 REF Signal At ALITPI PINS 7 17 High Band REF Signal 2 2 ee ee eee 7 17 Low Band REF Signal 022 0084 7 18 FN LO at Al2 Check 2 2 ee 7 19 4 MHz Reference Signal 7 20 Contents 9 2ND LO Waveforms o 90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band In Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band A12 Digital Control Signals Check Ll ENREF EC o soi io ie ees BE a ls LHBandLLBlLines 0 048 A18 A14 Fractional N Check 2 0 ee Fractional N Check with Analog Bus 2 2 A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope 2 A14 VCO Exercise 2 ee A14 Divide by N Circuit Check 2 2 2 A14 to A18 Digital Control Signals Check 2 2 HMB Line sD kurre cok ek en ee ee Bache A AT Pulse Generator Check 2 1 1 ee ee AT Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer Rechecking the A13 A14 Fractional N 2428 AT Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope 2 0 All Phase Lock Check 2 2 ee Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG 202 2 Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix 2 Troubl
226. fety Symbols The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument Caution Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Warning Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met 15 4 Safety and Licensing Instrument Markings A The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation CE The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community If accompanied by a year it is when the design was proven ISM1 A This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product CSA The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association Safety and Licensing 15 5 General Safety Considerations Safety Earth Ground Warning This is a Safety Class I product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cor
227. form from Al4J1 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from Al4J1 LO OUT Waveform at Al4J2 2 0 0 020220028248 A14 Generated Digital Control Signals 022 H MB Signal at A14P1 5 Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep Pulse Generator Output 2 a High Quality Comb Tooth at 3 GHz Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE SRC TUNE Mode FM Coil Plot with 3 Point Sweep 02 2 20282 Sample R Input Trace 0 2 08 84 Sample A Input Trace 0 00 0 84 Sample B Input Trace 4 MHz REF Waveform o e o Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger 2nd IF 4 kHz Waveform o e Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short a and Open b Internal Diagnostics Menus ee ee Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU 224 Service Feature Menus o Analog Bus Node l Analog Bus Node 2 uoa o Analog Bus Node 3 s os sa soos odr sau soa n nosos a ua Analog Bus Node 4 e Analog Bus Node 6 e 7 12 7 20 Contents 19 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12
228. from the coupler The problem is most likely a faulty coupler or sampler However the A10 assembly may also be at fault Press MEAS INPUT PORTS and select the input with the bad trace The trace normally has a number of jumps in it due to band switches as shown in Figure 8 1 through Figure 8 3 Each jump should be less than 2 dB O If there are other peaks or holes in the trace the sampler is probably faulty Remove the suspected sampler and exchange it with the known good sampler If the problem disappears replace the suspected sampler O If there is a broadband problem it is probably caused by the coupler m If the level average value of the trace is wrong but the trace is otherwise correct the problem is most likely in the coupler or the A10 assembly Either measure the output of the coupler with a power meter or swap the A10 assembly with another known working A10 assembly m Check directivity source match and crosstalk by performing the system verification procedure described in the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter If any of these fail check the coupler and sampler connections To verify the coupler is faulty remove the sampler that has the bad input and exchange it with the known good sampler If there is no improvement replace the coupler If the problem disappears replace the original sampler If the 2nd LO is good at the sampler mixer the sampler mixer assembly is faulty Otherwise
229. fter Preset 6 7 Identify the Stuck Key a 6 8 Inspect Cables icons Dari a A e te oS 6 10 Test Using a Controller 6 11 Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests 6 11 A19 GSP and A18 Display Troubleshooting 6 13 Measure Display Power Supply Voltages on A19 6 13 Measure Display Power Supply Voltages Entering A19 6 14 Run Display Test 59 e o 6 15 Inspect Ribbon Cable Repeat Display Test59 6 15 Perform Walking One Pattern 6 16 Run display Tests 60 65 6 17 If the Fault is Intermittent 2 0 6 18 Repeat Test Function 2 a a a a a 6 18 HPAB Failures Fog ei a n BOY Gee Bo Behe OO a 6 18 Source Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence 4 7 2 Before You Start Troubleshooting 0 7 2 TONT h At ok oe me ob Boos tk dM Bee Loe ado a A 7 3 1 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 2 7 3 2 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 7 3 3 Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 7 3 Phase Lock Error aoaaa 7 4 Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check 2 2 7 4 A4 Sampler Mixer Check 2 2 1 2 ee 7 6 A3 Source and All Phase Lock Check 2 2 7 8 YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus 2 7 11 YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope 202 2 7 12 A12 Re
230. g or disconnecting assemblies m When extensive disassembly is required refer the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter m Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter to identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter o If the red LED goes out the particular assembly removed or one receiving power from it is faulty If the red LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in Table 5 3 continue with Check the Operating Temperature Table 5 3 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection Assembly Removal or Other Assemblies that Receive To Remove Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly 1 A19 Graphics Processor Disconnect W14 A18 Display 2 A14 Frac N Digital Remove from Card Cage None 3 A9 CPU Remove from Card Cage None 4 A16 Rear Panel Interface Disconnect A16W1 None 5 A2 Front Panel Interface Disconnect W17 A1 Front Panel Keyboard 5 12 Power Supply Troubleshooting Check the Operating Temperature The temperature sensing circuitry inside the A15 preregulator may be shutting down the supply Make sure the temperature of the open air operating environment does not exceed 55 C 131 F and that the analyzer fan is Operating a If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly refer to Fan Troubleshooting at the end of this procedure a If there does not appear to be
231. goe RL aes BAe RM ee EQuipment 2 a a e a a ay a D SEPIPEION 2000 o ase oh a Ge e aa PrOGCOURE ie 2 o o de a odas ia a In case of difficulty 2 aoao a a a 2 2 2 Performance Test Record 1 2 2 a ee e E a 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants When to Perform the Adjustment Procedures Keep Correction Constants Current to Save Time Adjustment Procedure Error Messages 2 2 2 Perform Adjustments in This Order 42 Test Equipment Specifications oa 0 Analyzer Cover Removal 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 2 Contents 4 2 33 2 34 A9 CC Correction Constant Jumper Position 3 5 P oced ren Lal Sy me ae eds Bos ape oe a a a AS 3 5 2 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 3 8 Equipment 2 k a a a e a Brat e ad a a ea 3 8 Warm Up time ssi is Se SR oe e ete a Bee a 3 8 Description and Procedure 2004 3 8 3 Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 3 9 EQUIPpMeNt sze e a Se kee ee de See od 3 9 Warm up time 2 ee 3 9 Description and Procedure 0 000 2 2 084 3 9 4 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 3 10 Equipment aa cc ke cats a a ke Pa ee da E a 3 10 Warm Up LIME 2b Ge td As eee OS 3 10 Description and Procedure 2 004 3 10 5 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 2 2
232. gulator LEDs Remove the analyzer s top cover Inspect the green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator assembly o All green LEDs should be on ci The fan should be audible In case of difficulty refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter Start Troubleshooting Here 4 11 Digital Control Check Observe the Power Up Sequence Switch the analyzer power off then on The following should take place within a few seconds m On the front panel observe the following 1 All six amber LEDs illuminate 2 The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds except the CH 1 LED See Figure 4 4 m The display should come up bright and focused MESSAGES APPEAR IN SEQUENCE INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT PLEASE WAIT SELF TEST PASSED ILLUMINATES DURING AND AFTER PRESET ILLUMINATES 4 SECONDS DURING PRESET PARAMETERS APPEAR AFTER PRESET CH1 RFL log MAG 10dB REF OdB START 300kHz STOP 1 3GHz 3GHz FOR OPTION 003 or 6GHz FOR OPTION 006 qh66c Figure 4 4 Front Panel Power up Sequence 4 12 Start Troubleshooting Here Verify Internal Tests Passed I Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS INTERNAL TESTS EXECUTE TEST The display should indicate TEST O ALL INT PASS a If your display shows the above message go to step 2 Otherwise continue with this step If phase lock error messages are present this test may stop without passing or failing In this case cont
233. h Rebuilt Exchange Assemblies Gather This Information Before Ordering 2 2 Call 800 227 8164 to Order Parts Fast U S only 2 Replaceable Part Listings 2 0 2 2 Major Assemblies 2 6 e Front Panel Assemblies 2 2 1 ee Rear Panel Assemblies 2 2 ee ee Cables Top View o Front Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware Rear Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware Source and Sampler Parts Standard and Option 008 Source and Sampler Parts Option 004 006 2 2 Source and Sampler Parts Options 004 and 008 004 Source and Sampler Parts Option 006 2 2 2 Display Bezel Assembly 2 ee ee ee Chassis Parts e Top View of Attaching Hardware and Post Regulator Fuses Bottom View of Attaching Hardware Right View of Attaching Hardware 2 2 Left View of Attaching Hardware Rear Panel Attaching Hardware 2 Replaceable Labels 2 2 r a Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories eee Abbreviations we e a a A E a E E 3 Contents 14 14 15 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Assembly Replacement Sequence 14 2 Tools Required 14 2 Cover Removal Procedure a a a 14 3 Initial Front Panel Procedure 2 14 4 Initial Rear Panel Procedure a a
234. h on the instrument 3 Prepare to monitor the VCO frequency either by Activating the analog bus and setting the internal counter to the FRACN node or m Connecting an oscilloscope to A14J2 labeled LO OUT and looking for waveforms similar to Figure 7 20 50 000 nsec 0 00000 sec 50 000 nsec Ch 2 100 0 mvolts div Offset 0 000 volts Timebose 10 0 nsec div Delay 0 00000 sec sg613s Figure 7 20 LO OUT Waveform at A14 J2 4 Vary the voltage at A14TP14 from 10 to 5 volts either by Connecting an appropriate external power supply to A14TP14 or m First jumping the 15V internal power supply from A8TP8 to A14TP14 and then jumping the 5 2V supply from A8TP10 to A14TP14 7 28 Source Troubleshooting Confirm that the VCO frequency changes from approximately 30 MHz or less to 60 MHz or more If this procedure produces unexpected results the A14 assembly is faulty If this procedure produces the expected results continue with the A14 Divide by N Circuit Check A14 Divide by N Circuit Check Note The A13 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the A14 assembly on an extender board Ground A14TP14 and confirm as in the A14 VCO Exercise that the VCO oscillates at approximately 50 to 55 MHz Put the analyzer in CW mode to avoid relock transitions and activate the FRACN TUNE service mode 3 Connect an oscilloscope to A14J3 and observe the output
235. he analyzer is just switched on and then change to low speed when the analyzer is cooled Check the Fan Voltages 1 If the fan is dead refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram Figure 5 8 at the end of this chapter The fan is driven by the 18V and 18V supplies coming from the A15 preregulator Neither of these supplies is fused The 18V supply is regulated on A8 in the fan drive block and remains constant at approximately 14 volts It connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 32 of the A8P1 connector The 18V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan depending on airflow and temperature information Its voltage ranges from approximately 1 0 volts to 14 7 volts and connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 31 of the A8P1 connector Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow access to the PC board connector A8P1 Short ASTP3 to Ground 1 If there is no voltage at A8P1 pins 31 and 32 switch off the analyzer Remove A8 from its motherboard connector or extender board but keep the cable A15W1 connected to A8 see Figure 5 5 Connect a jumper wire between A8TP3 and chassis ground Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs a If all the green LEDs on the top edge of AS light except 5VD replace the fan a If other green LEDs on A8 do not light refer to If the Green LEDs On A8 are not All On earlier in this procedure 5 22
236. he correction constants 12 When prompted connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 3 13 Follow the instructions on the screen and press CONTINUE You can reposition the marker as many times as required to achieve the flattest line If there is no appreciable rolloff position the marker at the highest frequency Press SELECT to select the marker position which most effectively flattens the trace m DONE signals the successful conclusion of this routine Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants m Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure m FAIL is best handled by performing this procedure again m In case of continued failure refer to the chapter titled Source Troubleshooting Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 13 6 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 Equipment Required No equipment is required to perform this adjustment Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure This adjustment generates two correction constants which pretune the YIG oscillators to insure proper phase lock 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 2 Press PRESET 3 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 48 xi 4 When the analyzer displays Pretune Cor press EXECUTE TEST Press YES at the query to alter the correction constants and observe the display m P
237. he equipment as shown in Figure 11 3 11 6 Error Terms HP 8752C DIRECT CONNECTION 24 INCH TYPE N RF CABLE sh6133c Figure 11 3 Standard Connections for Isolation Calibration 9 Press ISOL N STD 10 After the beep press DONE RESP ISOL N CAL 11 This completes the full two port correction procedure You can connect and measure your device under test Table 11 1 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests Meaning of first subscript D directivity S source match R reflection tracking X crosstalk L load match T transmission tracking Calibration Calibration Type Test Coefficient Number Response Response 1 port and Isolation 1 En or Er Ex Ep Ep 32 2 Er Er Es 33 3 En 34 NOTES 1 Response and Isolation cal yields Ex or Er if a transmission measurement or Ep or Ep if a reflection measurement Error Terms Error Term Inspection Note If the correction is not active press CORRECTION ON 1 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 52 x1 EXECUTE TEST The analyzer copies the first calibration measurement trace for the selected error term into memory and then displays it Table 11 2 lists the test numbers 2 Press and adjust the scale and reference to study the error term trace 3 Press MKR FCTN and use the marker functions to determine the error term magnitude 4 Compare the displayed measurement trace to the trac
238. he factory since convergence cannot be adjusted in the field 73 74 Test Pat 8 9 Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color convergence linearity alignment and high voltage regulation in the factory only No field adjustments are possible Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 17 75 76 TT 78 79 80 Test Pat 10 Displays an H pattern for checking the focus of the display Under normal conditions this should never need to be adjusted However it is possible to adjust it by accessing the focus control adjustment at the left rear of the display See the Adjustments chapter Test Pat 11 Verifies the functionality of the pixel stretching circuit of the A19 GSP board Under normal conditions this pattern should appear all white If a failure occurs in the pixel stretching circuit the pattern will consist of 16 alternating white and gray vertical stripes Suspect problems with the STRETCH line and LFIRSTPIX Test Pat 12 Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting using an oscilloscope It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32 times across the screen Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 32 ramps instead of one staircase between each horizontal sync pulse This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing circuit of the A19 GSP board Test Pat 13 Displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A19 GSP board to dis
239. he instrument top cover Using an 8 lb inch torque wrench verify that all semi rigid cables connected to the sampler mixer assemblies and the directional coupler are tight In addition tighten any loose screws on the sampler mixer assemblies A4 5 6 and the pulse generator assembly A7 Rerun the test System Verification and Performance Tests 2 35 7 System Trace Noise Specifications Frequency Mode System Trace System Trace Range Noise Noise Magnitude Phase 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Transmission lt 0 006 dB rms lt 0 038 rms 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Reflection lt 0 006 dB rms lt 0 038 rms 300 kHz to 3 GHz Transmission lt 0 006 dB rms lt 0 038 rms 300 kHz to 3 GHz Reflection lt 0 006 dB rms lt 0 038 rms 3 GHz to 6 GHz Transmission lt 0 010 dB rms lt 0 070 rms 3 GHz to 6 GHz Reflection lt 0 010 dB rms lt 0 070 rms 1 At 0 dBm 3 kHz IF BW 2 HP 8752C with Option 003 3 HP 8752C with Option 006 Equipment For analyzers without Option 075 Calibration kit 500 type N 0 0 0 0 cece ence ees HP 85032B Cable 500 type N 24 inch For analyzers with Option 075 Calibration kit 750 type N Cable 750 type N 24 inch Warm up time one hour Description HP P N 8120 4781 E EEAO golem ae ETEO TRENE EET EETA HP 85036B HP P N 8120 2408 This test measures the system trace noise at a designated CW frequency in both the transmission and reflection modes It is performed at the instrument
240. he mains circuits from the main supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply Warning The analyzer s internal battery contains lithium Do not incinerate or puncture this battery Dispose of the discharged battery in a safe manner Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating F 5A 250V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited Safety and Licensing 15 7 Index 1 100 kHz pulses 7 16 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 7 27 1st LO signal at sampler mixer 8 12 2 25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 7 27 2nd IF 4 kHz signal locations 8 12 2nd LO locations 8 13 2ND LO waveforms 7 21 4 4 kHz signal check 8 11 4 MHz reference signal 7 20 4 MHz REF signal check 8 8 5 5V digital supply theory of operation 12 7 6 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from Al4J1 7 27 8 87520 theory of operation 12 1 A A10 assembly signals required 8 9 A10 check by substitution or signal examination 8 8 A10 digital IF 12 29 digital control 12 11 A10 Digital IF 10 36 All input signals 7 37 A11 Input Signals 7 38 All phase lock 10 37 source 12 15 A11 phase lock and A3 source check 7 8 A11 phase lock
241. he protective circuitry for a short time and the supplies are forced on including shorted supplies with a 100 duty cycle Caution Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if A8TP4 SDIS is shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Connect A8TP4 SDIS to chassis ground with a jumper wire 3 Switch on the analyzer and notice the LEDs that are off Immediately remove the jumper wire 4 Refer to the block diagram Figure 5 8 at the end of this chapter and do the following a Notice any additional signals that may connect to any A8 test point that showed a fault in the previous step b Cross reference all assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs went out when A8TP4 SDIS was connected to chassis ground 5 16 Power Supply Troubleshooting C Make a list of these assemblies d Delete the following assemblies from your list as they have already been verified earlier in this section A9 CPU A10 digital IF All phase lock A12 reference A13 fractional N analog A14 fractional N digital A18 display A19 graphics processor 5 Switch off the analyzer 6 Of those assemblies that are left on the list remove or disconnect them from the analyzer one at a time Table 5 4 shows the best order in which to remove them Table 5 4 also lists any associated assemblies that recieve power by the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or
242. htly as its temperature changes This sensor indicates the temperature so that the frequency can be predicted Node 6 Integ ALC leveling integrator output Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN 6 x1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE Node 6 displays the output of the summing circuit in the ALC loop Absolute voltage level variations are normal When node 6 goes above 0 volts the ALC saturation is indicated CH1 AUX Re 548 mu REF 3 U PRm SCALE SAB mun ts diu START 25 8 dBm CW 1 200 000 800 MHz STOP 6 0 dBm sh6120c Figure 10 8 Analog Bus Node 6 10 34 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 7 Log log amplifier output detector Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press ANALOG IN Ga AUTO SCALE E MARKER 2 E Node 7 displays the output of a logger circuit in the ALC loop The trace should be a linear ramp with a slope of 33 mv dB Absolute voltage level variations are normal Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 25 dBm and 0 dBm The proper waveform at node 7 indicates that the circuits in the A3 source ALC loop are normal and the source is leveled CH1 AUS Re 288 mus REF U 2 116 58 mu hp PRm 14 4 dBm MARKER 2 11 144 63 mu 15 4 dBm 14 dBm
243. i a A ee ee a GP Roe Se ae 15 1 Shipment for Service 2 2 1 o 15 3 Safery lt SyMbols cui e a he Pe IA p a a 15 4 Instrument Markings aoao a a a 15 5 General Safety Considerations a e a a 0 0 15 6 Safety Earth Ground ooo a a a ee en 15 6 Contents 15 Before Applying Power a a a ee eee Servicing Index Contents 16 Figures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 Measurement Uncertainty Window 2 5 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Test SOUL a he ce esta te ee sen Re Mate Ge ae ee LN 2 14 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity Test SEU o we ode at gad Ae af peak eh oe ee 2 16 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range Test Setup HP 8752C OptionsO04 sa Gots amp Shae a TAS ol hee ee 4 2 20 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity Test Setup 2 21 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 1 2 25 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 2 2 25 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 1 2 27 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 2 2 27 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 1 2 30 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 2 2 30 Test Port Crosstalk Tes
244. ibration 10 54 Service Key Menus and Error Messages CALIBRATION REQUIRED Error Number A calibration set could not be found that matched the current 63 stimulus state or measurement parameter You will have to perform a new calibration CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED Error Number A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful You must 3 change the position of the jumper on the A9 CPU assembly Refer to the A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter CORRECTION TURNED OFF Error Number Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not 66 match the parameters for the calibration set therefore correction has been turned off The critical instrument state parameters are sweep type start frequency frequency span and number of points CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET Error Number Correction is not valid for your selected measurement 64 parameter Either change the measurement parameters or perform a new calibration DEADLOCK Error Number A fatal firmware error occurred before instrument preset 111 completed Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 55 DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs Error Number The device at the selected address cannot be accessed by the 119 analyzer Verify that the device is switched on and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the device Ensure that the device address recognized by the analyze
245. ifference and enter the result in the Calculated Value column of the Performance Test Record Set the HP 8496A to the next attenuation setting listed in the Performance Test Record On the analyzer press SINGLE Repeat steps 11 to 14 for the remaining attenuation settings listed in the Performance Test Record Note When the HP 8902A displays the RECAL annunciation press CALIBRATE J System Verification and Performance Tests 2 43 In case of difficulty 1 If the test fails at all power levels be sure you followed the recommended attenuator settings as listed in the Performance Test Record Repeat this performance test 2 If the measured values are out of specifications the HP 8902A needs to be recalibrated On the HP 8902A press CLEAR Repeat this performance test Be sure to press when RECAL is shown on the measuring receiver display 3 If this test fails at lower power levels a refer to the Correction Constants and Adjustments chapter i perform the IF Amplifier Correction Constants test ii perform the ADC Offset Correction Constants test iii repeat this performance test b If it still fails i replace the A10 digital IF assembly ii perform the IF Amplifier Correction Constants test iii perform the ADC Offset Correction Constants test iv perform the Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy test v repeat this performance test 2 44 System Verification and
246. ify the faulty group Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to the Replaceable Parts chapter 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to the Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Save Money with Rebuilt Exchange Assemblies Under the rebuilt exchange assembly program certain factory repaired and tested modules assemblies are available on a trade in basis These assemblies cost less than a new assembly and meet all factory specifications required of a new assembly The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt exchange assembly program Figure 13 1 illustrates the module exchange procedure Major Assemblies shows all major assemblies including those that can be replaced on an exchange basis 13 2 Replaceable Parts The module exchange program described here method of keeping your Locate defective module using troubleshooting procedures in this manual Y Is a replacement module on hand is a Hewlett Packard instrument
247. igure 6 8 Pin Locations on Connector of W20 Run display Tests 60 65 l Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU softkey 8 TESTS softkey 1 DISPLAY TESTS softkey 7 60 xi 2 Press EXECUTE TEST softkey 8 If the analyzer passes the test the display will blank and the front panel LEDs will flash once 3 Press and perform display tests 61 through 65 substitute the next test number where was used Watch for the LEDs to go off and the display to blank except for test 65 Test 65 causes the display to dim rather than blank a If any of the display tests fail replace the A19 assembly a If all of the following is true replace the A18 display assembly m CPU test passes the LED test a GSP passes all of the internal display tests 59 through 65 m Power supply checks out m Intensity focus and vertical adjustments fail to produce an acceptable image Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 17 If the Fault is Intermittent Repeat Test Function If the failure is intermittent do the following 1 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS REPEAT ON to activate the repeat function 2 Then press RETURN TESTS 3 Select the desired test and press EXECUTE TEST 4 Press PRESET to stop the function The test repeat function is explained in the Service Key Menus and Error Messages chapter HP IB Failures If you have performed Step 3 Troubleshooting HP IB Systems in the Start Troubleshooting Here
248. il Drive Check with Analog Bus Note If the analog bus is not functional perform the YO Drive Coil Check with Oscilloscope procedure 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON SERVICE MODES SOURCE PLL OFF ANALOG IN Aux Input COUNTER ANALOG BUS 2 Then press 16 Xi FORMAT MORE REAL AUTOSCALE This keystroke sequence lets you check the pretune DAC and the All output to the YO coil drive by monitoring the 1V GHz signal at analog bus node 16 3 Compare the waveform to Figure 7 6 If the waveform is incorrect the All phase lock assembly is faulty CHI AUX Re 548 mus REF 4 U CHL AUX Re 5009 mx REF 4 U hp tp SCALE SCALE SOB mUnfts diju ent 819 MHz Sap mUnj ts diu ont 822 MHz START 388 g MHz STOP 3 600 000 000 MHz START 309 BOB MHz STOP 6 000 009 000 MHz 3 GHz 87520 6 GHz 8752C sh6116c Figure 7 6 1V GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Off Source Troubleshooting 7 11 YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope Note Use the large extender board for easy access to the voltage points The extender board is included with the HP 8758 Tool Kit See the Replaceable Parts chapter for part numbers and ordering information 1 Connect oscilloscope probes to A11P1 1 and A11P1 2 The YO coil drive signal is actually two signals whose vol
249. inearity HP Contents 2 For HP 8752C Analyzers without Option 004 Specifications gt sos s sa s ose pu a Equipment Description e PLOCEULTO tr A A Be ek Sa Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C or an HP 8752C Option 075 2 Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Option OBS ai A toe oO he Be oe yh Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 003 and 075 Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Option OOO se al ie Seeds oO a ee See In case of difficulty 8752C with Option 004 Specifications 20002 EVQuIpMeNnt oli o eo ee de Eo Sek Description e Procedure Power Range for an HP 8752C with Option 004 Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Option 004 or an HP 8752C withOptions 004 and 075 2 13 2 14 2 19 2 19 2 19 2 19 2 20 2 20 2 21 Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 003 and QO4 ne al oh owe En Geordie de Uy dpe oR 2 22 Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 004 and Ti 8 ON A ae CR AL Be hy oh ah te AEE a 2 23 Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 003 004 ALOT De we E hat Beas 2 23 In case of difficulty 2 0 00 2 0 00 2 23 4 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C without Opti
250. ing Connectors Do Do Not Clean and zero the gage before use Use the correct gage type Use correct end of calibration block Gage all connectors before first use Use an out of spec connector Making Comnections Do Do Not Align connectors carefully Make preliminary connection lightly Turn only the connector nut Use a torque wrench for final connect Apply bending force to connection Over tighten preliminary connection Twist or screw any connection Tighten past torque wrench break point 1 6 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Analyzer Options Available Option 003 3 GHz Operation This option extends the maximum source and receiver frequency of the analyzer to 3 GHz Option 004 Step Attenuator This option provides a source output power range from 85 to 10 dBm Option 006 6 GHz Operation This option extends the maximum source and receiver frequency of the analyzer to 6 GHz Option 010 Time Domain This option displays the time domain response of a network by computing the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response It shows the response of a test device as a function of time or distance Displaying the reflection coefficient of a network versus time determines the magnitude and location of each discontinuity Displaying the transmission coefficient of a network versus time determines the characteristics of individual transmission paths Time d
251. inty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 1 3 GHz 15 0 10 0 2 0 06 12 0 7 0 2 0 07 10 0 5 0 2 0 09 8 0 3 0 2 0 06 6 0 1 0 2 0 03 4 0 1 0 2 0 02 2 0 3 0 2 0 01 0 0 5 0 5 0 09 2 0 7 0 5 0 06 4 0 9 0 5 0 03 5 0 10 0 5 0 03 10 0 15 0 5 0 03 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 65 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 17 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 3 GHz 15 0 10 0 2 0 06 12 0 7 0 2 0 07 10 0 5 0 2 0 09 8 0 3 0 2 0 06 6 0 1 0 2 0 03 4 0 1 0 2 0 02 2 0 3 0 2 0 01 0 0 5 0 5 0 09 2 0 7 0 5 0 06 4 0 9 0 5 0 03 5 0 10 0 5 0 03 10 0 15 0 5 0 03 2 66 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 18 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Report Number Serial Number Date gt gt 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Level Linearity HP 8752C with Options 004 and 006 Test
252. inue with the next procedure to check the source a If you have unexpected results or if the analyzer indicates a specific test failure that internal test and possibly others have failed the analyzer reports the first failure detected Refer to the Service Key Menus and Error Messages chapter for internal test information then refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter o If the analyzer indicates failure but does not identify the test press f to search for the failed test For a description of the failed test refer to the Service Key Menus chapter Then refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter Likewise if the response to front panel or HP IB commands is unexpected troubleshoot the digital control group 2 To perform the Analog Bus test press RETURN 19 xi EXECUTE TEST a If this test fails refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter a If this test passes continue with the next procedure to check the source Source Check 1 Check the display for any of the following phase lock error messages m NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL m NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL m PHASE LOCK LOST m PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED If any of these error messages appear refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter Otherwise continue with the next step Start Troubleshooting Here 4 13 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 5 Item 500hmNAs 75 Ohm NAs Pow
253. ion Tracking 0 2 dB 0 3 dB 0 4 dB Crosstalk 100 dB 100 dB 90 dB 1 30 dB 300 kHz to 10 MHz Error Terms 11 9 Error Term Descriptions The error term descriptions in this section include the following information m significance of each error term m typical results following either a reflection 1 port or a response and isolation calibration m guidelines to interpret each error term 11 10 Error Terms Directivity Ep After a Reflection 1 Port Calibration Description Directivity is a measure of any detected power that is reflected when a load is attached to the test port The directivity error of the test port is determined by measuring the reflection of the load during the error correction procedure Significant System Components m load used in the error correction calibration m test port connectors m analyzer s directional coupler Affected Measurements Low reflection device measurements are most affected by directivity errors Highly reflective device measurements will look normal Procedure To view the analyzer s directivity parameters perform a 1 port calibration then press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST 2 x1 Error Terms 11 11 CHL MEM log MAG 5 dB REF 55 dB y ED REFLECTION WEST PORT PRm Cor Dundes Hid La UN 4 i START 300 gga MHz STOP 6 666 986 gga MHz sh6124c Figure 11 4 Typical Ep R
254. is not connected not switched on set too low or if the line fuse has blown The red LED which is off in normal operation lights to indicate a fault in the 5V supply This may be an over under line voltage over line current or overtemperature condition Refer to the troubleshooting chapters for more information Theory of Operation 12 7 AS Post Regulator The A8 post regulator filters and regulates the DC voltages received from the A15 preregulator It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies It distributes regulated constant voltages to the individual assemblies throughout the instrument It includes the overtemperature shutdown circuit the variable fan speed circuit and the air flow detector Nine green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies Refer to the Power Supply Block Diagram located at the end of the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter to see the voltages provided by the A8 post regulator Voltage Indications the Green LEDs The nine green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on in normal operation to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply If they are off or flashing a problem is indicated The troubleshooting procedures later in this chapter detail the steps to trace the cause of the problem Shutdown Circuit The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage or overtemperature It protects
255. is the N 500 default press CAL KIT N S00 RETURN To select the correction type press CALIBRATE MENU REFLECTION 1 PORT Connect a shielded open circuit to the REFLECTION port See Figure 11 1 HP 8752C OPEN SHORT LOAD DIRECT CONNECTION sh6134c Figure 11 1 Standard Connections for One Port Error Correction 11 4 Error Terms To measure the standard press FORWARD OPENS OPEN f When the analyzer is done measuring the standard press DONE OPENS Disconnect the open and connect a short circuit to the REFLECTION port 8 To measure the device press 10 11 FORWARD SHORTS SHORT f After the beep press DONE SHORTS Disconnect the short and connect an impedance matched load to the REFLECTION port To measure the standard press FORWARD LOAD The analyzer underlines the LOAD softkey after it measures the standard To compute the reflection correction coefficients press DONE 1 PORT CAL Error Terms 11 5 Response and Isolation Calibration Procedures E Press MEAS TRANSMISSN 2 Press CAL CAL KIT N 509 RETURN 3 Press CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE amp ISOL N 4 Press RESPONSE 5 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 11 2 HP 8752C 24 INCH TYPE N RF CABLE sh6132c Figure 11 2 Standard Connections for Response Calibration 6 Press THRU T After the beep press DONE RESPONSE 8 Connect t
256. isk into the Analyzer 1 2 3 Set the disk drive to HP IB address 00 and insert the EEPROM Disk Connect the instruments as shown in Figure 3 13 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Install the new A9 assembly Switch on the disk drive and then the analyzer m If the display is dark O Press DISPLAY MORE bottom softkey ADJUST DISPLAY fourth softkey from top Cl INTENSITY top softkey and then turn the RPG knob m If the display is unfocused see 17 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments for more information Note Disregard noisy trace data or error messages that appear on the display at this time Press LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER Press SAVE RECALL SELECT DISK CONFIGURE EXT DISK Set the disk address disk unit number and volume number to 0 Press SAVE RECALL SELECT DISK EXTERNAL DISK Note If the analyzer does not toggle to EXTERNAL DISK switch off the instruments turn on the disk drive and then the analyzer check its HP IB address and cable 10 11 12 Press SAVE RECALL and use the RPG to highlight the file FILE1 on the original EEPROM Calibration Data Disk or file N12345 where N12345 represents the filename of the EEPROM Backup Disk Press RETURN RECALL STATE Perform the serial number service internal test 55 and the option number correction constant routines service internal test 56 i
257. ith PLL DIAG mode CONT indicates that it will continuously cycle through all steps of the phase lock sequence PAUSE holds it at any step of interest This mode is useful for troubleshooting phase locked loop problems Accesses the service modes more menu listed below 10 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Modes More Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR ON off SM6 IF GAIN AUTO IF GAIN ON IF GAIN OFF Toggles the sampler correction routine ON for normal operation or OFF for diagnosis or adjustment purposes Normal operating condition and works in conjunction with IF GAIN ON and OFF The A10 assembly includes a switchable attenuator section and an amplifier that amplifies low level 4 kHz IF signals for A and B inputs only This mode allows the A10 IF section to automatically determine if the attenuator should be switched in or out The switch occurs when the A or B input signal is approximately 30 dBm Locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits regardless of the amplitude of the A or B IF signal Switches out both the A and B attenuation circuits they cannot be switched independently Be aware that input signal levels above 30 dBm at the sampler input will saturate the ADC and cause measurement errors Switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits Smal
258. ition Procedure 2 Note the ten character serial number on the analyzer s rear panel identification label 3 Press PRESET Caution Mistakes cannot be corrected after step 5 is performed 4 Press DISPLAY MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE to erase the HP logo Rotate the RPG knob to position the arrow below each character of the analyzer serial number and press SELECT LETTER to enter each in turn Enter a total of ten characters four digits one letter and five final digits Press BACKSPACE if you made a mistake Press DONE when the title is complete and correct 5 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 65 ai When the display shows Serial Cor press EXECUTE TEST Press YES at the query to alter the correction constant 3 32 Adjustments and Correction Constants 6 If this procedure did not end with DONE aw The serial number entered did not conform to the required format or a a valid serial number was already stored In any case m Confirm that the serial number is correct and m repeat this procedure Contact HP if the procedure still does not end with DONE 7 To check the serial number recognized by the analyzer press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION The analyzer displays the new serial number SER NO If not repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position P
259. ivated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch the power back on 10 58 Service Key Menus and Error Messages OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 4 dBm at the reflection 59 port The RF output power is automatically reduced to 20 dBm The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch the power back on OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 17 dBm at the reflection 57 port The RF output power is automatically reduced to 20 dBm The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch the power back on PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED Error Number An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically 4 executed at power on preset and any time a loss of phase lock is detected This message indicates that phase lock calibration was initiated and the first IF detected but a problem prevented the calibration from completing successfully Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants and execute pretune c
260. k Several digital control signals must be functional for the A12 assembly to operate correctly Check the control lines listed in Table 7 4 with the oscilloscope in the high input impedance setting Table 7 4 A12 Related Digital Control Signals Mnemonic Signal Location See Analyzer Description Figure Setting L ENREF L Reference Enable A12P2 16 Figure 7 15 Preset L HB L High Band A12P2 32 Figure 7 16 Preset L LB L Low Band A12P1 23 Figure 7 16 Preset L ENREF Line This is a TTL signal To observe it trigger on the negative edge In preset state the signal should show activity similar to Figure 7 15 5 00000 usec 10 0000 usec 0 00000 sec Ch 2 2 000 volte div Of feet 000 volte Timebase 1 00 usec div Delay 0 00000 se sg617s Figure 7 15 L ENREF Line at A12P2 16 Preset Source Troubleshooting 7 23 L HB and L LB Lines These complementary signals toggle when the instrument switches from low band to high band as illustrated by Figure 7 16 500 000 meec 0 00000 sec 500 000 msec Ch 1 4 000 volte div Offset 0 000 volte Ch 2 4 000 volte div Offset ny 000 volts Timebose 100 msec div Delay 00000 sec sg618s Figure 7 16 Complementary L HB and L LB Signals Preset If all of the digital signals appeared correct the A12 assembly is faulty A13 A14 Fractional N Check Use the analog bus or an oscilloscope to check the A14 VCO s ability to swe
261. k problem persists the R channel sampler is not the problem Source Troubleshooting 7 7 A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check This procedure checks the source and part of the phase lock assembly It opens the phase locked loop and exercises the source by varying the source output frequency with the A11 pretune DAC Note If the analyzer failed internal test 48 default pretune correction constants were stored which may result in a constant offset of several MHz Regardless continue with this procedure Note Use a spectrum analyzer for problems above 100 MHz 1 Connect the oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 7 1 Set the oscilloscope input impedance to 50 ohms 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU SRC TUNE ON SRC TUNE FREQ to activate the source tune SRC TUNE service mode 3 Use the front panel knob or front panel keys to set the pretune frequency to 300 kHz 30 MHz and 40 MHz Verify the signal frequency on the oscilloscope Note In SRC TUNE mode the source output frequency changes in 1 to 2 MHz increments and should be to 6 MHz above the indicated output frequency A Check for the frequencies indicated by Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode Setting Observed Frequency 300 kHz 1 3 to 6 3 MHz 30 MHz 31 to 36 MHz 40 MHz 41 to 46 MHz 7 8 Source Troubleshooting 5 The signal observed on an oscilloscope should be
262. l input signals will appear noisy and raise the apparent noise floor of the instrument SPUR TEST on OFF SM7 For factory use only Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 23 STORE EEPR on UFF SPUR AVOID ON off SM8 ANALOG BUS on OFF ANAB Allows you to store the correction constants that reside in non volatile memory EEPROM onto a disk Correction constants improve instrument performance by compensating for specific operating variations due to hardware limitations refer to the Adjustments chapter Having this information on disk is useful as a backup in case the constants are lost due to a CPU board failure Without a disk backup the correction constants can be regenerated manually although the procedures are more time consuming Offsets the frequency of both the A3 YIG oscillator and the A3 cavity oscillator to avoid spurs which cannot otherwise be filtered out SPUR AVOID OFF allows examination of these spurs for service enables and disables the analog bus described below Use it with the analog in menu a description of this menu follows 10 24 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Analog Bus To access the analog bus press GYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Description of the Analog Bus The analog bus is a single multiplexed line that networks 31 nodes within the instrument It can be controlled from the front panel or through HP IB to make voltage and frequency measurements just like a v
263. lize EEPROMs Test 58 3 37 Model Number Correction Constant Option 075 Only 3 42 Option Numbers Correction Constant Test 56 3 34 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 3 11 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 55 3 32 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 3 8 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 3 14 Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 3 9 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment 3 58 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments 3 43 pulse generator source 12 14 pulse generator A7 check 7 33 pulses 100 kHz 7 16 R A and B inputs check 8 4 rear panel digital control 12 13 part numbers 13 10 Rear Panel 10 10 rear panel board removal 14 14 rear panel cables 13 16 rear panel hardware 13 16 rear panel LEDs check 4 11 rear panel removal 14 6 rebuilt exchange assemblies 13 2 receiver digital IF 12 29 sampler mixer 12 28 theory of operation 12 4 12 23 receiver failure error messages 8 2 receiver measuring 1 3 receiver troubleshooting chapter 8 1 RECORD ON OFF 10 5 red LED on A15 power supply shutdown 12 7 REF 4 MHz signal check 8 8 reference source 12 14 reference A12 10 44 reference A12 check 7 13 reference frequencies check using analog bus 7 13 reference frequencies check using oscilloscope 7 15 reference signal 4 MHz 7 20 Reflection error correction procedure 11 4 reflection tracking characte
264. lyzer and press PRESET 3 Check for the signals listed in Table 7 8 Source Troubleshooting 7 37 Table 7 8 A11 Input Signals Mnemonic I O Access See Notes Figure FM COIL O A11P1 3 33 Figure 7 27 Aids YO COIL in setting YIG Press PRESET menu NUMBER OF POINTS 8 k1 to observe this signal REF I A11TP9 Figure 7 9 Observe both low band and high band CW frequencies Figure 7 10 YO COIL O A11P1 2 32 Figure 7 7 Use SOURCE PLL OFF YO COIL O A11P1 1 31 Figure 7 7 1ST IF I All PLIF IN Figure 7 26 Check for 1 MHz with tee a A11 jack not at cable end in high band 1 00000 s 500 000 ms 0 00000 s O Al We a S dend Tro y yt r if ft EL O eae 0 01 ae 0 ASA A E e EE Els E E AE 2 000 volts div Offset 0 000 voits Timebose 100 ms div Delay 0 00000 s sg628s Figure 7 27 FM Coil Plot with 3 Point Sweep 4 If any of the input signal is not correct refer to the overall block diagram in the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter as an aid to trouble shooting the problem to its source 5 If any of the output signals are incorrect the A11 assembly is faulty 7 38 Source Troubleshooting Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus The analog bus can perform a variety of fast checks However it too is subject to failure and should be tested prior to use You should have done this in the
265. m Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 300 kHz 20 0 15 0 5 0 13 18 0 13 0 5 0 20 16 0 11 0 5 0 16 14 0 9 0 2 0 14 12 0 7 0 2 0 13 10 0 5 0 2 0 13 8 0 3 0 2 0 20 6 0 1 0 2 0 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 14 2 0 3 0 2 0 13 0 0 5 0 5 0 13 2 0 7 0 5 0 20 4 0 9 0 5 0 16 5 0 10 0 5 0 15 2 56 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 8 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C without Option 004 Test Settings Results Power Power Specification Measurement dBm Measured Offset Level dB Uncertainty dB dB Linearity dB dB CW Frequency 1 3 GHz 20 0 15 0 5 0 23 18 0 13 0 5 0 15 16 0 11 0 5 0 01 14 0 9 0 2 0 06 12 0 7 0 2 0 07 10 0 5 0 2 0 09 8 0 3 0 2 0 06 6 0 1 0 2 0 03 4 0 1 0 2 0 02 2 0 3 0 2 0 01 0 0 5 0 5 0 09 2 0 7 0 5 0 06 4 0 9 0 5 0 03 5 0 10 0 5 0 03 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 57 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 9 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Report Number Seri
266. more assemblies at all times or the other voltages will not be correct It connects to motherboard connector A17J3 Pin 4 5 10 Power Supply Troubleshooting FROM A15 PREREGULATOR 12 110 8 6 4 2 A15W1P1 A8 POSI REGULATOR SOLDER SIDE PLUG IN BACK 12000000 2 11060000808 A15J2 VOLTAGES ALL CABLES AND ASSEMBLIES CONNECTED sh667c Figure 5 6 A15W1 Plug Detail Check for a Faulty Assembly This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the A15 preregulator via one of the following lines also refer to Figure 5 1 m the Al5W1 cable connected to the A8 post regulator m the 5VCPU line through the motherboard m the 5VDIG line through the motherboard Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 11 Do the following 1 2 3 Switch off the analyzer Ensure that Al5W1 is reconnected to A8 refer to Figure 5 5 Remove or disconnect the assemblies listed in Table 5 3 one at a time and in the order shown The assemblies are sorted from most to least accessible Table 5 3 also lists any associated assemblies that receive power from the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15 Note a Always switch off the analyzer before removin
267. move the Rear Panel 1 Perform the Initial Rear Panel Procedure WARNING A CAUTION Figure 14 9 Location of Rear Panel Fasteners sh686c 2 Remove the hex screws item 26 Figure 14 9 from the HP IB connector and the test set interconnect connector 3 Remove the hex nuts and lock washers item 27 from the AUX INPUT EXT AM and EXT TRIGGER BNC connectors 4 Remove the rear panel board assembly 14 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Reverse Removal Procedure to Reinstall Note Torque the hex screws to 4 in Ib maximum After reinstallation refer to Post Repair Procedures at the end of this chapter to ensure that the analyzer operates properly Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 15 A18 Display How to Remove the Display 1 Remove the power cord and the top cover see Cover Removal Procedure ACTIVE CHANNEL
268. n chapter The checks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented If one of the procedures fails it is an indication that the problem is in the functional group checked Go to the troubleshooting information for the indicated group to isolate the problem to the defective assembly Figure 4 2 illustrates the troubleshooting organization TEST PORT FREQUENCY AND POWER DISPLAY FRONT PANEL SELF TEST MEASURED DATA MEASUREMENT ERRORS DIGITAL SOURCE RECEIVER ACCESSORIES POWER SUPPLIES CONTROL ASSEMBLY LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING sg645d Figure 4 2 Troubleshooting Organization 4 10 Start Troubleshooting Here Power Supply Check Check the Rear Panel LEDs Switch on the analyzer Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the A15 preregulator at rear of the analyzer see Figure 4 3 o The upper red LED should be off a The lower green LED should be on IEN ASCAUTION WARNING A CAUTION N 5 A UNE cu o Mon im Red LED Green LED Line Vo age Normally Off Normally On Selector Switch sh665c Figure 4 3 A15 Preregulator LEDs Check the A8 Post Re
269. n DRAM Verifies the A9 CPU main memory DRAM with a non destructive write read test pattern A destructive version is shown in Table 10 2 These tests internal tests 2 through 4 are normally run at preset and power on However a jumper on the A9 CPU assembly illustrated in Figure 10 2 can be set in one of five positions with the following results Table 10 2 Descriptions of Jumper Positions Jumper Position Result Position No ALTER 1 With the jumper in this right position correction constants can be altered updated during adjustment procedures The altered correction constants are stored in EEPROM replacing previously stored correction constants CMOS 2 This destructive version of the CMOS RAM test internal test 3 continuously writes over information stored there DRAM 3 This destructive version of the main DRAM test internal test 4 continuously writes over information stored there SKIP 4 For factory use only NORMAL 5 The left position is the normal operation position 10 8 Service Key Menus and Error Messages HP 8752 ASCPU Assembly RUN 1 24 o000 NRM Norma ALT Alter sh640c Figure 10 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU For additional information see Internal Tests and the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter DSP Wr Rd Verifies the ability of the main processor and the DSP digital signal processor both on the A9 CPU assembly to comm
270. n Kit Default Correction Constants Test 57 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants Test 54 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 37 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Equipment Required Ttem HP Model CS80 disk drive HP 9122 HP IB cable HP 10833A B C D 3 5 inch disk blank disk or supplied EEPROM Calibration Data Disk Warm up time None Description and Procedure ANALYZER FLECTION PORT o sh656c Figure 3 13 EEPROM Backup Procedure Setup A unique EEPROM Calibration Data Disk is shipped from the factory with each analyzer This disk is a record of the calibration constants CCs stored in EEPROM on the A9 CPU assembly It allows you to replace the A9 CPU board assembly without having to rerun all of the correction constant adjustment procedures m Take care of the supplied EEPROM Calibration Data Disk o If you don t have the original make a backup disk and keep it current m Store the correction constant data to the EEPROM Calibration Data Disk each time you perform one or more correction constant routines 3 38 Adjustments and Correction Constants m Retrieve correction constant data from the EEPROM Calibration Data Disk if you need to replace the A9 CPU board assembly How to Make an EEPROM Backup Disk and Store CCs and Data to It 1 2 3 Set the disk drive to HP IB address 00 Inse
271. n LEDs on A8 O If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing it is not likely that any of the assemblies listed above is causing the problem Continue with Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry a If all green LEDs are now on one or more of the above assemblies may be faulty Continue with next step 5 Switch off the analyzer 6 Reconnect W14 and W20 to A19 7 Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs a If the LEDs are off or blinking replace the A19 assembly O If the LEDs are still on continue with next step 8 Switch off the analyzer 9 Reconnect A18W1 to the A19 assembly 10 Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs a If the LEDs are off replace the A18 display a If the LEDs are still on continue with the next step Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 15 11 Switch off the analyzer 12 Reinstall each assembly one at a time Switch on the analyzer after each assembly is installed The assembly that causes the green LEDs to go off or flash could be faulty Note It is possible however that this condition is caused by the A8 post regulator not supplying enough current To check this reinstall the assemblies in a different order to change the loading If the same assembly appears to be faulty replace that assembly If a different assembly appears faulty A8 is most likely faulty unless both of the other assemblies are faulty Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry In this step you shutdown t
272. n procedure is semi automated and controlled by the analyzer s firmware The verification procedure involves measuring a set of calibration devices supplied in the HP 85032B 500 type N calibration kit or the HP 85036B 750 type N calibration kit and comparing the measured data to the specification limits drawn on the analyzer display The measured data must fall within the specification limits at all frequencies to pass the test System verification is only part of an instrument s calibration procedure The complete set of instrument specifications can be tested by performing the HP 8752C System Verification and all of the analyzer s performance tests An HP 85032B Option 002 or an HP 85036B Option 1BP calibration kit including with a Certificate of Calibration with United States National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST test numbers is required for a calibration traceable to NIST Note A Certificate of Calibration is issued if the analyzer s system verification as well as all of the performance tests are performed by a Hewlett Packard Customer Engineer with all having passed System Verification and Performance Tests 2 3 System Verification Cycle and Kit Recertification The recommended system verification cycle is every six months Hewlett Packard also suggests the calibration kit be recertified annually For more information about the kit recertification refer to the HP 85032B 509 Type N Calibration
273. n the analyzer s display A Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 3 36 Adjustments and Correction Constants 14 Initialize EEPROMs Test 58 This service internal test performs the following functions a destroys all correction constants and all un protected options m initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeros m replaces the display intensity correction constants with default values Note This routine well not alter the serial number or Options 003 006 and 010 correction constants 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES 2 To restore the analyzer s error correction constants m If you have the correction constants backed up on a disk refer to the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure If you don t have the correction constants backed up on a disk run all the internal service routines in the following order Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 45 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 Display Intensity Test 49 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 Frequency Response Correction Constants Test 57 then 53 Calibratio
274. nal analog signal input to be applied to the ALC circuitry of the analyzer s source This input analog signal amplitude modulates the RF output signal EXT TRIGGER This allows connection of an external negative TTL compatible signal that will trigger a measurement sweep The trigger can be set to external through softkey functions EXT MON RED GREEN BLUE Although these interfaces are not electrically connected to the A16 rear panel interface board they are connected to the rear panel assembly Three video output connectors provide analog blue green and red video signals which you can use to drive an analog multi syne monitor The monitor must be compatible with the analyzer s 25 5 kHz scan rate and video levels 1 Vp p 0 7 V white O V black 0 3 V sync sync on green Theory of Operation 12 13 Source Theory Overview The source produces a highly stable and accurate RF output signal by phase locking a YIG oscillator to a harmonic of the synthesized VCO voltage controlled oscillator The source output produces a CW or swept signal between 300 kHz and 1 3 GHz 8 GHz for Option 003 and 6 GHz for Option 006 The maximum leveled power is 5 dBm Option 004 analyzers have a 70 dB step attenuator built into the source that allows the power to be decreased to 85 dBm and increased to a maximum leveled power of 10 dBm The full frequency range of the source is produced in 13 subsweeps two in low band and eleven in high band
275. ncy Response Correction 1 Remove all connections to the reflection and transmission ports and press PRESET You should observe a straight line at O dB with a scale of 5 dB DIV 2 Connect a thru between the reflection and transmission ports Press CH 2 The trace observed should be the same as the previous one O If the traces are not as described perform the Frequency Response Correction adjustment in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter O If the traces are still not as described after performing the adjustment replace the A10 assembly Check the 4 kHz Signal l Press CW FREQ 2 Use an oscilloscope to check the 4 kHz output of the sampler mixer in question at the A10 assembly The input and output access pins are listed in Table 8 2 The signal should resemble the waveform of Figure 8 7 a If the signal is good replace the A10 assembly a If the signal is bad continue with Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Receiver Troubleshooting 8 11 Table 8 2 2nd IF 4 kHz Signal Locations Mnemonic Description A10 Location Signal Source IFR 4 kHz A10P1 1 31 A4P1 6 IFA 4 kHz A10P1 4 34 A5P1 6 IFB 4 kHz A10P1 7 37 A6P1 6 500 000 usec 0 00000 sec S00 COO usec Ch 1 1 000 volte div Timebose 100 usec div Vmarkeri 20 00 mvolts Vmorkerz 20 00 mvolts Offset Delay Delta Y Figure 8 7 2nd IF 4 kHz Waveform Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler Mixer
276. ncy Response Correction Constants Tests 57 then 53 Cavity Oscillator Correction Constants Test 54 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 55 Option Number Correction Constant Test 56 Model Number Correction Constant Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Frequency Accuracy Adjustment High Low Band Transition Adjustment Fractional N Spur and FM Sideband Adjustment Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure 3 2 Adjustments and Correction Constants Note If you have replaced the CPU board or if the analyzer has lost all of its correction constants perform the adjustments in the order listed below from top to bottom 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 12 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 455 13 Option Number Correction Constant Test 56 16 Model Number Correction Constant 14 Initialize EEPROMs Test 58 16 Model Number Correction Constant 7 Display Intensity Adjustments Test 49 17 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments 18 Display Degaussing Demagnetizing 2 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 3 Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 4 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 9 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 19 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment 6 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 20 Frequency
277. nel Probe Power Connector Voltages oO If the correct voltages are present troubleshoot the probe o If the voltages are not present check the 15V and 12 6V green LEDs on A8 m If the LEDs are on there is an open between the A8 assembly and the front panel probe power connectors Put A8 onto an extender board and measure the voltages at the following pins A8P2 pins 6 and 36 12 6 volts A8P2 pins 4 and 34 15 volts m If the LEDs are off continue with Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 5 20 Power Supply Troubleshooting Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 1 Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the A8 test points If these fuses keep burning out a short exists 2 Try isolating A8 by removing it from the motherboard connector but keeping the cable A15W1 connected to A8J2 3 Connect a jumper wire from A8TP2 to chassis ground a If either the 15V or 12 6V fuse blows or the associated green LEDs do not light replace A8 a If the 15V and 12 6V green LEDs light troubleshoot for a short between the motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 6 and 36 12 6V and the front panel probe power connectors Also check between motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 4 and 34 15V and the front panel probe power connectors Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 21 Fan Troubleshooting Fan Speeds The fan speed varies depending upon temperature It is normal for the fan to be at high speed when t
278. nexpected results refer to the Receiver Troubleshooting chapter CH1 TRN log MAG 5 dE REF B dE 1 0172 dB te 3 aun haa ada MHz START 300 608 MHz STOP 6 490 000 aaa MHz sh6100 Figure 4 6 Typical Measurement Trace Accessories Check If the analyzer has passed all of the above checks but is still making incorrect measurements an accessory could be faulty RF cables interconnect cables and calibration kit devices can all induce system problems Reconfigure the system to its normal state and reconfirm the problem If the problem persists refer to the Accessories Troubleshooting chapter Start Troubleshooting Here 4 15 4 16 Start Troubleshooting Here HP 8752 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM am arm AT Ss AVE FRACTIONAL N DIGITAL i REAR PAREL T AZ FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR are mi ical PREC w mA SAMPLER MIXER arya ATTENUATOR aio DIGITAL ir AB POST REGULATOR ERN MIXER r a Aig GSP E ER 80 Aa oT mma A18 DISPLAY 2nd LO W5 15T LO FROM A7
279. ng in the Results Measured column on the Performance Test Record Utilizing the Power Offset value listed in the Performance Test Record calculate the test port output power level linearity using the following formula Power Level Linearity Measured Value Power Offset 7 Record the result of your calculation on the Performance Test Record 8 Repeat steps 5 6 and 7 for the other power levels listed in the HP 8752C 11 12 Performance Test Record 7 of 28 Press MENU CW FREQ 1 OG G n 10 Press POWER 2 5 i Set the power meter cal factor for this CW frequency Press the appropriate hardkey dB REF or REL on the HP 436A 438A power meter front panel for relative power measurements Repeat steps 5 6 and 7 for the other power levels listed in the HP 8752C Performance Test Record 8 of 28 This completes the Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity test if you are working with either a standard analyzer or an analyzer with only Option 075 Otherwise go to the appropriate section below to continue the reflection test port performance tests for other options Power Range and Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Option 003 13 14 15 Press MENU CW FREQ 5 G n Press POWER 2 5 1 Set the power meter cal factor for this CW frequency Press the appropriate softkey dB REF or REL on the power meter front panel
280. ns 2 3 52 3 21 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 3 55 3 22 Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments 2 3 56 3 23 A11 Test Point and A3 CAV ADJ Locations 2 3 58 3 24 Display of Acceptable Versus Excessive Spikes 3 59 4 1 LED Power up Sequence 4 3 4 2 Troubleshooting Organization 0 484 4 10 4 3 A15 Preregulator LEDs 2 2 een 4 11 4 4 Front Panel Power up Sequence 00 4 12 4 5 Equipment Setup for Source Power Check 02 4 14 4 6 Typical Measurement Trace 4 15 4 7 HP 8752C Overall Block Diagram 1 of 4 4 17 5 1 Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram 5 3 5 2 Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDS a a a 5 4 5 3 A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations 2 2 5 5 5 4 Removing the Line Fuse 5 7 5 5 Power Supply Cable Locations 02422 5 9 5 6 A15W1 Plug Detail 2 ee 5 11 5 7 Front Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages 2 5 20 5 8 Power Supply Block Diagram 2 a 5 25 6 1 Digital Control Group Block Diagram 2 2 2 2 6 3 6 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU 42 6 4 6 3 Location of Four LEDs on A9 CPU 1 aaa 6 5 6 4 Preset Sequence mos Se we a isat 6 8 6 5 Pin Locations on AI9J5 2 1 ee 6 13 6 6 Pin Locations on Connector of W14 2 2 20202424 6 14 6 7 A9 CPU Walking On
281. ntheses following the key See HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions at the end of this section Error Messages The displayed messages that pertain to service functions are also listed in this chapter to help you Understand the message m Solve the problem Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 1 Service Key Menus Internal Diagnostics The internal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10 1 and described in the following paragraphs The following keys access the internal diagnostics menus TESTS E TEST OPTIONS E SELF DIAGNOSE TESTS MENU EXECUTE SYSTEM TEST OFFSET TABLE EDIT UST EDIT SENSOR Pata WENO INTERNAL penu ONS MENU MENU MENU TESTS CONT NUE USE SENSOR TESTS gt EXTERNAL TEST ce SEGMENT FREQUENCY TEST Yaad REPEAT CAL OPTIONS SYS VER on OFF FACTOR TESTS RECORD CAL_FACTOR WEN DIAGNOSE ADJUSTMENT on OFF SENSOR AJ EDIT TESTS TRANSFORM SERVICE LIMITS CAL FACTOR qna DELETE MENU MODES DISEZAX ENORM SENSOR B ANALOG BUS PWR LOSS pon on OFF RETURN on OFF PDD PEEK LOSS SENSR pal POWER CLEAR POKE LISTS LOSS UST FIRMWARE REVISION MENU a RETURN RETURN RETURN DONE DONE sh61380 e Figure 10 1 Internal Diagnostics Menus Note Throughout this service guide these conventions are observed O HARDKEYS are labeled front panel keys SOFTKEYS are display defined keys in the menus a HP IB COMMANDS when appli
282. nts primarily where the measured signal level is very low are affected by isolation errors For example transmission measurements where the insertion loss of the device under test is large Procedure To view the analyzer s isolation parameters perform a response and isolation calibration then press SERVICE MENU TEST a4 x1 Error Terms 11 17 CHZ MEM log MAG 5 dB REF 115 dB 1 98 924 dB EX ip Hz TF BW 3 486 26 ada mhz x je START 304 ga MHz STOP 6 400 000 gaa MHz sh6127c Figure 11 7 Typical Ex with 10 Hz Bandwidth CHe MEM log MAG 5 dB REF 98 dB 1 75 389 dB Ex 3 KHZ TF BW 5 940 has pda MHz i ha mt l 4 E ja PRm Cor Hid START 300 0089 MHz STOP 6 009 000 000 MHz sh6128c Figure 11 8 Typical Ex with 3 kHz Bandwidth 11 18 Error Terms Transmission Tracking Er Description Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path including R input and the transmission test path including A input while measuring transmission The response of the te
283. nty MHz 0 3 0 299 997 0 300 003 0 000 000 360 5 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 000 006 16 0 15 999 840 16 000 160 0 000 019 31 0 30 999 690 31 000 310 0 000 037 60 999 999 60 999 390 61 000 610 0 000 073 121 0 120 998 790 121 001 210 0 000 145 180 0 179 998 200 180 001 800 0 000 216 310 0 309 995 900 310 003 100 0 000 372 700 0 699 930 000 700 007 000 0 000 840 1 300 0 1 299 987 000 1 300 013 0 001 560 2 000 0 1 999 980 000 2 000 020 000 0 002 400 3 000 0 2 999 970 000 3 000 030 000 0 003 600 4 000 0 3 999 960 4 000 040 0 004 800 5 000 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 006 000 6 000 0 5 999 940 6 000 060 0 007 200 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 53 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 5 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Report Number Serial Number Date gt gt 1 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy HP 8752C Option 075 CW Frequencies Min Results Measured Max Measurement MHz MHz MHz MHz Uncertainty MHz 0 3 0 299 997 0 300 003 0 000 000 360 5 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 000 006 16 0 15 999 840 16 000 160 0 000 019 31 0 30 999 690 31 000 310 0 000 037 60 999 999 60 999 390 61 000 610 0 000 073 121 0 120 998 790 121 001 210 0 000 145 180 0 179 998 200 180 001 800 0 000 216 310 0 309 995 900 310 003 100 0 000 372 700 0 699 930
284. o l ROM RAM Cul RA TIMING I 4 A AE Et CONTROL t i 32712 ANALOG w l DIGITAL SIGNAL pat BUS pe PROCESSOR i INSTRUMENT 1 2 SAMPLE MAIN RAM NODES RATE IS RON RRT pt 15kHz IF R 4khz T i CONTROL REFRESH 1 1 bin E l ADC Va IF A ake H m ae Aee RED LEDS o 31 43 T 1 4 ae a5 BA ZS 1 7 IF B 4kHz H 7 ame ae ae y A PR A18 DISPLAY aew i i SUPPLY VOLTAGE l 957 8 G O 5 a A l ae oe a ae s ze LI wo DIGITAL VIDEO VIDEO S INTERFACE TA PALETTE El l FED am W21 MEMORY GREENS w22 TO REAR l BLUE yng PANE l sh6101e Figure 12 3 Digital Control Group Block Diagram Al Front Panel Keyboard The Al front panel keyboard assembly provides user interface with the analyzer It includes the keyboard for local user inputs and the front panel LEDs that indicate instrument status The RPG rotary pulse generator is not electrically connected to the Al front panel keyboard but provides user inputs directly to the front panel processor 12 10 Theory of Operation A2 Front Panel Processor The A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front panel keys and RPG knob and transmits them to the CPU It has the capability to interrupt the CPU to provide information updates It also controls the front panel LEDs that provide status information to the user A9 CPU A10 Digital IF The A9 CPU assembly contains the main CPU central processing unit
285. of a FAIL message for tests 2 through 20 See Table 6 3 for further troubleshooting information Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 11 Table 6 3 Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary Test Sequence Probable Failed Assemblies Comments and Troubleshooting Hints 0 All Int Executes tests 3 11 13 16 20 1 Preset Executes tests 2 11 14 16 Runs at power on or preset 2 ROM P AI A9 Repeats on fail refer to Check A9 CPU Operation in this chapter to replace ROM or A9 3 CMOS RAM P AI A9 Replace A9 4 Main DRAM P AI A9 Repeats on fail replace A9 5 DSP Wr Rd P AI A9 Replace A9 6 DSP RAM P AI A9 Replace A9 7 DSP ALU P AI A9 Replace A9 8 DSP Intrpt P AI A9 A10 Remove A10 rerun test If fail replace A9 If pass replace A10 9 DIF Control P AI A9 A10 Most likely A9 assembly 10 DIF Counter P AI A10 A9 A12 Check analog bus node 17 for 1 MHz If correct A12 is verified suspect A10 11 DSP Control P AI A10 A9 Most likely A10 12 Fr Pan Wr Rd A2 A1 A9 Run test 23 If fail replace A2 If pass problem is on bus between A9 and A2 or on A9 assembly 13 Rear Panel AI A16 A9 Disconnect A16 and check A9J2 pin 48 for 4 MHz clock signal If OK replace A16 If not replace A9 14 Post reg P AI A15 A8 Destination assembly Refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter 15 Frac N Cont P AI A14 Replace A14 16 Sweep Trig P AI A14 A10 Most likely A14 17 ADC Lin A10 Repl
286. of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the rear panel control elements It tests the A16 rear panel and A9 CPU data buffering and address decoding It does not test the HP IB interface for that see the HP 8752C Network Analyzer Programmer s Guide This runs only when selected or with ALL INTERNAL internal test 10 Post Reg Polls the status register of the A8 post regulator and flags these conditions heat sink too hot inadequate air flow or post regulated supply shutdown Frac N Cont Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the control element on the A14 fractional N digital assembly The control element must be functioning and the fractional N VCO must be oscillating although not necessarily phase locked to pass Sweep Trig Tests the sweep trigger L SWP line from the Al4 fractional N to the A10 digital IF The receiver with the sweep synchronizes L SWP ADC Lin It tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the built in ramp generator The test generates a histogram of the ADC linearity where each data point represents the relative width of a particular ADC code Ideally all codes have the same width different widths correspond to non linearities 10 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 18 19 20 ADC Ofs This runs only when selected It tests the ability of the offset DAC on the A10 digital IF to apply a bias offset to the IF signals before the ADC input
287. oltmeter oscilloscope or frequency counter The next few paragraphs provide general information about the structure and operation of the analog bus See Analog Bus Nodes below for a description of each individual node Refer to the Overall Block Diagram in the Start Troubleshooting chapter to see where the nodes are located in the instrument The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section The source can be the following m any one of the 31 nodes described in Analog Bus Nodes m the Al4 fractional N VCO m the Al4 fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz The receiver portion can be the following m the main ADC m the frequency counter When analog bus traces are displayed frequency is the x axis For a linear x axis in time switch to CW time mode or sweep a single band The Main ADC The main ADC is located on the A10 digital IF assembly and makes voltage measurements in two ranges See RESOLUTION under Analog In Menu The Frequency Counter The frequency counter is located on the A14 assembly and can count one of three sources m selected analog bus node m Al4 fractional N VCO FRAC N m Al4 fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz DIV FRAC N frequency range is 100 kHz to 16 MHz Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 25 The counts are triggered by the phase lock cycle one at each pretune acquire and track for each bandswitch The service mode SOURCE P
288. omain operation retains all accuracy inherent with the correction that is active in such devices as SAW filters SAW delay lines RF cables and RF antennas Option 075 750 Impedance This option offers 750 impedance bridges with type N test port connectors Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument with handles detached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 7 Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches spacing Option AFN add 500 Test Port Cable This option provides a second type N male to type N male test port cable and a type N female to type N female adapter Instructions are included for storing a new internal calibration to account for the effects of this cable Option AFP add 750 Test Port Cable This option provides a 750 type N male to type N female test port cable Instructions are included for storing a new internal calibration to account for the effects of this cable Option B02 External Disk Drive This option provides an external disk drive and an HP IB cable 1 8 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Service and Support Options He
289. on Crosstalk Ex After a Response and Isolation Transmission Calibration 2 2 ee DESCTIDCION 2210 sale sce a Fe ce ie a AR ec BP d Significant System Components 0 0 Affected Measurements 2 ee eee a Procedure ses ie ar Geen Be Ae Be Se OE o da de Transmission Tracking Ey a 2 1 a a DeSeriptions maci 2 kode ee oe FR ese AA a Significant System Components 0 0 Affected Measurements 2 2 ee ee ee a Procedure 1 io kee ao ck a A a e re g p a Contents 12 12 Theory of Operation How the HP 8752C Works a 2 ee 12 2 The Built In Synthesized Source 1 ee 12 3 The Source Step Attenuator Option 004 2 2 12 3 The Built In Transmission Reflection Test Set 2 2 2 2 2 12 4 The Receiver Block 2 2 a ey a e a 12 4 The Microprocessor 2 0 ee ee ee e 12 4 A Close Look at the Analyzer s Functional Groups 12 5 Power Supply Theory 00 2 0 008 2 12 6 Alb Preregulator aa a a ee a ee oe i 12 6 Line Power Module 2 00884 12 7 Preregulated Voltages 12 7 Regulated 5V Digital Supply 12 7 Shutdown Indications the Green LED and Red LED 12 7 A8 Post Regulator e 12 8 Voltage Indications the Green LEDs 202 12 8 Shutdown Circuit 12 8 Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector 12 8 Display POWT so de
290. on 075 o o 2 24 SPeCCHICALIONS Yves GE GOS 2 24 Equipment atom a ten a Ae as dd ek a a 2 24 DeSeriptiOn ss Aray Se ec a e Bode Bh MI 2 24 Proced ra Ge ve 82g oe BOM Ge ee ee Ga 2 24 Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Standard Option 300 kHz to 3 GHz Option 003 or 300 kHz to 6 GHz Option 006 with an IF BW of 3 kHz 2 24 Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Standard Option or 300 kHz to 3 GHz Option 003 with an IF BW of 10 Hz 2 26 Noise Floor Level at 3 GHz to 6 GHz Option 006 with an IF BWOPETOH Z ai es i ae a Ae ee Me SP te DE 2 27 Noise Floor Level at 3 GHz to 6 GHz Option 006 with IF BW of TA Ae ee hci O BACs we eee 2 28 In case of difficulty 2 0 00 2 0 00 2 28 5 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C with Option 075 2 ee ee 2 29 Specifications 2 2 a a a a e a E a a 2 29 Equipment a 6 22 sagen a a A Gee RN s 2 29 Description e soar eee a GRO a ea S 2 29 Proceduro Aa te araia gI dr al bee Ste pidea de ee Me SS 2 29 Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Option 075 or 300 kHz to3 GHz Options 075 and 003 with an IF BW of 3 kHz 2 29 Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Option 075 or 300 kHz to3 GHz Options 075 and 003 with an IF BW of 10 Hz 2 31 In case of difficulty e a E 2 0000 2 31 6 Test Port Crosstalk a ao a a a 2 32 Specifications se dae g e a an BOE EE IA 2 32 EQUIPMeNE 2
291. on of the external power loss data table that corrects coupled arm power loss when a directional coupler samples the RF output Edit List Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS SENSR LISTS and then press one of the following CAL FACTOR SENSOR A or CAL FACTOR SENSOR B or POWER LOSS SEGMENT EDIT SEDI D DELETE SDEL ADD SADD CLEAR LIST CLEL DONE EDITDONE selects a segment frequency point to be edited deleted from or added to the current data table Works with the entry controls allows modification of frequency cal factor or loss values previously entered in the current data table deletes frequency cal factor or loss values previously entered in the current data table adds new frequency cal factor or loss values to the current data table up to a maximum of 12 segments frequency points deletes the entire current data table or list when YES is pressed Press NO to avoid deletion returns to the previous menu 10 6 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Self Diagnose Softkey You can access the self diagnosis function by pressing SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SELF DIAGNOSE This function examines in order the pass fail status of all internal tests and displays NO FAIL FOUND if no tests have failed If a failure is detected the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most probably faulty and assigns a failure probability factor to each assembly Test Descri
292. on test port input noise floor level option 075 2 29 peripheral HP IB addresses 4 7 peripheral troubleshooting 4 9 phase lock 10 87 source 12 15 phase lock A11 check 7 37 phase lock and A3 source check 7 8 PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 7 4 7 39 10 59 phase locked output compared to open loop in SRC tune mode 7 9 phase lock error 7 4 phase lock error messages 7 39 PHASE LOCK LOST 7 4 7 39 10 60 photometer probe 1 3 pin locations on A19 6 17 PLL AUTO ON OFF 10 21 PLL DIAG ON OFF 10 21 PLL PAUSE 10 22 plotter HP IB address 4 7 plotter or printer check 4 8 PLREF waveforms 7 17 POKE 10 50 Port 1 Op Chk 10 12 Port 2 Op Chk 10 12 POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 10 60 Post Reg 10 10 post regulator air flow detector 12 8 display power 12 9 green LEDs 12 8 probe power 12 9 shutdown circuit 12 8 theory of operation 12 8 variable fan circuit 12 8 post regulator fuses part numbers 13 30 post regulator test point locations 5 5 post repair procedures 14 22 power from source 7 3 POWER LOSS 10 5 10 6 power meter HP IB 1 3 power meter HP IB address 4 7 power problems broadband 7 40 power sensor 1 3 power splitter 1 3 power supply theory of operation 12 6 power supply block diagram 5 24 power supply cable location 5 8 power supply check 4 11 power supply functional group block diagram 5 3 POWER SUPPLY HOT 10 61 power supply on A19 6 13 power supply shutdown A15 green LED 12 7 A15 red LED
293. onents m open calibration kit device m short calibration kit device a R or A signal path for large variation in Er Affected Measurements All reflection measurements high or low return loss are affected by the reflection tracking errors Procedure To view the analyzer s reflection tracking parameters perform a 1 port calibration then press SERVICE MENU TEST a4 x1 Error Terms 11 15 CH1 MEM log MAG 1 dB REF 1 dB ER REFLECTION TEST PPRT PRm Cor ie id A m Publ START 300 096 MHz STOP 6 608 488 ggg MHz sh6126c Figure 11 6 Typical Ep Reflection Test Port 11 16 Error Terms Isolation Crosstalk Ex After a Response and Isolation Transmission Calibration Description Isolation is a measure of the leakage between the test ports and the signal paths The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission with loads attached to both ports during the error correction procedure Since these terms are low in magnitude they are usually noisy not very repeatable The error term magnitude changes dramatically with IF bandwidth a 10 Hz IF bandwidth must be used in order to lower the noise floor beyond the crosstalk specification Using averaging will also reduce the peak to peak noise in this error term Significant System Components m sampler crosstalks Affected Measurements Transmission measureme
294. ont panel 6 7 HP IB systems 4 7 one or more inputs look good 8 11 phase lock error 7 4 plotters or printers 4 8 receiver 8 1 self test 4 3 source 7 1 systems with controllers 4 9 systems with multiple peripherals 4 9 when all inputs look bad 8 7 YO coil drive check with analog bus 7 11 troubleshooting power supply 5 1 troubleshooting source group appendix 7 39 U uncertainty measurement 2 4 measurement window 2 4 uncorrected performance 11 9 USE SENSOR A B 10 6 V variable fan circuit 12 8 VCO A14 exercise 7 28 VCO range check frequencies 7 24 verification kit 7 mm 1 3 verify calibration kit devices 9 4 vertical position and focus adjustments 3 43 voltage indications post regulator 12 8 voltages A15 preregulator check 5 9 A19 GSP 6 14 A8 5 14 display power supply 6 13 fan 5 22 front panel probe power 5 19 YO and YO coil drive voltage differences with amp SOURCE PLL OFF 7 13 voltages for post regulator 5 5 voltmeter 1 3 VRAM bank 10 16 VRAM video 10 16 W walking one pattern 6 16 Index 21 waveform integrity in SRC tune mode Y 7 9 YO coil drive check with analog bus wrist strap and cord antistatic 1 3 7 11 DISK 10 63 differences with amp SOURCE PLL OFF 7 13 Index 22
295. or terms look like we can examine error terms to monitor system performance preventive maintenance or to identify faulty components in the system troubleshooting m Preventive Maintenance A stable repeatable system should generate repeatable error terms over long time intervals for example six months If you make a hardcopy record print or plot of the error terms you can periodically compare current error terms with the record A sudden shift in the values of the error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting A long term trend often reflects drift connector and cable wear or gradual degradation indicating the need for further investigation and preventive maintenance Yet the system may still conform to specifications The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors or inspecting cables Troubleshooting If a subtle failure or mild performance problem is suspected the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously with the same instrument and calibration kit This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem However if previously generated values are not available compare the current values to the typical values listed in Table 11 2 and shown graphically on the plots in this chapter If the magnitude exceeds its limit inspect the corresponding system component which may ultimately need replacing
296. ord 22 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 4 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C without Option 075 Frequency Range IF BW Specification Calculated Measurement dBm Value Uncertainty dB HP 8752C Standard ONLY 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A HP 8752C Option 003 ONLY 300 kHz to 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A 300 kHz to 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A HP 8752C Option 006 ONLY 3 GHz to 6 GHz 3 kHz 85 N A 3 GHz to 6 GHz 10 Hz 105 N A System Verification and Performance Tests 2 71 HP 8752C Performance Test Record 23 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 5 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C with Option 075 Frequency Range IF BW Spec Calculated Measurement dBm Value Uncertainty dB 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A HP 8752C Options 075 and 003 ONLY 300 kHz to 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A 300 kHz to 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A 2 72 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C Performance Test Record 24 of 28 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8752C Serial Number Report Number Date gt gt 6 Test Port Crosstalk HP 8752C All Options Frequency Range Specification
297. ormation supersedes all prior HP contact information Online assistance www agilent com find assist Americas Brazil tel 55 11 3351 7012 fax 55 11 3351 7024 Canada tel 1 877 894 4414 fax 1 303 662 3369 Mexico tel 1 800 254 2440 fax 1 800 254 4222 United States tel 800 829 4444 alt 1 303 662 3998 fax 800 829 4433 Asia Pacific and Japan Australia tel 1 800 225 574 fax 1 800 681 776 fax 1 800 225 539 China tel 800 810 0508 alt 800 810 0510 fax 800 810 0507 fax 800 810 0362 Hong Kong tel 800 933 229 fax 800 900 701 India tel 1600 112 626 fax 1600 112 727 fax 1600 113 040 Japan Bench Japan On Site Singapore South Korea tel 0120 32 0119 tel 0120 802 363 tel 1 800 275 0880 tel 080 778 0011 alt 81 426 56 7799 alt 81 426 56 7498 fax 65 6755 1235 fax 080 778 0013 fax 0120 01 2144 fax 81 426 60 8953 fax 65 6755 1214 Taiwan Thailand Malaysia tel 0800 047 669 tel 1 800 2758 5822 tel 1800 880 399 fax 0800 047 667 alt 66 2267 5913 fax 1800 801 054 fax 886 3492 0779 fax 1 800 656 336 Europe Austria Belgium Denmark Finland tel 0820 87 44 11 tel 32 0 2 404 9340 tel 45 7013 1515 tel 358 10 855 2100 fax 0820 87 44 22 alt 32 0 2 404 9000 alt 45 7013 7313 fax 358 0 10 855 2923 fax 32 0 2 404 9395 fax 45 7013 1555 France Germany Ireland
298. orrection test 48 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 59 PHASE LOCK LOST Error Number Phase lock was acquired but then lost Refer to the Source 8 Troubleshooting chapter POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK Error Number Phase lock has been achieved but the source may be phase 6 locked to the wrong harmonic of the synthesizer Perform the source pretune correction routine documented in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter POWER UNLEVELED Error Number There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have 179 attempted to set the power level too high Check to see if the power level you set is within specifications If it is refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter You will only receive this message over the HP IB On the analyzer P is displayed POW MET INVALID Error Number The power meter indicates an out of range condition Check the 116 test setup POW MET NOT SETTLED Error Number Sequential power meter readings are not consistent Verify that 118 the equipment is set up correctly If so preset the instrument and restart the operation 10 60 Service Key Menus and Error Messages POW MET not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify 117 that the power meter address and model number set in the analyzer match the address and model number of the actual power meter POWER SUPPLY HOT Error Number The
299. ory use only 26 Source Ex Factory use only 10 12 Service Key Menus and Error Messages System Verification Tests These tests apply mainly to system level error corrected verification and troubleshooting Test 27 is associated with the system verification procedure documented in the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Tests 32 to 34 facilitate examining the calibration coefficient arrays error terms resulting from a measurement calibration refer to the Error Terms chapter for details 27 Sys Ver Init Runs a series of measurements on devices contained in the HP 85032B 500 Type N Calibration Kit for the HP 8752C or the HP 85036B 750 Type N Calibration Kit for the HP 8752C Option 075 28 31 Not used 32 34 Cal Coef 1 12 Copies error term data from a measurement calibration array to display memory A measurement calibration must be complete and active The definition of calibration arrays depends on the current calibration type After execution the memory is automatically displayed Refer to the Error Term chapter for details Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 13 Adjustment Tests The tests without asterisks are used in the procedures located in the Adjustments chapter of this manual except as noted 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Source Def Writes default correction constants for rudimentary source power accuracy Use this test before running tes
300. our Analyzer Sections in this Chapter e HP 8752C System Verification Equipment oei e keh e eh a te we eds a eS Description 2 1 A a I anA A ja System Verification Cycle and Kit Recertification Measurement Uncertainty 2 28 Measurement Uncertainty Window 2 HP 8752C Type N Test Port Characteristics 500 System DirEGtivitye ee she A A de ON De ace ES Source Match Reflection 20 Source Match Transmission 4 Reflection Tracking 1 2 ee ee o Edad Mate oe eo alee en E ee Bee Transmission Tracking 2 ee ee o KRU do coc Roe YAHDABDAS NNNNNNNNNNNNYNNLD Contents 1 HP 8752C Type N Test Port Characteristics 750 System Directivity Source Match Reflection 2 Source Match Transmission Reflection Tracking Load Match 0 4 Transmission Tracking System Verification Procedure In case of difficulty 2 22 HP 8752C Performance Tests 2 Equipment Required to Run the Performance Tests Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy 1 Specifications 2 0 0002 Equipment 0 8 Description 0 eee PROCEdUEEG 4s Sy a p ae a ae Se Re es In case of difficulty 2 2 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level L
301. p Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer s instructions The analyzer display should have an all white screen 9 Center the photometer on the analyzer s display as shown in Figure 3 4 Adjust the analyzer s RPG knob to the maximum clockwise position If the photometer registers greater than 150 NITs turn the RPG knob until a reading of no more than 150 NIT registers on the photometer without the bezel 90 NITS with the bezel If the photometer registers a reading of less than 150 NITs and greater than 100 NITs proceed to the next step If the photometer registers a reading of less than 100 NITs the display is faulty Note The above intensity levels are read without a display bezel installed The glass filter transmits 60 of the display light therefore 150 NITS would be 90 NITs with the bezel installed Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 17 Operating Default Intensity Adjustment This adjustment sets the display s default intensity level The analyzer normally presets to the same intensity level that was last used This level is stored in volatile memory If the memory is lost the analyzer will use the default display intensity to ensure that the display is visible and to eliminate concern that the display may not be functioning 10 Press the top softkey on the analyzer to bring up the next display adjustment mode 11 Center the photometer on the analyzer s display as shown in Figure 3 4 Adjust the
302. play 15 colors plus white The numbers written below each bar indicate the tint number used to produce that bar 0 amp 100 pure red 33 pure green 67 pure blue Test Pat 14 Displays a character set for showing the user all the different types and sizes of characters available Three sets of characters are drawn in each of the three character sizes 125 characters of each size are displayed Characters 0 and 3 cannot be drawn and several others are really control characters such as carriage return and line feed Test Pat 15 Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the display It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes Each stripe should be clearly visible A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together This adjustment can be performed in the factory only 10 18 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus Service Features The service feature menus are shown in Figure 10 3 and described in the following paragraphs The following keys access the service feature menus m SERVICE MODES m ANALOG BUS on OFF E PEEK POKE E FIRMWARE REVISION SYSTEM SYSTEM MENU SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MENU LIMIT MENU TRANSFORM MENU SERVICE qael MENU TESTS TEST OPTIONS SELF DIAGNOSE SERV ICE MODES ANALOG BUS on OFF PEEK POKE FIRMWARE REVISION RETURN FRACN TUNE on OF SRC ADJUST MENU SOURCE PLL ON off
303. problem still exists refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter in this manual for more troubleshooting information System Verification and Performance Tests 2 23 4 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C without Option 075 Specifications Frequency Range IF Bandwidth Average Noise Floor Level Transmission 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 dBm 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 dBm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 3 kHz 90 dBm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 10 Hz 110 dBm 3 GHz to 6 GHz 3 kHz 85 dBm 3 GHz to 6 GHz 10 Hz 105 dBm 1 HP 8752C with Option 003 2 HP 8752C with Option 006 Equipment Calibration kit 500 type N 0 0 0 0 cece cence ees HP 85032B Cable 500 type N 24 inch coco coccion HP P N 8120 4781 Warm up time one hour Description This test determines the analyzer s transmission test port input noise floor level It is tested at 0 dBm at two different IF bandwidths Procedure Noise Floor Level at 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz Standard Option 300 kHz to 3 GHz Option 003 or 300 kHz to 6 GHz Option 006 with an IF BW of 3 kHz 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 6 2 24 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C REFLECTION TEST PORT TRANSMISSION TEST PORT xh62e Figure 2 6 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level Test Setup 1 Press POWER 0 1 If your analyzer has Option 003 press S n I
304. ptions The analyzer has up to 80 routines that test verify and adjust the instrument This section describes those tests Internal Tests This group of tests runs without external connections or operator interaction All return a PASS or FAIL condition All of these tests run on power up and PRESET except as noted 0 ALL INT Runs only when selected It consists of internal tests 3 11 13 16 and 20 Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass the test displays a PASS status Each test in the subset retains its own test status 1 PRESET Runs the following subset of internal tests first the ROM RAM tests 2 3 and 4 then tests 5 through 11 14 15 and 16 If any of these tests fail this test returns a FAIL status Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass this test displays a PASS status Each test in the subset retains its own test status This same subset is available over HP IB as TST Refer to HP IB service mnuemonics definitions It is not performed upon remote preset 2 ROM Part of the ROM RAM tests and cannot be run separately Refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter for more information 3 CMOS RAM Verifies the A9 CPU CMOS long term memory with a non destructive write read pattern A destructive version that writes over stored data is shown in Table 10 2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 7 4 Mai
305. r front panel for relative power measurements 2 22 System Verification and Performance Tests 15 16 17 18 Press POWER E 1 G G1 Record the power meter reading in the Results Measured column on the Performance Test Record Utilizing the Power Offset value listed in the Performance Test Record calculate the Power Level Linearity using the following formula Power Level Linearity Measured Value Power Offset Record the result of your calculation on the Performance Test Record Repeat steps 15 16 and 17 for the other power levels listed in the Performance Test Record Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 004 and 006 19 20 Press MENU CW FREQ 6 G n Repeat steps 14 15 16 17 and 18 for the power levels listed in the Performance Test Record Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 003 004 and 075 21 22 Press MENU CW FREQ 2 G n Perform steps 14 15 16 17 and 18 for the power levels listed in the Performance Test Record In case of difficulty Le If you cannot set the test port power at any power level be sure the analyzer s source power is activated To do so press POWER Check the SOURCE PWR softkey ON should be highlighted Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter in this manual Perform the RF Output Power Correction Constants Adjustment procedure If the
306. r matches the HP IB address set on the device itself DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM Error Number The disk drive is not responding correctly Refer to the disk 39 drive operating manual DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR Error Number The analyzer and the external disk drive aren t communicating 190 properly Check the HP IB connection and then try substituting another disk drive to isolate the problem instrument DISK not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify power to 38 the disk drive and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the disk drive Ensure that the disk drive address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the disk drive itself 10 56 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DISK READ WRITE ERROR Error Number There may be a problem with your disk Try a new floppy disk 189 If a new floppy disk does not eliminate the error suspect hardware problems INITIALIZATION FAILED Error Number The disk initialization failed probably because the disk is 47 damaged NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS Error Number The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a 69 calibration is already in progress Start a new calibration NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE Error Number The store operation will overflow the available disk space 44 Insert a new disk or purge files to create free disk space NO FILE S FOUND ON DI
307. r or demagnetizer 1 3 bus analog 10 25 bus nodes 10 29 C cable inspection 6 10 cables 1 3 part numbers 13 12 13 14 13 16 13 18 25 cable test 9 5 CAL FACTOR SENSOR A 10 6 CAL FACTOR SENSOR B 10 6 CALIBRATION ABORTED 10 54 calibration coefficients 11 1 calibration device inspection 9 3 calibration kit 7 mm 500 1 3 calibration kit device verification 9 4 calibration kit type N 759 1 3 calibration procedure 11 4 11 6 CALIBRATION REQUIRED 10 55 care of connectors 1 5 CAUTION OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT POWER REDUCED 8 2 CAUTION OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT POWER REDUCED 8 2 cavity oscillator frequency correction constants test 54 adjustment 3 24 Cav Osc Cor 10 14 CC procedures initialize EEPROMs test 58 3 37 center conductor damage 9 3 certification 15 1 characteristics type N test port 500 2 6 type N test port 500 directivity 2 6 type N test port 500 load match 2 7 type N test port 50Q reflection tracking 2 6 type N test port 500 source match reflection 2 6 type N test port 500 source match transmission 2 6 type N test port 50Q transmission tracking 2 7 type N test port 750 2 7 type N test port 75Q directivity 2 7 type N test port 750 load match 2 8 type N test port 75Q reflection tracking 2 8 type N test port 75Q source match reflection 2 7 type N test port 75Q source match transmission 2 8 type N test port 75Q transmission
308. ramming Guide Invoking Tests Remotely Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts Since bit 1 of the Event Status Register B is set bit 1 service routine waiting any time a service routine prompts the user for an expected response you can send an appropriate response using one of the following techniques m Read event status register B to reset the bit m Enable bit 1 to interrupt ESNB D See Status Reporting in the Programming Guide m Respond to the prompt with a TESRn command see Tests Menu at the beginning of this chapter Symbol Conventions An optional operand A numerical operand lt gt A necessary appendage An either or choice in appendages 10 52 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Analog Bus Codes ANAI D Measures and displays the analog input The preset state input to the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN The other 30 nodes may be selected with D only if the ABUS is enabled ANABon OUTPCNTR Outputs the counter s frequency data OUTPERRO Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a service routine OUTPTESS Outputs the integer status of the test most recently executed Status codes are those listed under TST TST Executes the power on self test internal test 1 and outputs an integer test status Status codes are as follows O pass 1 fail 2 in progress 3 not available 4 not done 5 done Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 5
309. re working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Continue with Remove the Assemblies Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages Check the fuses along the top edge of A8 If any A8 fuse has burned out replace it If it burns out again when power is applied to the analyzer A8 or A15 is faulty Determine which assembly has failed as follows 1 Remove the A15W1 cable at A8 see Figure 5 5 2 Measure the voltages at Al5W1Pl see Figure 5 6 with a voltmeter that has a small probe 3 Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5 2 a If the voltages are within tolerance replace AS a If the voltages are not within tolerance replace A15 5 14 Power Supply Troubleshooting If the green LEDs are now on the A15 preregulator and A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Continue with Remove the Assemblies Remove the Assemblies 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Install A8 Remove the jumper from A8TP2 AGND to chassis ground 3 Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below see Figure 5 5 Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting an assembly A9 CPU A10 digital IF All phase lock A12 reference A13 fractional N analog A14 fractional N digital A19 graphics processor disconnect W14 A18W1 and W20 4 Switch on the analyzer and observe the gree
310. retune Cor DONE displayed the adjustment is complete and can be tested by pressing PRESET and again observing the display o Normal operation observed the adjustment is complete Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure o Error messages observed refer to the chapter titled Source Troubleshooting a Continued improper operation refer to the chapter titled Source Troubleshooting 3 14 Adjustments and Correction Constants 7 Display Intensity Adjustments Test 49 Equipment Required Item Model Number Photometer Tektronix J16 Photometer probe Tektronix J6503 Light occluder Tektronix 016 0305 00 Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure There are three display intensity adjustments 1 background 2 maximum 3 operating default Perform these adjustments when either the A19 GSP A9 CPU or A18 display assemblies are replaced as indicated in Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Note This procedure should be performed with a photometer and only by qualified service personnel Background Adjustment 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 2 In a dimly lit room or with the analyzer s display shaded from bright lights press PRESET Adjustments and Corre
311. rformed on it by the CPU The CPU reads the resulting formatted data from the main RAM and converts it to GSP commands It writes these commands to the GSP for output to the analyzer s display Theory of Operation 12 11 Detailed information on the data processing sequence is provided in HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide EEPROM EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read only memory contains factory set correction constants unique to each instrument These constants correct for hardware variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy The correction constants can be updated by executing the routines in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter Digital Signal Processor The digital signal processor receives the digitized data from the A10 digital IF It computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and magnitude data from the 4 kHz IF signal The resulting raw data is written into the main RAM A18 Display The A18 display is a 7 5 inch raster scan CRT with associated drive circuitry It receives a 65V power supply from the A19 GSP along with digital TTL horizontal and vertical sync signals as well as red green and blue RGB video signals Automatic degaussing is performed whenever the instrument is switched on to minimize the magnetization of the display A19 GSP The A19 graphics system processor GSP provides an interface between the A9 CPU and the A18 display The CPU
312. ristics type N test port 500 2 6 type N test port 750 2 8 reflection tracking Ep 11 15 REF signal At A11TP9 7 17 removing A8 5 14 line fuse 5 7 REPEAT ON OFF 10 5 replaceable parts 13 1 abbreviations 13 40 accessories 13 38 cables 13 12 13 14 13 16 13 18 25 chassis 13 28 display bezel 13 26 front panel 13 8 hardware 13 14 13 16 13 30 13 32 13 34 13 35 13 36 labels 13 37 major assemblies 13 6 miscellaneous 13 38 option descriptions 13 40 ordering 13 4 post regulator fuses 13 30 rear panel 13 10 rebuilt exchange assemblies 13 2 reference designations 13 40 sampler 13 18 25 source 13 18 25 replacement sequence 4 2 required tools 1 1 RESET MEMORY 10 50 response calibration procedure 11 6 return analyzer for repair 4 2 revision firmware softkey 10 51 RF cable set 1 3 RF output power correction constants test 47 adjustment 3 11 RF power from source 7 3 RGB outputs 10 16 ROM 10 7 S safety 15 1 before applying power 15 6 earth ground 15 6 general 15 6 servicing 15 6 safety symbols 15 4 sales and service offices 15 2 sales offices 15 2 sampler Index 17 part numbers 13 18 25 Sampler Cor 10 14 SAMPLER COR ON OFF 10 23 sampler mixer 12 28 2nd LO signal 12 28 high band 12 28 low band 12 28 mixer circuit 12 29 SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 10 62 SEGMENT 10 6 selector switch check 5 7 self diagnose softkey 10 7 self test 4 3 SELF TEST
313. rm up time Description and Procedure 1 1 ee eee ee Spur Search Procedure with Filter Spur Search Procedure without Filter 12 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 55 Equipment Warm up time Description and Procedure 2 500884 13 Option Numbers Correction Constant Test 56 Equipment Warm up time Description and Procedure 0 050884 Option 004 Installation 14 Initialize EEPROMs Test 58 2 2 a 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure 2 2 2 Equipment Required Warm up time Description and Procedure 2 80 88 4 How to Make an EEPROM Backup Disk and Store CCs and Data COLE Joe How to Recall CC Data from the EEPROM Disk into the Analyzer 16 Model Number Correction Constant Option 075 Only Equipment Warmup time Description and Procedure 2 0 88 4 17 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments 2 Equipment Warmup time Description and Procedure 2 505088 4 Vertical Position Adjustment 0 Focus Adjustment 18 Display Degaussing Demagnetizing a a a a aa a aa Contents 6 Equipment Warm up time Description and Procedure a 4 19 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Equipment Required 3 22 3 22 3 24 3 24 3 24 3 24 3 26 3 28 3 32 3 32
314. rmance Tests chapter Having Your Analyzer Serviced If your analyzer should fail any of the following checks call the nearest HP sales or service office for assistance See the table titled Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices in Chapter 15 If your analyzer needs to be returned to HP follow the steps below 1 Choose the nearest HP service center Hewlett Packard sales and service offices are listed in the Safety and Licensing chapter 2 Include a detailed description of any failed test and any error message 3 Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable antistatic packaging materials 4 2 Start Troubleshooting Here Step 1 Initial Observations Initiate the Analyzer Self Test 1 Disconnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer 2 Switch on the analyzer and press PRESET 3 Watch for the indications in the order shown in Figure 4 1 to determine if the analyzer is operating correctly MESSAGES APPEAR IN SEQUENCE INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT PLEASE WAIT SELF TEST PASSED ILLUMINATES DURING AND AFTER PRESET ILLUMINATES 4 SECONDS DURING PRESET PARAMETERS APPEAR AFTER PRESET CH1 RFL log MAG 10dB REF OdB START 300kHz STOP 1 3GHz 3GHz FOR OPTION 003 or 6GHz FOR OPTION 006 qh66c Figure 4 1 LED Power up Sequence If the Self Test Failed 1 Check the AC line power to the analyzer 2 Check the fuse rating listed on rear panel
315. rnal YO oa 5 cine sis ced y ENETEIA Salsa gl te bade YIG oscillator FL cs sentra iets taa flathead screws A O flexible Paid idas ENGA front panel FRAGEN nacio isis ea e fractional N FREQ R E E EEE ds frequency GHZ ERE LAEE ANRE LEATA A a eed gigahertz HENS ia EATE ETE hexagonal HP eeren e e SS re E E Hewlett Packard HPB ves Hewlett Packard interface bus HAX ii idad hex recess screws MD oe Ga eG ete Be eee inside diameter A See peti sea ak od intermediate frequency VO sexe Pa E Soden EE EE PE E EEE input output TIED scat T T E N E EE light emitting diode Mey E EEE EEEE meters Micra ra rea one metric hardware MZ ii a megahertz MI ar ada dere i e millimeters MNL corona states ria rr manual MON tario teeta et ie tied monitor NOM genios aniei oE lira edi o nominal NTD Mustafa te non time delay NV a a aA nylon OD ici ene alt diated sue outside diameter ODE minar ea atone option OSC Dei is emt esos eid oscillator PO fairer e neia nave bug tone yb beaten cies patch lock screws POr trino printed circuit A tiga eis ta eat panhead screws A A dated E part of REF pedein tiir scan alar neta reference REP DL sida Po ti replacement Aaa HEEE N E S EEN bates dolida radio frequency iA E EEE E E EET AA rear panel ST ia ti socket head cap screws TA ate wisi a E EE E TORX recess screws Dictar rta EE EE ENEAN quantity Vi WE E A EOE ETES volt WER ee eaa nda wire formed M O ri EE E EEEa A without YUE eater eE EREDE toe
316. rocedure Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 33 13 Option Numbers Correction Constant Test 56 Equipment No equipment is required for this adjustment Warm up time 5 minutes LABLE RIGHT SIDE sh643c Figure 3 12 Location of Keyword Label 3 34 Adjustments and Correction Constants Description and Procedure Special information is stored in the A9 CPU assembly if an analyzer has any of or any combination of these options m 003 3 GHz operation m 004 attenuator m 006 6 GHz operation m 010 time domain This procedure restores that information after an A9 CPU assembly has been replaced Perform this procedure only if m the analyzer has one or more of the above options and m the A9 CPU assembly has been replaced and m the serial number correction constant procedure has been performed 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 2 Note the keyword label on the display see Figure 3 12 The label has one keyword for each option installed in the analyzer If the analyzer lacks a label call your local HP Sales and Service office to obtain the keyword s Be prepared to tell the service engineer
317. rocedure Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure This adjustment centers the fractional N VCO voltage controlled oscillator in its tuning range to insure reliable operation of the analyzer 1 2 3 Remove the analyzer right side panel Press PRESET Press DISPLAY DUAL CHAN ON MENU NUMBER of POINTS 11 G1 COUPLED CH OFF Press START 86 M u STOP 60 75 M u MENU SWEEP TIME 12 5 k m SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MEAS ANALOG IN Aux Input 29 x1 to observe the FN VCO Tune voltage Press SCALE REF 6 x1 REFERENCE VALUE 77 1 to set and scale channel 1 Press MKR to set the marker to the far right of the graticule Press CH 2 MENU CW FREQ 1 0001 M u SWEEP TIME 42 375 k m MEAS ANALOG IN Aux Input 29 x1 to observe the FN VCO Tune voltage Press SCALE REF 2 1 REFERENCE VALUE 6 77 1 MKR 6 k m to set channel 2 and its marker 3 46 Adjustments and Correction Constants FN VCO ADJ Adjustment Hole Yellow A14 Fractional N Adjustment Location sh644c Figure 3 15 FN VCO TUNE Adjustment Location 7 Observe the analyzer display for the results of the adjustment a Refer to Figure 3 15 If the marker value is less than 7 the adjustment procedure is complete Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 47 13 Mar 1995 15 16 42 CHi AUX Re 600 mu REF 7
318. rrection constants 3 22 adjust high low band transition 3 51 adjust IF amplifier correction constants 3 19 adjust model number correction constant option 075 only 3 42 adjust option numbers correction constant 3 34 adjust RF output power correction constants 3 11 adjust serial number correction constant 3 32 adjust source default correction constants 3 8 adjust source pretune correction constants 3 14 adjust source pretune default correction constants 3 9 adjust source spur avoidance tracking 3 58 adjust the fractional N frequency range 3 46 adjust vertical position and focus 3 43 backup the EEPROM to disk 3 38 clean connectors 1 5 degauss demagnitize the display 3 45 identify the faulty functional group 4 10 initialize EEPROMs 3 37 ship analyzer for service 15 3 troubleshoot accessories 9 1 troubleshoot broadband power problems 7 40 troubleshoot digital control group 6 1 troubleshoot receiver 8 1 troubleshoot source group 7 1 HP 8752C block diagram 4 16 HP IB addresses 4 7 HP IB cable 1 3 HP IB Failures 6 18 HP IB mnemonic for service 10 1 HP IB service mnemonic definitions 10 52 HP IB system check 4 7 I IF amplifier correction constants test 51 adjustment 3 19 IF GAIN AUTO 10 23 IF GAIN OFF 10 23 IF GAIN ON 10 23 IF Step Cor 10 14 improper calibration technique 9 1 Init EEPROM 10 15 INITIALIZATION FAILED 10 57 initialize EEPROMs 3 37 initi
319. rt a disk in drive 0 Connect the instruments as shown in Figure 3 13 Switch on the analyzer first followed by the disk drive Press LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER 4 Press SAVE RECALL SELECT DISK CONFIGURE EXT DISK Set the disk address disk unit number and volume number to 0 Press RETURN EXTERNAL DISK E If the NA does not toggle from INTERNAL MEMORY to EXTERNAL DISK c Make sure the drive is powered up its address correct and that the HP IB cable is OK c Make sure the supplied disk or an initialized non write protected disk is in place m If the disk is not initialized press SAVE RECALL FILE UTILITIES FORMAT DISK FORMAT EXT DISK YES Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE STORE EEPR ON SAVE RECALL SAVE STATE to store the EEPROM data with the instrument state This step stores the correction constants in a default file named ISTATEO on the floppy disk Press SAVE RECALL FILE UTILITIES and use the RPG to highlight the file ISTATEO Press RENAME FILE ERASE TITLE Then use the RPG and softkeys to title the file N12345 the first character must be a letter 12345 represent the last five digits of the analyzer s serial number When finished press DONE 10 Label the disk with this information m the serial number of the analyzer m the words EEPROM Backup Disk m today s date Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 39 How to Recall CC Data from the EEPROM D
320. s greater than 30 dBm Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 19 E ao ByN Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure Press PRESET Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 51 x1 Press EXECUTE TEST When IF Step Cor appears on the display press YES at the query to alter the correction constants At the prompt remove any cable or device from the reflection port Press CONTINUE At the prompt connect the attenuator and RF cable as shown in Figure 3 5 Press CONTINUE If DONE is displayed the adjustment is complete Refer to 15 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure to store the new correction constants Return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure If the procedure does not end with DONE check the A9 CC jumper and the setup and repeat In case of difficulty refer to the chapter titled Digital Control Troubleshooting 3 20 Adjustments and Correction Constants 9 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 Equipment No equipment is required to perform this adjustment Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure These correction constants improve dynamic accuracy by shifting small signals to the most linear part of the ADC quantizing curve 1 Put the A9 CC jumper in the ALT position see 1 A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure 2 Press PRESET 3 Press SERVI
321. s enclosed in a casting at the rear of the instrument behind the display It is connected to the A8 post regulator by a wire bus A15W1 Figure 12 2 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group A17 MOTHERBOARD 5VD 16 A15 A8 POST PREREGULATOR REGULATOR 5V 5VCPU 5V SENSE SWITCHING al POWER SUPPLY l lv LINE AND Tay ne POWER REGULATOR 18v 8V INSTRUMENT POWER REGULATORS MICROCIRCUIT POWER FAN POWER PROBE POWER DISPLAY POWER W14 TO A19 GSP 5VD A A LED LED EA A 9 GREEN LEDS UN OFF DURING ALL ON DURING NORMAL OPERATION NORMAL OPERATION ON DURING NORMAL OPERATION sg636d Figure 12 2 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram A15 Preregulator The A15 preregulator steps down and rectifies the line voltage It provides a fully regulated 5V digital supply and several preregulated voltages that go to the A8 post regulator assembly for additional regulation The A15 preregulator assembly includes the line power module a 60 kHz switching preregulator and overvoltage protection for the 5V digital supply It provides LEDs visible from the rear of the instrument to indicate either normal operating or shutdown status 12 6 Theory of Operation Line Power Module The line power module includes the line power switch voltage selector switch and main fuse The line power switch is activated from the front panel
322. s in this Chapter HP 8752C System Verification a HP 8752C Performance Tests 1 2 3 O 010 lt JIO Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C without Option 004 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 004 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C without Option 075 Transmission Test Port Input Noise Floor Level HP 8752C with Option 075 Test Port Crosstalk System Trace Noise Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy HP 8752C All Options Phase Dynamic Accuracy HP 8752C All Options Compression m HP 8752C Performance Test Record 2 2 System Verification and Performance Tests HP 8752C System Verification Equipment For standard HP 8752C network analyzer Calibration kit 500 type N 0 00 cece cece tee eens HP 85032B Cable type N 500 24 inch 0 00 eee eee HP P N 8120 4781 Printer sgt ae asd ae ne hope eas HP ThinkJet DeskJet LaserJet For the HP 8752C with Option 075 Calibration kit 750 type N 00 0 0 00 cc cence ee ee HP 85036B Cable type N 750 24 inch 00 0 HP P N 8120 2408 PENCE oe acer ogents aaee a ion Men fame Sea i HP ThinkJet DeskJet LaserJet Warm up time one hour Description The HP 8752C system verification consists of performing the verification procedure mentioned in this section The verificatio
323. s may not represent a true failure if at the worst point the test data is within the measurement uncertainty window not displayed on the analyzer Refer to Figure 2 1 for interpretations of test data 2 4 System Verification and Performance Tests LIMIT LINE ERA A EA Shim MEASUREMENT YIIIIANXZAA UNCERTAINTY AKIA J NINDOW LUTEAL ada loa COLMA HEL DLL AAA AK ii ENE e ae Aa PASS LIMIT LINE ATA ala MEASUREMENT A UNCERTAINTY WINDOW LII SITIO VILELLA LA Lila IN de LIMIT LINE HENTAI CIP LALA MEASUREMENT AA 3 UNCERTAINTY VO 4 IN Wn Lh dh kielelide a PASS result with a FAIL possibility LIMIT LINE MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY WINDOW SILLINESS LIA DALIA LE ooo LLEILA we AVAL am FAIL result with a PASS possibility xh68_c Figure 2 1 Measurement Uncertainty Window System Verification and Performance Tests 2 5 HP 8752C Type N Test Port Characteristics 500 System Directivity Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 40 ap 3 30 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 35 dB 2 51 dB 3 0 GHz to 6 0 GHz 30 dB 3 30 dB 1 30 dB 300 kHz to 10 MHz Source Match Reflection Frequency Range Specification Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 30 dB 2 51 dB 1 3 GHz to 3 0 GHz 25 dB 2 88 dB 3 0 GHz to 6 0 GHz 20 dB 2 88 dB Source Match Transmission
324. safety 15 4 SYSTEM IS NOT IN REMOTE 10 63 system performance uncorrected 11 9 system verification 2 1 2 3 procedure 2 9 system verification tests 10 3 10 13 Sys Ver Init 10 13 SYS VER TESTS 10 4 sytem verification cycle 2 4 description 2 3 kit recertification 2 4 measurement uncertainty 2 4 T table of service tools 1 1 temperature check 5 13 terms for test status 10 4 test 44 10 14 test 45 10 14 test 46 10 14 test 47 10 14 test 48 10 14 test 49 10 14 test 50 10 14 test 51 10 14 test 52 10 14 Index 19 test 53 10 14 test 54 10 14 test 55 10 15 test 56 10 15 test 58 3 87 10 15 test 59 10 16 test 60 10 16 test 61 10 16 test 62 10 16 test 63 10 16 test 64 10 16 test 65 10 16 test 66 10 17 test 67 69 10 17 test 70 10 17 test 71 10 17 test 72 10 17 test 73 74 10 17 test 75 10 18 test 76 10 18 test 77 10 18 test 78 10 18 test 79 10 18 test 80 10 18 TEST ABORTED 10 63 test cables 9 5 test descriptions 10 7 test equipment for service 1 1 TEST OPTIONS 10 5 test options menu 10 5 Test Pat 1 10 17 Test Pat 10 10 18 Test Pat 11 10 18 Test Pat 12 10 18 Test Pat 13 10 18 Test Pat 14 10 18 Test Pat 15 10 18 Test Pat 2 4 10 17 Test Pat 5 10 17 Test Pat 6 10 17 Test Pat 7 10 17 Index 20 Test Pat 8 9 10 17 test patterns 10 3 test port connector inspection 9 3 tests adjustments 10 14 display 10 16
325. sembly includes a 3 0 to 6 8 GHz YIG oscillator and a 3 8 GHz cavity oscillator The outputs of these oscillators are mixed to produce the RF output signal In Option 006 300 kHz to 6 GHz the frequencies 3 0 to 6 0 GHz are no longer a mixed product but are the direct output of the YIG oscillator The signal tracks the stable output of the synthesizer The ALC automatic leveling control circuitry is also in the A3 assembly Theory of Operation 12 15 Source Low Band Operation The low band frequency range is 300 kHz to 16 MHz These frequencies are generated by locking the A3 source to a reference signal The reference signal is synthesized by mixing down the fundamental output of the fractional N VCO with a 40 MHz crystal reference signal Low band operation differs from high band in these respects The reference frequency for the A11 phase lock is not a fixed 1 MHz signal but varies with the frequency of the fractional N VCO signal The sampler diodes are biased on to pass the signal through to the mixer The 1st IF signal from the A4 R sampler is not fixed but is identical to the source output signal and sweeps with it The following steps outline the low band sweep sequence illustrated in Figure 12 4 1 A signal FN LO is generated by the fractional N VCO The VCO in the A14 fractional N assembly generates a CW or swept signal that is 40 MHz greater than the start frequency The signal is divided down to 100 kHz and phase locked in th
326. shooting 7 39 Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines Perform the following steps to determine at what frequencies and bands the phase lock problem occurs e Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES PLL AUTO OFF to switch off the automatic phase locked loop Normally when the phase locked loop detects lock problems it automatically aborts the sweep and attempts to recalibrate the pretune cycle Switching off PLL AUTO defeats this routine Press PLL DIAG ON to switch on the phase locked loop diagnostic service mode In this mode the phase lock cycle and subsweep number are displayed on the analyzer display See Service modes menu in the Service Key Menus and Error Messages chapter for more information Press PLL PAUSE to pause the phase lock sequence and determine where the source is trying to tune when lock is lost Refer to Source theory in the Theory of Operation chapter for additional information regarding band related problems Then use the procedures in this chapter to check source functions at specific frequencies Broadband Power Problems This section assumes that a power problem exists across the full frequency range but that no error message is displayed on the analyzer The problem will only effect the reflection test port Assemblies in question include m A3 source A30 dual directional coupler any cables from the A3 source to the output of the reflection test port 7 4
327. sing dB REF on an HP 436A or on an HP 438A power meter s front panel Press POWER 1 C Gi Record the power meter reading in the Results Measured column on the Performance Test Record Utilizing the Power Offset value listed in the Performance Test Record calculate the Power Level Linearity using the following formula Power Level Linearity Measured Value Power Offset 7 Record the result of your calculation on the Performance Test Record 11 12 Repeat steps 5 6 and 7 for the other power levels listed in the Performance Test Record Press CW FREQ 00060 G n 10 Press POWER 5 1 Set the power meter cal factor for this CW frequency Press the appropriate hardkey 4B REF or REL on the HP 436A 438A power meter front panel for relative power measurements Repeat steps 5 6 7 and 8 This completes the Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity test if you are working with either an analyzer Option 004 or an analyzer with Options 004 and 075 Otherwise go to the appropriate following section to ensure the reflection test port meets specifications at the extended frequency range Power Level Linearity for an HP 8752C with Options 003 and 004 13 14 Press CW FREQ 3 G n Press POWER 5 1 Set the power meter cal factor for this CW frequency Press the appropriate hardkey dB REF or REL on the power mete
328. ssages for receiver failure 8 2 error term inspection 9 3 error terms 11 1 directivity Ep 11 11 isolation crosstalk Ex 11 17 reflection tracking Er 11 15 source match Es 11 13 transmission tracking Er 11 19 E terms 11 1 external tests 10 3 10 12 EXTERNAL TESTS 10 4 F failure All phase lock and A3 source check 7 8 A19 GSP and A18 display operation 6 7 A1 A2 front panel 6 7 key stuck 6 8 of self test 4 3 phase lock error 7 4 receiver 8 2 RF power from source 7 3 failures HP IB 6 18 fan air flow detector 12 8 removal 14 20 variable fan circuit 12 8 fan speeds 5 22 fan troubleshooting 5 22 fan voltages 5 22 faulty analyzer repair 4 2 faulty cables 9 1 faulty calibration devices or connectors 9 1 Index 9 faulty group isolation 4 10 filter low pass 1 3 firmware revision softkey 10 51 floppy disk 1 3 FM Coil plot with 3 point sweep 7 38 FM sideband and spur avoidance adjustment 3 54 FN Count 10 11 FN LO at A12 check 7 19 FN LO waveform at A12J1 7 19 FRAC N 10 28 frac N analog source 12 14 Frac N Cont 10 10 frac N digital source 12 14 FRACN TUNE mode HI OUT signal 7 35 FRACN TUNE ON OFF 10 20 Fractional N Check 7 24 fractional N digital 10 47 fractional N frequency range adjustment 3 46 fractional N spur avoidance and FM sideband adjustment 3 54 frequency accuracy adjustment 3 49 frequency counter 1 3 10 25 frequency output in SRC tune mode
329. ssembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 5 Initial Rear Panel Procedure 1 Remove the top and bottom covers see Cover Removal Procedure 2 Remove the PC board stabilizer item 6 Figure 14 4 sh683c Figure 14 4 Location of EXT REF cable and GSP Assembly 14 6 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures SS Lift the A12 reference assembly from its motherboard connector and disconnect the EXT REF coax cable item 7 from A12J3 Remove the A19 GSP assembly clamp item 8 Disconnect the RED GREEN and BLUE coax cables from the GSP board you may need to move the large ribbon cable to access them El S WARNING A CAUTION A UNE f On oo oo 9 D P RE 9 A CAUTION 5 Q Figure 14 5 Location of Rear Panel Fasteners
330. ssociated with the power supplies functional group They are shown here m POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down due to one of the following conditions overcurrent overvoltage or undervoltage Refer to If the Red LED On A15 is On earlier in this procedure m POWER SUPPLY HOT The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly detect an overtemperature condition The regulated power supplies on A8 have been shut down Check the temperature of the operating environment it should not be greater than 55 C 131 F The fan should be operating and there should be at least 15 cm 6 in spacing behind and all around the analyzer to allow for proper ventilation m PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN The front panel RF probe biasing supplies are shut down due to excessively drawb current These supplies are 15VPP and 12 6VPP both supplied by the A8 post regulator 15VPP is derived from the 15V supply 12 6VPP is derived from the 12 6V supply Refer to Figure 5 7 and carefully measure the power supply voltages at the front panel RF probe connectors Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 19 OV CHASSIS GROUND 15V 12 6V oS 0006 GAL 1 0060 i E E CL A C hs PACKARD METIER ANALYZER sh668c Figure 5 7 Front Pa
331. st LO We 15T LO FROM A7 W7 1ST LO FROM A7 os A AA Re o Pad R SAMPLER BYPASS H 15MHz TO MIXER 1 299GHz STANDARD 2ND LO FROM A12 e H 15MHz TO TORTA wa 2 9996Hz OPTION 003 w32 ices TO 1 3GHz STANDARD Y R INPUT 3ookHz TO 3GHz OPTION 003 ist IF 1 L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz STEP 1 m H 1 QOOMHz 500 ATTENUATOR 1A30 DIRECTI ONAL AA AAA A A A A A A A a ae e ea a COUPLER 1 2nd LO 50 wi e mA 1st LO T T 1 loa H p e 500 AS A SAMPLER memas 1 5MHz 1 a y MIXER 1 299GHz STANDARD A 1 1 1 H 15MHz TO I 300kHz TO 1 3GHz STANDARD 2 999GHz OPTION 003 300kHz TO 3GHz OPTION 003 A INPUT l 1 we A 1 L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz H 1 000MHz I b A A A a i a i i i I ne a 2nd LO 1st LO 750 W75 W50 REFLECTION FORT e Fe se eS os e e l FAS B SAMPLER Less l MIXER H 15MHz TO 1 299GHz STANDARD 300kHz TO 1 3GHz STANDARD H 15MHz TO 300kHz TO 3GHz OPTION 003 2 999GHz OPTION 003 TRANSMISSION wa B INPUT E PORT L 300kHz TO 16 00MHz H 1 000MHz sh691c Figure 4 7 HP 8752C Overall Block Diagram 2 of 4 Option 003 and 004 Start Troubleshooting Here 4 19 2nd LO W5 1ST LO FROM A7 1st LO We 1ST LO FROM A7 r s 2 ee Ann a W7 15T LO FROM A7 TAS R SAMPLER ees H 15MHz TO MIXER 5 999GHz OPTION 006 2ND LO FROM A12 TO Atl wa MP1 y Pol 300kHz
332. st port cables is included These terms are characterized by measuring the transmission of the thru configuration during the error correction procedure Significant System Components m R signal path a A input paths a thru cable Affected Measurements All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors Procedure To view the analyzer s transmission tracking parameters perform a 1 port calibration then press SERVICE MENU TEST 4 x1 Error Terms 11 19 11 20 Error Terms CH2 MEM log MAG ate Abe BEF Lae ET sE ma RENEE Mi START 304 004 MHz STOP 6 668 086 gaa MHz sh6129c Figure 11 9 Typical Er 12 Theory of Operation This chapter is divided into two major sections a How the HP 8752C Works gives a general description of the HP 8752C network analyzer s operation a A Close Look at the Analyzer s Functional Groups provides more detailed operating theory for each of the analyzer s functional groups Theory of Operation 12 1 How the HP 8752C Works Network analyzers measure the reflection and transmission characteristics of devices and networks A network analyzer test system consists of the following m source m signal separation devices m receiver m display The analyzer applies a signal that is either transmitted through the device under test or reflecte
333. stallation refer to Post Repair Procedures at the end of this chapter to ensure that the analyzer operates properly Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 17 A30 Directional Coupler How to Remove the Directional Coupler 1 Perform the Initial Front Panel Procedure REAR BOTTOM RIGHT SIDE E sh688c Figure 14 11 Location of Coupler Screws on Bottom Front Frame 14 18 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 2 Remove the three screws which fasten the coupler to the bottom front frame item 35 Figure 14 11 3 Remove the front panel by sliding it out and over the type N connectors 4 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the front panel by pressing down and out on the connector locks 5 Remove the trim strip item 36 Figure 14 12 on the right side of the front panel by prying under the strip with a flat screwdriver 6 Remove the right side front handle item 87 o Ta lt a FF Al 3 E lo i WOU E 38 sh690c Figure 14 12 Location of Directional Coupl
334. t using the analyzer s display as an oscilloscope Connect the test point of interest to the rear panel AUX INPUT BNC connector This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available Also it can be used for testing voltage controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the device under test to the AUX IN connector Look at the driving voltage on one display channel while displaying the S parameter response of the test device on the other display channel With AUX OUT switched ON you can examine the analyzer s analog bus nodes with external equipment see AUX OUT on OFF under the Analog Bus Menu heading For HP IB considerations see HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions located later in this chapter Node 12 A10 Gnd ground reference This node is used in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low and high resolution circuitry A11 Phase Lock To observe the All analog bus nodes perform step A11 below Then follow the node specific instructions Step All Press PRESET ANALOG IN MKR SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Node 13 VCO Tune 2 not used Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 37 Node 14 Vbb Ref ECL reference voltage level Perform step A11 above and then press ANALOG IN 14 x1 SCALE REF REFERENCE VALUE xi The trace should be a flat line across the entire operation frequency range within 0 3 V one di
335. t 47 below Pretune Def Writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock pretuning accuracy Use this test before running test 48 below ABUS Cor Measures three fixed voltages on the ABUS and generates new correction constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high resolution and low resolution modes Use this test before running test 48 below Source Cor Measures source output power accuracy flatness and linearity against an external power meter via HP IB to generate new correction constants Run tests 44 45 46 and 48 first Pretune Cor Generates source pretune values for proper phase locked loop operation Run tests 44 45 and 46 first Intensity Cor Stores the current values of the intensity adjustments under DISPLAY for recall of display intensity values at power on Disp 2 Ex Not used in Adjustments Writes the secondary test pattern to the display for adjustments Press to exit this routine IF Step Cor Measures the gain of the IF amplifiers A and B only located on the A10 digital IF to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy It provides smooth dynamic accuracy and absolute amplitude accuracy in the 30 dBm input power region ADC Ofs Cor Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity characteristics using an internal ramp generator and stores values for the optimal operating region During measurement IF signals are centered in the optimal region to
336. t Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity A3AT1 4 dB Attenuator A9 CC Jumper Position RF Output Power CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity 8 dB Attenuator A9 CC Jumper Position RF Output Power CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity 14 24 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 15 Safety and Licensing Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institutes calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are
337. t Setup 2 2 2 2 33 Reflection Trace Noise Test Setup 2 37 Transmission Trace Noise Test Setup 0 2 38 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 2 42 Compression Test Setup e 2 48 Location of Major Assemblies 2 0 ee ee 3 6 NRM Normal and ALT Alter Positions of A9 CC Jumper 3 7 Source Adjustment Setup o 3 11 Maximum Intensity Adjustment Set up 0 2 2 3 17 IF Amplifier Correction Constant Setup 2 2 2 3 19 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Setup 3 24 Typical Target Spur Using Filter 2 42 3 27 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Alternative Setup 3 28 Typical Display of Four Spurs without Filter 2 3 29 Typical Display of Five Spurs without Filter 3 30 Variation of Display of Four Spurs without Filter 3 31 Location of Keyword Label 3 34 EEPROM Backup Procedure Setup 002 3 38 Contents 17 3 14 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Controls 3 44 3 15 FN VCO TUNE Adjustment Location 3 47 3 16 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Display 3 48 3 17 Reflection Test Port Output Frequency Accuracy Adjustment SOUL DA SAE Sete ee oe On ca a dee OR eS ee 3 49 3 18 VCXO ADJ Adjustment Location 02 2 020428 3 50 3 19 High Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace 3 52 3 20 High Low Band Adjustments Locatio
338. t description of the test and a reminder of the RECORD function 3 Press CONTINUE to begin the test 4 Disconnect all devices from the reflection test port as prompted on the analyzer display 5 Press CONTINUE to run the source match tracking test There should be a PASS FAIL result displayed on the analyzer 4 4 Start Troubleshooting Here 10 Press CONTINUE to run the transmission crosstalk noise floor test With the record function on this test will automatically run There should be a PASS FAIL result displayed on the analyzer Press CONTINUE and then connect the RF cable supplied with the analyzer between the reflection and transmission test ports Press CONTINUE to run the transmission tracking source load match test There should be a PASS FAIL result displayed on the analyzer Press CONTINUE to run the load match directivity test With the record function on this test will automatically run There should be a PASS FAIL result displayed on the analyzer Press CONTINUE again The analyzer now displays the result of the confidence test If the test failed a It could be due to loose connections Tighten all connections and repeat the Confidence Test ci It could be due to a bad frequency response correction Run service test 53 ci It could be due to a faulty RF cable Run the cable confidence test service test 22 or replace the cable Run the verification proced
339. tage difference drives the coil 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SOURCE PLL OFF to operate the analyzer in a swept open loop mode 3 Monitor the two YO coil drive lines In source tune mode the voltage difference should vary from approximately 3 5 to 5 0 volts as shown in Figure 7 7 a If the voltages are incorrect replace the faulty A11 assembly a If the voltages are correct replace the faulty A3 source assembly a If neither the All nor the A3 assembly is faulty continue with the next check 300 000 ms 150 000 ms 0 00000 s Ch 1 1 006 volts div Offset 7 000 volts Ch 2 1 000 volts div Offset 7 000 volts Timebose 30 0 ms div Delay 0 00000 sg606s Figure 7 7 YO and YO Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PLL OFF 7 12 Source Troubleshooting A12 Reference Check The signals are evaluated with pass fail checks The most efficient way to check the A12 frequency reference signals is to use the analog bus while referring to Table 7 2 Alternatively you can use an oscilloscope while referring to Table 7 3 and Figure 7 8 through Figure 7 14 If any of the observed signals differs from the figures there is a 90 probability that the A12 assembly is faulty Either consider the A12 assembly defective or perform the A12 Digital Control Signals Check Both of these procedures are described next Analog Bus Method l Press PRESET
340. tal IF enable 1 P2 5 A9P2 5 5 L DIFEN2 Digital IF enable 2 P2 35 A9P2 35 s DIFCC Digital IF conversion comp P2 33 A10P2 33 Figure 8 5 DIFCLK Digital IF serial clock P2 4 A10P2 4 Figure 8 5 DIF DATA Digital IF serial data out P2 3 A10P2 3 Figure 8 5 L ENDIF L enable digital IF P2 17 A9P2 17 Figure 8 6 L INTCOP L interrupt DSP P2 2 A10P2 2 Figure 8 6 Check for TTL activity Receiver Troubleshooting 8 9 JUN ora DIF DATA MS 16u4S DIF DATA consists of 16 serial bits per input conversion the LSB is on the right side and is the most volatile sg602s Figure 8 5 Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger 100 000 us 0 00000 s 100 000 us al A A ees Po EC EPA ces Ch 1 4 000 volts div offset s p ot voles Ch 2 e 4 000 volts div S fea rr Timebose 20 0 us div elay sg604s Figure 8 6 Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger 8 10 Receiver Troubleshooting Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good Since at least one input is good all of the common receiver circuitry beyond the multiplexer is functional Only the status of the individual sampler mixers and their individual signal paths is undetermined O If all inputs look good but the average power level is incorrect continue with Check the Frequency Response Correction a If one or two inputs look bad continue with Check the 4 kHz Signal Check the Freque
341. te the part needed The parts lists are organized into the following categories m Major Assemblies m Front Panel Assemblies m Rear Panel Assemblies m Cables Top View m Front Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware m Rear Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware m Source and Sampler Parts Standard and Option 003 m Source and Sampler Parts Option 004 006 m Source and Sampler Parts Options 004 and 003 004 m Source and Sampler Parts Option 006 m Display Bezel Assembly m Chassis Parts a Top View of Attaching Hardware and Post Regulator Fuses m Bottom View of Attaching Hardware m Right View of Attaching Hardware m Left View of Attaching Hardware m Rear Panel Attaching Hardware m Replaceable Labels m Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories Replaceable Parts 13 5 Major Assemblies Ttem Opt HP Part Qty Description Number Al FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD ASSY see Front Panel Assemblies A2 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE ASSY see Front Panel Assemblies A3 SOURCE ASSY see Source and Sampler Parts A4 R SAMPLER ASSY see Source and Sampler Parts A5 A SAMPLER ASSY see Source and Sampler Parts A6 B SAMPLER ASSY see Source and Sampler Parts AT 08753 60007 1 PULSE GENERATOR BD ASSY 08753 69007 PULSE GENERATOR BD ASSY Rebuilt Exchange includes board cover A8 08753 60208 1 POST REGULATOR BD ASSY 08753 69208 POST REGULATOR BD ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A9 08752 60016 1 CPU BD ASSY A9BT1 14
342. ter or Printer 2 4 2 If Using an External Disk Drive 2042 Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers 2 Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation 0 02222 Power Supply Check 2 e aa ee Check the Rear Panel LEDS 2 2 2 ee Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDS 2 2 Digital Control Check 2 ee ee Observe the Power Up Sequence Verify Internal Tests Passed 346 346 349 349 349 350 3 51 3 51 351 351 3 54 03 54 93 54 93 54 03 58 03 58 3 58 3 58 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 F 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 7 y 4 8 4 8 4 9 4 9 410 411 4 11 411 412 412 418 Contents 7 Source Check gt r Dart A e E ke a 4 13 Receiver Check e 4 15 Accessories Check 4 15 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence 5 2 Simplified Block Diagram o 5 3 Start Heke ia A a ee A a Ee OE Se aT 5 4 Check the Green LED and Red LEDonAlS 5 4 Check the Green LEDs on AB 2 2 ee ee 5 5 Measure the Post Regulator Voltages 2 2 5 5 If the Green LED on A15 is not On Steadily 5 7 Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse 5 7 If the Red LED On Al5isOn 2 2 a 5 8 Check the A8
343. the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to be shut down It also sends status messages to the A9 CPU to trigger warning messages on the analyzer s display The voltages that are not shut down are the 5VD and 5VCPU digital supplies from the preregulator the fan supplies the probe power supplies and the display supplies The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes by jumpering the SDIS line A8TP4 to ground Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector The fan power is derived directly from the 18V and 18V supplies from the A15 preregulator Because the fan is not fused it will continue to provide airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled If overheating occurs the main instrument supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full speed An overtemperature status message is sent to the A9 CPU to initiate a warning message on the analyzer s display The fan also runs at full speed if the air flow detector senses a low output of air from the fan Full speed is normal at initial power on 12 8 Theory of Operation Display Power The A8 assembly supplies voltages to the display through a wire cable The A8 supplies 5VCPU and 65V to the A19 GSP then the 65V is routed to the display Because they are not connected to the protective shutdown circuitry the A18 display assemblies can operate during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work Probe Power The
344. tions Table 1 2 Service Test Equipment 2 of 2 Required Critical Recommended Use Equipment Specifications Model Adapter BNC to Alligator Clip HP P N 8120 1292 A Adapter APC 3 5 m to type N f HP P N 1250 1750 A P Adapter APC 3 5 f to type N f HP P N 1250 1745 A P Adapter APC 3 5 f to type N m HP P N 1250 1744 A Adapter BNC m to type N f HP P N 1250 0077 P Adapter type N m to type N m HP P N 1250 1528 P RF Cable 24 inch type N 750 HP P N 8120 2408 A P RF Cable 24 inch type N 500 HP P N 8120 4781 A P RF Cable Set type N 500 HP 11851B P HP IB Cable HP 10833A B C D A Coax Cable BNC HP P N 8120 1840 A Coax Cable BNC m to BNC m 500 HP 10503A A Antistatic Wrist Strap HP P N 9300 1367 A T P Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 A T P Static control Table Mat and HP P N 9300 0797 A T P Earth Ground Wire P Performance Tests A Adjustment T Troubleshooting Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 3 Table 1 2 Required Tools T 8 T 10 and T 15 TORX screwdrivers Flat blade screwdrivers small medium and large 5 16 inch open end wrench for SMA nuts 3 16 5 16 and 9 16 inch hex nut drivers 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in Ib 2 5 mm hex key driver Non conductive and non ferrous adjustment tool Needle nose pliers Tweezers Antistatic work mat with wrist strap 1 4 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Principles o
345. uency response correction constants tests 53 and 57 3 22 high low band transition 3 51 IF amplifier correction constants test 51 3 19 initialize EEPROMs test 58 3 37 model number correction constant option 075 only 3 42 option numbers correction constant test 56 3 34 order of performance 3 2 RF output power correction constants test 47 3 11 serial number correction constant test 55 3 32 source pretune default correction constants test 45 3 9 source spur avoidance tracking 3 58 test equipment specifications 3 3 vertical position and focus 3 43 when to perform 3 1 adjustments test equipment specifications 1 1 adjustment tests 10 3 Adjustment Tests 10 14 ADJUSTMENT TESTS 10 5 air flow detector 12 8 ALC ON OFF 10 20 ALL INT 10 7 analog bus 10 25 ANALOG BUS 10 28 analog bus check of reference frequencies 7 13 analog bus checks YO coil drive 7 11 analog bus codes 10 53 analog bus correction constants Test 46 adjustment 3 10 analog bus node 1 10 30 analog bus node 11 10 37 analog bus node 12 10 37 analog bus node 13 14 10 38 analog bus node 15 10 39 analog bus node 16 10 40 analog bus node 17 10 41 analog bus node 18 10 42 analog bus node 19 10 43 analog bus node 2 10 31 analog bus node 20 10 43 analog bus node 21 10 44 analog bus node 23 10 45 analog bus node 24 10 46 Index 3 analog bus node 27 10 47 analog bus node 2
346. unicate with each other through DRAM This also verifies that programs can be loaded to the DSP and that most of the main RAM access circuits operate correctly DSP RAM Verifies the A9 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal processor by using a write read pattern DSP ALU Verifies the A9 CPU high speed math processing portions of the digital signal processor DSP Intrpt Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to respond to interrupts from the A10 digital IF ADC DIF Control Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the control latches on the A10 digital IF Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 DIF Counter Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the triple divider on the A10 CPU It tests the A9 CPU data buffers and A10 digital IF the 4 MHz clock from the A12 reference DSP Control Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to write to the control latches on the A10 digital IF Feedback is verified by the main processor It primarily tests the A10 digital IF but failures may be caused by the A9 CPU Fr Pan Wr Rd Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the front panel processor It tests the A2 front panel interface and processor and A9 CPU data buffering and address decoding See also tests 23 and 24 below This runs only when selected Rear Panel Tests the ability
347. unter If the analyzer fails by a significant margin at all frequencies perform the Frequency Accuracy and the High Low Band Transition adjustments Refer to the chapter titled Adjustments and Correction Constants for more information on how to perform these adjustment procedures Refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter in this manual if the problem still persists 2 14 System Verification and Performance Tests 2 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity For HP 8752C Analyzers without Option 004 Specifications Power Range Power Level Linearity Relative to 5 dBm 20 to 15 dBm 0 5 dB 15 to 0 dBm 0 2 dB 0 to 5 dBm 0 5 dB Equipment For standard analyzers Power Met ia a dt a HP 436A 437B 438A Power SEAS AE Aa Se HP 8482A Additional equipment required for analyzers with Option 006 PO WET SENSOR tt A A Seen ea A HP 8481A Equipment required for analyzers with Option 075 Power meter ooooooccoccco corr HP 436A 437B 438A Power Ses Pt ta a oa HP 8483A Warm up time 30 minutes Description This test determines the reflection test port output power range and level linearity for all analyzers without Option 004 The specifications are verified by first setting a reference at 5 dBm for relative power measurements Next the analyzer s reflection test port output power is stepped and measured over its operating power range The power level lin
348. ure 3 If the problem still exists refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter in this manual for more troubleshooting information 2 18 System Verification and Performance Tests 3 Reflection Test Port Output Power Range and Level Linearity HP 8752C with Option 004 Specifications HP 8752C Option Power Range Power Level Linearity Option 004 85 to 10 dBm 0 2 dB 15 to 5 dBm 0 5 dB 5 to 10 dBm Options 004 and 075 85 to 8 dBm 0 2 dB 15 to 5 dBm 0 5 dB 5 to 8 dBm 1 Relative to 5 dBm Equipment For standard analyzers Power Meter msc taniss HP436A 437B 438A POWer Senso a A HP 8482A Cable 500 type N 24 inch 0 anaana anaa eee eee HP P N 1250 1745 Additional equipment required for analyzers with Option 006 POWEF SENSO singe ie eee ns I ele eo deh ie ee ae ca HP 8481A Equipment required for analyzers with Option 075 Power meto enice tutti eos kt RANG A REGAN ENN Bob RON CS HP436A 437B 438A Power SAS a a gE e a e ds e i HP 8483A Cable 759 type N 24 inch 0 eee eee HP P N 8120 2408 Warm up time 30 minutes Description This test determines the reflection test port output power range and level linearity for an analyzer with Option 004 To verify the analyzer power ranges a power level of 10 dBm is first selected and normalized Next various power levels in different power ranges are selected and compared to the specifications listed in the
349. ure test 27 to identify which error term is causing the failure Cable Confidence Test This test provides an easy check of the RF performance of the transmission cable supplied with the HP 8752C The test limits used are the sum of the HP 8752C specifications that apply plus the uncertainties in the measurement Procedure 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXTERNAL TESTS 22 x1 The analyzer should display TEST 22 CABLE CONFID ND Start Troubleshooting Here 4 5 2 Press EXECUTE TEST The analyzer now displays a brief description of the test and the test limits 3 Press CONTINUE to begin the test Connect an RF cable between the reflection and the transmission test ports as prompted on the analyzer 4 Press CONTINUE and notice the PASS FAIL result E Tf the cable passes the test press CONTINUE again and move the cable gently in all possible directions to see if it stays within the limits ci If the cable fails the test replace the cable Refer to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation in this chapter if the problem persists and the analyzer does not use HP IB 4 6 Start Troubleshooting Here Step 3 HP IB Systems Check Check the analyzer s HP IB functions with a known working passive peripheral such as a plotter printer or disk drive 1 Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a good HP IB cable 2 Press SYSTEM CONTROLLER to enable the analyzer to control the peripheral 3
350. vice A ae AN 12 9 Probe Power y riada odin e ete a BLP eS 12 9 Digital Control Theory o 12 9 Al Front Panel Keyboard 0 12 10 A2 Front Panel Processor aa a 12 11 A9 CPU ALO Digital IF 2 0 12 11 M in CPU s ic a Se Be el a A DR E OD 12 11 Main RAM e Boke Bo dad ned ee 12 11 EEPROM 5 ac aid Ps OO ee Re ei ea hy ES y 12 12 Digital Signal Processor 1 a ee a 12 12 ATS DISPLAY 28 a aaa be aig O a POY aS 12 12 AEE ra e o ese A Wa ee ga 12 12 A16 Rear Panel s sos a ea gen a ls awed Ge ek 12 13 Source Theory Overview ee o 12 14 A14 A13 Fractional N 2 2 a e 12 14 ATZ Reference s oa gd oe ah Oe eG we Re A 12 14 AT Pulse Generator 12 14 ATT Phase Lock srr el doe a Ga e eee Si 12 15 A SUDOURCE SA ay coe A dean a eee Spy ey ie a 12 15 Source Low Band Operation 0008 2 2 2 0G 12 16 Source High Band Operation 0 0 2 2 04 12 19 Signal Separation os s scio sosa soa po n opor n Pon PoS goa 12 23 The A30 Dual Directional Coupler 12 23 Contents 13 Receiver TOCOTY de ia ech ce ee ee AE SA ek et A4 A5 A6 Sampler Mixer aoaaa aa The Sampler Circuit in High Band 2 2 The Sampler Circuit in Low Band 2 2 2 2 The And LO Signal sinara ii a A a Ek ok ch The Mixer Circuit 2 e o o ALO DISITalTE G a ee a Gg 13 Replaceable Parts Assembly Replacement Sequence e Save Money wit
351. vision of the reference value Vbb Ref is used to compensate for ECL voltage drift CH1 AUX Re 308 muy REF 1 29 U 1 1 2426 U hp 16940 404 046 MHz REFERENCE VALUE 1 29 Unjts L START 300 BBB MHz STOP 6 g pga G86 MHz sh6122c Figure 10 10 Analog Bus Node 14 10 38 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 15 Pretune open loop source pretune voltage Perform step A11 above and then press ANALOG IN 15 x1 SCALE REF AUTOSCALE This node displays the source pretune signal and should look like a stair stepped ramp Each step corresponds to the start of a band CHL AUX Re 594 mle REF 3 5 U hp START 6 394 048 MHz STOP 6 608 488 884 MHz sh6150c Figure 10 11 Analog Bus Node 15 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 39 Node 16 1V GHz source oscillator tuning voltage Perform step A11 above and then press ANALOG IN Ge x1 SCALE REF AUTOSCALE This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillator You should see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10 12 If this waveform is correct you can be confident that the All phase lock assembly the A3 source assembly the A13 A14 fractional N assemblies and the A7 pulse generator are working correctly and the instrument is phase locked If you see anything els
352. voltages are incorrect refer to the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter o If the voltages are correct entering but incorrect leaving the GSP assembly replace the A19 GSP assembly REAR pl a o 9 o o H H A A18W1 A19J4 W14 PINS ON CONNECTOR OF W14 10 86 42 917 5 3 11 LoT sh6202c Figure 6 6 Pin Locations on Connector of W14 6 14 Digital Control Troubleshooting Run Display Test 59 l On the analyzer press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU softkey 8 TESTS softkey 1 DISPLAY TESTS softkey 7 The analyzer will display TEST 59 Disp cpu com ND 2 Press EXECUTE TEST softkey 8 The display will blank and the front panel LEDs will flash once ci If all of the LEDs go off and the display remains blank the analyzer passed the test If the analyzer passes the test press and go to Run display Tests 60 65 a If any of the front panel LEDs remain on except for the port LEDs the analyzer failed the test Continue with the next check Inspect Ribbon Cable Repeat Display Test 59 1 Inspect the W20 A9 A19 rib
353. volts div Offset imebose 100 nsec div sg614s Figure 7 12 4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP9 Preset 7 20 Source Troubleshooting 2ND LO Waveforms The 2nd LO signals appear different in phase and shape at different frequencies Refer to Table 7 3 for convenient test points 90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band In high band the 2nd LO is 996 kHz As indicated by Figure 7 13 the 2nd LO actually consists of two signals 90 degrees out of phase 1 00000 usec 0 00000 sec 1 00000 usec sg615s Figure 7 13 90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals gt 16 MHz CW Source Troubleshooting 7 21 In Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band The 2nd LO signals in low band as shown in Figure 7 14 are not phase shifted In low band these signals track the RF output with a 4 kHz offset 100 000 neec 0 00000 sec 100 000 nsec AE Mel ae EE E ee TUN 1 REC El E es ee a EN a ee ee ia ae ee Eo E PE MEE EA A O A A A Ch 1 200 0 mvoite div Offset 0 006 volts Ch 2 200 0 mvolts div Offset 0 000 volt Timabase 20 0 nsec div Delay 0 00600 sg616s Figure 7 14 In Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals 14 MHz CW If any of the signals of Table 7 2 are incorrect the probability is 90 that the A12 assembly is faulty Either consider the Al2 assembly faulty or perform the A12 Digital Control Signals Check described next 71 22 Source Troubleshooting A12 Digital Control Signals Chec
354. w band adjustment perform the following procedure a Press SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON START 10 M 1 STOP 0 MZ Press ANALOG IN Aux INPUT DATA gt MEMORY DATA MEM Press ANALOG IN Aux INPUT MORE REAL Adjust C85 VCO TUNE to 0 units 100 mU Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON START 11 M u STOP M u to observe part of both the low and high bands on the analog bus Press MEAS ANALOG IN Aux Input DATA gt MEM DATA MEM to subtract the ground voltage from the next measurement Press ANALOG IN A12 Gnd 1 23 Gi MKR 1 Myo Press MARKER gt REFERENCE SCALE REF 1 x1 and observe the VCO tune voltage trace m Left half of trace 0 1000 mV and right half of trace 100 to 200 mV higher one to two divisions see Figure 3 19 no adjustment necessary If you still cannot perform the high low band adjustment refer to the chapter titled Source Troubleshooting Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 53 22 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Equipment Required Item HP Model Number Spectrum Analyzer HP 8563E RF Cable 500 type N 24 inch HP P N 8120 4781 Cable 500 Coax BNC m to BNC m HP 10503A Non metallic Adjustment Tool HP P N 8830 0024 Antistatic Wrist Strap HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire HP P N 9300 0797 500 to 75
355. ware other thread types will damage threaded holes 13 16 Replaceable Parts Rear Panel Cables and Attaching Hardware 4 PLACES 1 So E X w22 W23 4 sh613c Replaceable Parts 13 17 Source and Sampler Parts Standard and Option 003 Item HP Part Qty Description Number A3 08753 60234 1 SOURCE ASSY A3 08753 69234 SOURCE ASSY Rebuilt Exchange A3MP1 1250 0590 1 SMB CAP A3W1 08753 20107 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID EYO A3A3 to SOURCE A3 A3W2 08753 20032 1 RF CA SEMI RIGID CAV OSC A3A4 to SOURCE A3 A3A2W1 08753 60034 1 RIBBON CA ASSY EYO A3A3 to ALC A3A2 A3W7 08752 20024 1 RF CA 4 dB ATTENUATOR A3AT1 to BULKHEAD A3 OUTPUT A4 08753 60004 1 RSAMPLER ASSY A5 08753 60004 1 A SAMPLER ASSY A6 08753 60004 1 BSAMPLER ASSY Wi 08752 20021 1 RF CA SOURCE A3 to COUPLER A30 w2 5021 8770 1 RF CA COUPLER A30 to R SAMPLER
356. way to verify the operation of the cable is to run the Cable Confidence Test test number 22 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE CH1 RFL log MAG 5 dB REF dB 1 26 984 dB CH1 REL log MAG 5 dB REF dB 1 15 366 dB h GOOD CABLE 2 940 153 ada MHz tp PODR CABLE 5 858 par Su MHz PRm PRm Cor Cor Del Del iN sii d had hans ANIL yy VAAI yet yi i TI Y hi F A A or ji fd START 300 604 MHz STOP 6 604 446 gaa MHz START 304 000 MHz STOP 6 608 604 ana MHz sh61140 Figure 9 1 Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables Accessories Troubleshooting 9 5 Verify Shorts and Opens Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as the short and open in question If the devices are not from one of the standard calibration kits refer to the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for information on how to use the MODIFY CAL KIT function Set aside the short and open that are causing the problem 1 Perform a reflection 1 port calibration using the good short and open Then press FORMAT SMITH CHART to view the devices in Smith chart format 2 Connect
357. wer supply 2 Hold in the preset key Press and hold down the key while observing the four LEDs on A9 The far left LED should be off See Figure 6 3 4 RED LEDS RUN 1 2 4 co HP 8752 A9CPU Assembly sh6102c Figure 6 3 Location of Four LEDs on A9 CPU Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 5 3 Release the preset key Release the key and watch for the rapid sequence shown below Notice that the far left LED always remains on The filled circles represent illuminated LEDs o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o PRESET still held down PRESET released Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 two left LEDs flicker Pattern 6 Pattern 7 two left LEDs flicker 4 Observe and evaluate results O If the above sequence is observed and the far right LED remained on go to Check A19 GSP and A18 Display Operation a If the right LED does not remain on replace the A9 CPU assembly and repeat the three LED pattern checks a If the LEDs are held in any one of the patterns shown in Table 6 1 and have the corresponding error message replace the A9 firmware ICs Firmware ICs are not separately replaceable Replacement kits are listed in the Replaceable Parts chapter Table 6 1 LED Code and Pattern Versus Test Failed LED Code Sum Message Displayed Faulty Component RUN 1 2 4 o ROM 1L FAIL U24
358. wlett Packards offers many repair and calibration options for your analyzer Contact the nearest Hewlett Packard sales or service office for information on options available for your analyzer See the table titled Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices in Chapter 15 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 9 2 System Verification and Performance Tests How to Test the Performance of Your Analyzer To obtain the same quality of performance testing that Hewlett Packard has administered at the factory you must perform m the system verification procedure AND m all of the performance test procedures This quality of performance testing guarantees that the analyzer is performing within all of the published specifications A Hewlett Packard Customer Engineer will issue a Certificate of Calibration for your analyzer if two conditions are met m Your analyzer passes all the performed tests m The equipment and standards that were used to perform the tests are traceable to a national standards institute Note If you have a particular type of measurement application that does not use all of the analyzer s measurement capabilities you may ask your local Hewlett Packard Customer Service Center for a subset of specifications that you want verified However this does create the potential for making incorrect measurements when using a different application System Verification and Performance Tests 2 1 Section
359. y Accuracy adjustment procedure Node 28 A12 Gnd 2 Ground reference A14 Fractional N Digital To observe the A14 analog bus nodes perform step A14 below Then follow the node specific instructions Step A14 Press PRESET ANALOG IN SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 47 Node 29 FN VCO Tun A14 FN VCO tuning voltage Perform step A14 above and then press ANALOG IN 29 x1 SCALE REF AUTOSCALE Observe the A14 FN VCO tuning voltage If the A13 and A14 assemblies are functioning correctly and the VCO is phase locked the trace should look like Figure 10 17 Any other waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase locked The vertical lines in the trace indicate the band crossings The counter can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency in CW mode 21 Jun 1995 48 28 46 CHi AUX Re 2 Ur REF uv tp START 6 394 048 MHz STOP 6 400 000 000 MHz sh6153c Figure 10 17 Analog Bus Node 29 10 48 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Node 30 FN VCO Det A14 VCO detector Perform step A14 above and then press ANALOG IN RESOLUTION HIGH SCALE REF 50 k m See whether the FN VCO is oscillating The trace should resemble Figure 10 18 CHi AUX Re S mus REF u tp SCALE 5a mUni4s di START
360. y Replacement and Post Repair Procedures chapter 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter 6 2 Digital Control Troubleshooting Digital Control Group Block Diagram al reo q CREEN mH 2 FROM a19 GBP l LUE 2T A2 FRONT PANEL PROCESSOR ie ie L _ l Test seri Shue KAZZZZZZZZZZZZ r 4 fees ea A1 FRONT PANEL eae HP 18 HP 1B Lt itentace AZ ZZZZZZZZZZ EEBS FRONT PANEL E E PROCESSOR KEYBOARD e INSTRUMENT BUS i E I PA TO ee oa Focus INTENSITY Le Aue a DERI S E N F as are TRIGGER VAS CPU laux PA EEPROM f INPUT ee eal a ae aah TER E a 7 MAIN CPU PEERAA 1 A10 DIGITAL IF 42 3 I I AUX S a ROM RAM yt TIMING r r CONTROL t 1712 ANALOG lr DIGITAL SIGNAL oo Lal BUS PROCESSOR INSTRUMENT 1 2 172 sample MAIN RAM PEE NODES Rael ROM RAM eE CONTROL REFRESH an T oi F y js ti e a ies 5 i Ave mies DES on 1 4 T I E eee ees 1 7 IF B 4kH
361. y that the printer address is set to 1 Refer to the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information on how to perform this task 3 Press SERVICE MENU TESTS SYS VER TESTS EXECUTE TEST A brief description of the test procedure is shown on the analyzer display To begin the test press CONTINUE 4 Connect a type N male open to the analyzer s reflection test port Press CONTINUE 5 When the measurement is done connect a type N male short to the reflection test port Press CONTINUE 6 At the prompt connect a type N load to the reflection test port Press CONTINUE After measuring the load the system directivity is checked and the test result is displayed on the analyzer Note If you have not activated the RECORD ON feature you need to press CONTINUE after EACH of the following tests a Source Match Reflection Mode b Source Match Transmission Mode c Reflection Tracking System Verification and Performance Tests 2 9 7 Connect a type N RF cable between the analyzer s reflection and transmission test ports Press CONTINUE to test the system load match 8 If you have activated the record feature the system will automatically test its transmission tracking Otherwise press CONTINUE to access this test 9 Press CONTINUE to end the system verification procedure In case of difficulty 1 Refer to the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter of this manual Perform the Frequency Response
362. z pl F A A18 DISPLAY A19 GSP aran A 40 37 A 42 50 4 ALOGNO i SUPPLY VOLTAGE I SE 9 05 9 12 FROM AS ji l A apie fet a de iy w20 DIGITAL VIDEO VIDEO w INTERFACE T PALETTE y a l I RED gp W21 a a MEMORY GREENS oo ro REAR l BLUE pyg MEL sh610lo Figure 6 1 Digital Control Group Block Diagram Digital Control Troubleshooting 6 3 Check A9 CPU Operation A9 CC Jumper Positions The A9 CC jumper must be in the NRM normal position for these procedures This is the position for normal operating conditions To move the jumper to the NRM position do the following an bh WwW N e 6 4 Unplug the analyzer Remove the top cover Remove the A9 CPU board Move the jumper to the NRM position Refer to Figure 6 2 Replace the A9 CPU board top cover and power cord HP 8752 A9CPU Assembly NRM Normal ALT Alter Figure 6 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU Digital Control Troubleshooting sh640c Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns The A9 CPU has four red LEDs that can be viewed by removing the top cover Refer to Major Assemblies in Chapter 13 to locate the A9 CPU and Figure 6 8 to identify the LEDs 1 Cycle the power Cycle the power on the analyzer and observe the four red LEDs All four LEDs should be on after power up If the four LEDs did not illuminate replace the A9 CPU after verifying the po
363. z 1st IF signal The full high band sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps by phase locking the A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional N VCO The 16 to 31 MHz subsweep is produced by a one half harmonic using the divide by 2 circuit on the Al4 assembly At the transitions between subsweeps the source is pretuned and then relocks Table 12 2 lists the high band subsweep frequencies from the fractional N VCO and the source output 12 20 Theory of Operation A13 14 O VCO 30 to 60 M FRACT I ONAL N A7 PULSE GENERATOR L Hz A12 REFERENCE A11 PHASE LOCK SOURCE 3 0 to 6 3 GHz YIG OSC l TO A5 A SAMPLER MIXER 3 GHz TO 8 GHz ea ASAT I LOX y REFLECTION rs i a TEST PORT OUTPUT xa u dB PAD DUAL DIRECTIONAL Tre SS E COUPLER TO 3 GHz 3 8 GHz CAVITY OSC FOR THE OPTION 00 THE 4 dB PAD IS REPLACED BY A 70 dB STEP ATTENUATOR sh61070 Figure 12 5 High Band Operation of the Source Theory of Operation 12 21 Table 12 2 High Band Subsweep Frequencies Fractional N MHz Harmonic Source Output MHz 30 to 60 30 to 60 30 to 60 40 to 59 35 4 to 59 2 32 8 to 59 4 35 7 to 59 5 33 0 to 59 5 31 5 to 58 8 37 0 to 59 6 49 0 to 59 4 1 2 om v N e 101
364. zer has not been operating properly with an external controller suspect the controller Check the following Compatibility of controller must be HP 9000 series 200 300 Refer to the Service Equipment and Analyzer Options chapter HP IB interface hardware is installed Refer to the manual nstalling and Maintaining HP Basic WS 6 2 that comes with your HP Basic software Select code is correct Refer to the manual Installing and Maintaining HP Basic WS 6 2 that comes with your HP Basic software I O and HP IB binaries are loaded Refer to the manual Installing and Maintaining HP Basic WS 6 2 that comes with your HP Basic software HP IB cables See HP IB Requirements in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide Programming syntax is correct Refer to the HP 8752C Network Analyzer Programmer s Guide If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely failed go to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Start Troubleshooting Here 4 9 Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Use the following procedures only if you have read the previous sections in this chapter and you think the problem is in the analyzer These are simple procedures to verify the four functional groups in sequence and determine which group is faulty The four functional groups are m power supplies m digital control m source m receiver Descriptions of these groups are provided in the Theory of Operatio
365. zers Low pass filter HP PN 9135 0198 HP PN 9135 0198 RF cable HP PN 8120 4781 HP PN 8120 4781 500 to 750 minimum loss pad 2 N A HP 11852B APC 3 5 f to type N m adapter 1250 1744 1250 1744 APC 3 5 m to type N f adapter 1250 1750 1250 1750 Warm up time 30 minutes Description and Procedure HP 8752C HP 8752C OPTION 075 FLECTION LECTION TRANSMISSION PORT PORT PORT TRANSMISSION PORT x MINIMUM LOSS PAD ADAPTER APC 3 5 f to N m MINIMUM LOSS PAD 502 TYPE N RF CABLE 502TYPE N RF CABLE LOSS PASS ADAPTER ADAPTER LOSS PASS ADAPTER FILTER APC 3 5 m APC 3 5 f FILTER APC 3 5 m to N to N m to N f A DIRECT CONNECTION sh655 Figure 3 6 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Setup 3 24 Adjustments and Correction Constants The nominal frequency of the cavity oscillator is 2 982 GHz but it varies with temperature This procedure determines the precise frequency of the cavity oscillator at a particular temperature by identifying a known spur Note With the filter the operator needs to distinguish between only two spurs each of which should be 10 dB to 20 dB 3 to 4 divisions above the trace noise Without the filter the target spur is one of four or five spurs each of which may be 0 002 to 0 010 dB invisible to 2 divisions above or below the trace noise 1 Put the A9 C

Agilent Technologies 8752C User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents